Home

PM+ Ver. 6.30 Project Manager UM

1. i re No Workspace For Help press FI Caution Multiple PM cannot be activated Therefore if an attempt is made to start PM while PM has already run already running PM will be displayed on the forefront 3 2 Exiting To terminate PM select the File menu gt Exit PM on the Main window or click the Close button For any window that has been edited a message for confirming whether to save the changes is displayed then the PM is terminated Note that PM cannot be terminated during build execution User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 29 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 1 Overview This chapter describes the operation flow from project registration to debugging for first time users of PM Figure 4 1 Operation Flow until Debugging Creating Workspace Setting Options Related to Compilation selecting Active Project Selecting Debugger Executing Build Other Settings 30 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 2 Creating Workspace The development flow using PM begins with the registration of a project In order to register a project a workspace to manage it must be created A workspace can be created using one of the following three methods Refer to the appropriate method in accordance with the environment used 1 Creating a new workspace A new workspace can be created by specifying the necessary project information in order in a wizard format Refer to 5 1
2. If the line number dose not consist of single byte digits the caret will be positioned to the top line of the jump desti nation file If the jump destination line is in a collapsed layer that layer will be expanded before a jump If Select a String between Double Single Quotations as Tag Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Set tings Edit tab and a character string enclosed in or exists on the line from which a jump is to be per formed PM searches for the character string in the jump destination line and the character string is selected with range selection If multiple occurrences of the character string are found the first occurrence is selected with range selection If the jump destination file has already been opened in an Edit window and range selection has been performed in the window the selected range will be released when a jump is performed When a tag jump is performed if the IDL file from which the source file was created cannot be found a message is displayed Clicking OK button in the message dialog box opens the Select IDL File dialog box so that the IDL file or source file to be opened can be selected 5 3 25 Returning from a tag jump After a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt To the Tag File returns from the tag jump destina tion to the window from which the tag jump was performed If the corresponding line in the window from which t
3. files were searched EOF This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Search results display area Drag and drop function Opening Select the Find menu gt Find in Files Select the Find menu gt Find in Project Explanation of each area 1 Title bar This area displays information searched character string searched file name search result file name If this window is newly opened Untitledx x number is displayed for search result file name 2 Search results display area This area displays the results of the search Up to 5 119 characters are displayed as the search results in the format of file name number of the line on which the character string is found contents of the line on which character string is founa Note that 5120 or more character cannot be displayed 118 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button Double clicking a line without a lower layer will tag jump to the corresponding place in the Edit window Double clicking a line with a lower layer will follow the setting on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab On the Edit tab either of the following can be selected Expands a collapsed layer or collapses an expanded layers Selects a word Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in th
4. 69 93 Batch Build 69 93 Copy 43 88 Batch Build Settings 71 Copy for Append 43 88 Batch Rebuild 70 93 Copy Link Directive File from dialog box 273 Build 69 93 Copy Startup File from dialog box 267 Build and Debug 68 93 Customize 74 94 Build Settings 71 93 Customize dialog box 320 Clean 70 93 Cut 43 88 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 389 Cut for Append 43 88 CVS Commit 65 92 CVS Commit dialog box 240 CVS Diff 66 92 CVS Log 65 92 CVS Log dialog box 242 CVS Status 66 92 CVS Status dialog box 244 CVS Update 65 92 CVS Update dialog box 238 D Debug 70 93 Debug Build 280 281 Debugger Settings 73 94 Debugger Settings dialog box Definitions of words 113 Delete 44 89 Delete the Line 45 89 Delete the Word 44 89 291 Delete to the End of Line 45 89 Delete to the End of Word 44 89 Delete to the Top of Line 45 89 Demote 58 91 Destroy All 39 88 Development tools 25 Device File Installer 73 94 Dialog box About PM 344 Add Build Mode 281 Add Command 286 Add New Memo 264 Add New Project Step 1 9 143 Add New Project Step 2 9 145 Add New Project Step 3 9 147 Add New Project Step 4 9 149 Add New Project Step 5 9 151 Add New Project Step 6 9 153 Add New Project Step 7 9 155 Add New Project Ste
5. Action by User Decrease the number of the characters per line and enter again FO210 Message This file has been used by another process Please terminate using application A file currently being edited by another application was edited on PM However this mes sage only functions if the application using the same file is an application that has exclusive Cause file access control such as Word Action by User Close the application using this file FO211 Message Failed to create Object Cause A new object could not be created Action by User Verify that the specified object is installed correctly FO212 Message Failed to copy clipboard Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application Cause The object could not be copied to the clipboard because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Action by User Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0213 Message Failed to paste from clipboard Memory may be not enough Please terminate other applica tion Cause Object could not be pasted from the clipboard because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Action by User Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0214 Message Failed to Undo commands Cannot undo over there Memory may be not enough Please ter minate other application Cause The undo operation could not be executed successfully becau
6. Clicking the right mouse button on the project related file folder or the project related file name displays the fol lowing menus When a Project Related Files folder is selected Add Project Related Files Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box 106 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When a project related file name is selected Add Project Related Files Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Delete Project Related Files Deletes a selected file Opens a selected file under the set editor Open with Link Directive Generator Opens a selected file using the LDG filename This menu item is valid only when all the following conditions are satisfied A link directive file has been selected The LDG has been installed A project that uses a V850 Microcontrollers device is active Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file g Other Files folder The user can register any file freely Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name starts up un application in accordance with the file association Up to 100 other files can be registered per pro
7. button on the New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Click the File Name button on the Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the startup files to register from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the startup file to be registered The extension of startup file is o or s by default User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 269 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a startup file to register The specified startup file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 2 0 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Figure 6 91 Link Directive File Dialog Box Link Directive File Look in B PMtest l ek E Files test 9 Macro Spother products IE Buttonsys dir j sample dir Files of type Link Directive Filetdir Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Browse button after selecting the Use the Existing file on the New WorkSpace Step
8. l static unsigned chay TestDatal TestData m lpTop NULL fortn nt 0 nnt lt 10 nOnttt char mi m CcharJnOnt Funclimi tt Z QutPut EVE l EOF a j Test CAEM test testi c Untitledi Z i DE t CAPM test testl c CONPH test testi cld o fh Testl c yt CISPHM test testi cl include Test h l 1 files were searched EOF This section describes the following items Title bar Menu bar Tool bar Window display area Status bar Drag and drop function 86 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Title bar The title bar displays the following information PM the name of the workspace or the project file file name or window name va PM sample pre C PM_test test1c ZB Caution In file name the name of the file which is opened in the active Edit window is displayed If you wish to make it display with the path specify it with the Tool menu gt PM Settings View tab Menu bar The menu bar consists of the following menus 1 2 3 4 File menu 5 View menu Edit menu Find menu Layer menu 6 T 8 9 10 Help menu Project menu Build menu Tool menu Window menu 1 File menu Opens a new Edit window newly Up to 64 Edit windows can be opened including the Searc
9. 20 Customize Dialog Box Menu Tab 322 Customize Dialog Box Toolbar Tab 323 Customize Dialog Box User Menu Tab 324 Customize Dialog Box Keyword Tab 325 Edit User keyword Dialog Box 326 Edit C Language s reserve words Dialog Box 328 Save the Key Operation Dialog Box 330 Load the Macro File Dialog Box 332 Play back the Macro File Dialog Box 334 Entry Macro Files Dialog Box 336 Add the Macro file Dialog Box 338 Change the Macro file Dialog Box 340 Window List Dialog Box 342 Shortcut List Dialog Box 343 About PM Dialog Box 344 Message Dialog Box 346 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM List No 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 C 9 D 10 LIST OF TABLES Title and Page Messages on the History of Replace in files Window 52 Window Wizard Dialog Box List 80 Standard Bar 96 Build Bar 97 Option Bar 78K Microcontrollers 98 Option Bar V850 Microcontrollers 98 Messages on the History of Replace in files Window 220 The Meaning of each Message Type 346 Fatal Error Message List 347 Operation Error Message List 354 Question Message List 365 Information Message List 371 Command Format for Keyboard Macro File menu 376 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Edit menu 377 Command Format for Keyboard Macro
10. Click the File Name button on the Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to register from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a link directive file to register The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 2 6 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select Project dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the project to be added when a source file is dragged to the Project window while a workspace file or project file is open Figure 6 94 Select Project Dialog Box Select Project Please choose a project which adds the source filets Open source File Cancel 1 Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Drag and drop a new source file to the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Project selection area Select the project which registers the source file The project group and project names in the currently open project are displayed by d
11. E1405 Message s1 The device file was not found Device s2 Please install a device file by the device file installer Cause The device file set to the specified project file could not be found s1 indicates the project file name and s2 indicates the device name Action by User Check that the device file is installed If the device file is not installed install it by the device file installer E1406 Message The file s already entered Cause Action by User The specified file has already been registered in the project s indicates the file name Rename the file using a different file name and register it again E1407 Message This project file is not a project file generated with PM Project Manager Please update this project Cause The specified project file was created by a different NEC Electronics tool debugger etc not PM or PM Action by User Update the project information to that for PM E1408 Message This type cannot be selected multiple Please select one file Cause When adding a file related to the project a file type that could only be specified once was specified more than once in the project Action by User Select just one file and execute it E1409 Message Project group name is not specified Please enter project group name Cause An attempt was made to close the Project Group Name dialog box with the OK button without setting a project group name Action
12. Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Save button in the Function List dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Save in Specify the folder in which the file is saved By default the current folder is displayed 2 File name and Save as type a File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Directly enter the file name in the text box Alternatively select the file name from the list Note that the extension cannot be changed to other than txt or csv b Save as type Specify the type extension of the file to be saved Select the file type from the drop down list From this drop down list Function List Tag File txt or Function List Csv File csv can be selected If Function List Tag File is selected the function list is saved to a file of tag jump format If Function List Csv File is selected the function list is saved to a CSV file CSV file can be read by spreadsheet software 232 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE By default Function List Tag File is selected Tag File C PM_ test testl C PM test testl C PM_ test testl C PM_ test testl The names of files defined in the functions Defined line number Function name CSV File FileName Line Function Name C PM test testl c 19 main C PM_test testl c 37 Funcl C PM_ test test1l c
13. New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box New WorkSpace Step 5 9 Register Mode dialog box New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box New WorkSpace Step 8 9 Select Debugger dialog box New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box Figure 6 11 New WorkSpace Wizard at Starting New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information Workspace File Name sample 221 Workspace Information a select Tools wreate blank Workspace Select Real Time OS Startup File Ge Register Mode tt Link Directive File GH setup source Files X Folder CAPM test Browse Project Group Name ServoSys Microcontrollers Name Device Name VB50 Microcontrollers hi uP D702003 ti select Debugger oOo 4 om om amp oo Pa Confirmation Device Install l GH VO50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 This will set up the basic information about the workspace and the project Back Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Wizard flow Explanation of each dialog box Opening Select the File menu gt New Workspace 122 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Wizard flow The dialog boxes to be displayed differ depending on the selection The wizard flow of each selection is s
14. Opening Select the Help menu gt Shortcut List Explanation of each area 1 Shortcut List This area displays a list of the shortcut keys currently set in PM If a shortcut key is customized on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab the contents are reflected on this list For default shortcut keys refer to APPENDIX C SHORTCUT KEYS Function buttons Closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 343 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE About PM dialog box This dialog box is used to display the version information about PM If a project file is open the version of the NEC Electronics tools corresponding to that project and the device file is also displayed Figure 6 142 About PM Dialog Box About PH Integrated Development Environment Platform Ph W630 er xr xr Copyrightics NEC Electronics Corporation 2002 2006 All rights reserved Tool version Device File UPDVOS003 008 Worse This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Help menu gt About PM Explanation of each area 1 Tool version This area displays the version of the tool to be used among the tools selected in the project file currently opened in the format product name version date If the tree is opened the file name is displayed with the full path 2 Devic
15. Specify the file name of the Edit window with full path If the file name is not determined specify the title character string of the caption This is a character string specification so enclose with Readonly ReadOnly No Specifies readonly when selecting the Edit window of Read only If ReadOnly number is displayed on the caption specify the numberas readonly 1 etc 382 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Control Command related Table B 8 Command Format for Keyboard Macro control command related Contents Command Format Exit PM exit Start up external execution mod exec lt parameter gt ule lt parameter gt Specify the name of the execution module and all the execution module arguments with Example exec dir exec dir od txt exec z hide hidemaru exe startup z hide hidemaru exe Numeric variable definition variable name variable name initial value initial value Specify the initial value of the variable Caution An arbitrary variable name can be set for the variable name When the initial value is omitted 0 is assumed Example cnt initialized to O cnt2 5 initialized to 5 Character string variable definition character string variable name character string variable name initial value initial value Specify the initial value of the variable Caution An arbitrary character string name can be set for th
16. The load module file could not be found when the dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the name of the load module file that could not be found Action by User Execute build generate a load module file and try again FO700 ToolLinkManager is not running Cause During connection to the server the communication path of ToolLink TIS TLM returned its own fatal error Action by User Restart the tool to be used 352 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES FO701 cannot communicate with s Cause During connection to the server the server was logged out and the communication path of ToolLink TIS TLM returned an error s indicates the name of the logged out tool Action by User Restart the displayed tool User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 353 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 3 Operation Error The operation error messages output by PM are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the message in message number order All operation error messages have E prefixed to the message number Table 7 3 Operation Error Message List Number Description E1000 Message s This path has not be found Make sure that the correct path given Cause Action by User When specifying a path the specified path did not exist s indicates the specified path Check the path and try again E1001 Message s This file has not be found Make sure that the correct path
17. This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Status Explanation of each area 1 File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The order of files to be executed is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name gt function name gt include file name gt project related file name gt other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file 2 Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the drop down list 244 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the OutPut window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If t
18. filename Specify the file name with full path Close workspace closeworkspace nosave Close closefile nosave nosave Closes the edited file without saving Save save Save As saveas lt filename gt makesource notdevide replace crlf lflcr sjis eucl jis unicode filename Specify the file name with full path makesource Creates a source file notdivide Does not divide the source file replace Overwrites without displaying message to verify crlf Saves a line feed code as CR LF If Saves a line feed code as LF cr Saves a line feed code as CR Sjis Saves as Shift JIS code euc Saves as EUC code jis Saves as JIS code unicode Saves as Unicode 376 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Edit Menu Table B 2 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Edit menu Delete the Word deleteword lt all gt all Required to distinguish from Delete to the End of Word Delete to the End of Word deleteword Delete the Line deleteline Delete to the Top of Line deletebefore Grouping by Keyword grouping lt character string to be searche gt and or color delete none coloronly undocolor window lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with and or matchcase zen paragraph color delete none coloronly undocolor window AND search OR search Distinguishes a uppercase
19. 2 Collapse Caret Line Only This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Layer menu gt Collapse the Specific Layer Explanation of each area 1 Specify The Layer Specify the number of layers to be collapsed A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified The last set ting is displayed by default When this value is specified for the first time 1 is displayed 2 Collapse Caret Line Only When this check box is selected only the layers lower than the line at the caret position are collapsed When this check box is not selected all of the specified lower layers are expanded default Function buttons OK Collapses the specified number of layers If a layer higher than the one specified is already collapsed there is no change Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 225 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Layer Rule dialog box This dialog box is used to apply a layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window or set the layer rule to be applied when files are read By default all check boxes are selected Figure 6 65 Set Layer Rule Dialog Box set Layer Rule Goply Laver Rule Preview gt if FALSE bMode E J tch Cancel PUET SetWwindowTexti Str caze default Help gt else for x
20. 56 Layer Management 5 5 P ZOE A O 3h eo Bre cea See ey See ae 4 N OO OO FP ON Promoting layers 57 Demoting layers 58 Expanding or collapsing one of the lower layers 58 Expanding one of the lower layers 58 Collapsing one of the lower layers 59 Expanding all of the lower layers 59 Expanding all of the layers 59 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 11 5 5 5 6 Oh lt n O OURSE OE G A iN Po ae ge er a E e 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Collapsing all of the layers 59 Expanding a specified number of layers 60 Collapsing a specified number of layers 60 Displaying the top layer only 60 Displaying the first and second layers 60 Displaying the first to third layers 60 Displaying the first to fourth layers 60 Displaying the first to fifth layers 61 Collapsing a layer at the caret 61 Applying a layer rule 61 Display Functions 62 5 a aaa 5 aaan 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 0 12 Displaying a list of functions 62 Displaying a list of layers 62 Displaying the standard bar 62 Displaying the build bar 62 Displaying the option bar 62 Displaying the external tool bar 62 Displaying the status bar 63 Displaying the Project window 63 Displaying the OutPut window 63 Displaying an object as contents or icon 63 Displaying all objects as contents
21. 63 Displaying all objects as icons 63 Project Management 64 5 Oh Oa O O CO On Or OR el er Or a ONS oN ol Oe OO ON Oe Oe IP OY Oe Oe Oy Oe Oe Os SO a 6 1 CON DO OO FP W N 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Creating a project file 64 Selecting active project 65 Adding a new project to a workspace 65 Inserting a project into a workspace 65 CVS update 65 CVS commit 65 CVS log 65 CVS status 66 CVS comparison 66 Exporting a make file 66 Setting project information 66 Adding a source file 66 Adding a project related file 66 Adding other files 66 Making the active project selection combo box active 67 Changing a project group name 67 Changing a project title 67 Changing the tools used 67 Moving a project 67 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 5 7 Build Functions 68 on N Building and debugging 68 2 Rebuilding and debugging 68 3 Compiling 69 4 Building 69 5 Stopping build 69 6 Rebuilding 69 7 Batch building 69 8 Batch rebuilding 70 Updating dependency relationship of files 70 10 Cleaning 70 11 Editing 70 12 Debugging 70 13 Downloading multiple load module files 70 14 Selecting build mode 70 15 Setting build options 71 16 Setting batch build 71 aanaananaaananaa na NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN CO 5 8 Tool Management 72 5 8 1 Settin
22. 66 92 CVS Update 65 92 Direct Select Active Project 67 92 Export Makefile 66 92 Insert Project 65 92 Project Settings 66 92 Select Active Project 65 92 Project group 23 INDEX Project Group Name dialog box 256 Project Management 64 Project manager 22 Project menu 92 Project Settings 66 92 Project Settings Step 1 3 dialog box 161 Project Settings Step 2 3 dialog box 163 Project Settings Step 3 3 dialog box 165 Project Settings dialog box 246 Project Settings wizard 160 Project Title dialog box 257 Project Window 63 92 Project window 101 Drag and drop function 109 Explanation of each area 102 Files tab 102 Function name 105 Include Files folder 105 Memo tab 108 Opening 101 Other Files folder 107 Project group name 102 Project Related Files folder 106 Project title name 103 Source Files folder 103 Project related file 130 149 Promote 57 91 Properties dialog box 263 Q Quantitative Limit List 388 Quick tour 30 R Range selection 113 Rebuild 69 93 Rebuild and Debug 68 93 Recent File 88 Recent Workspace 88 Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Oper ations 74 Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Oper ations 94 Redo 42 88 Register External Tool dialog box 293 Re
23. CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description Q2007 The file s is read only Do you wish to rename to this file name Cause The name of source file that was attempted to be changed in the Change Source File Names dialog box is the same as an existing file name Also the file was read only s indicates the source file name Action by User Yes Renames the source file The existing file will be deleted The existing file will be deleted No Does not change the name of the file Q2008 Another process has changed s Do you wish to load it Cause The source file was changed by another editor after saving the IDL file s indicates the file name Action by User Yes Reads the updated source file No Reads the IDL file without reading the source file Apply to all update files Reads all the files that are updated without an update message if this check box is selected Q2009 Message Do you wish to close all windows This is to check whether all the windows are to be closed on when a workspace or project file is Closed Action by User Yes Closes all the windows No Leaves all the windows open Q2010 s The workspace file already exists Do you wish to rename old file to s bak and replace it lana The workspace file name that was specified in the dialog box to create a new workspace file coe Ne the same as an existing file name s indicates the specified file name Action User Yes Overwrites the wo
24. COYPM test testi cld o Testl c 74 AE certo CIYPH test test1 cf8 include Test2 h H Other Files H EA ServoSys 2 Projectiss int mint Project window OutPut window Edit window Search result display window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 2 Input Rules This section explains the rules for inputting characters in the windows or dialog boxes of PM 1 File names File names are composed of a to z Ato Z 0 to 9 _ and File names cannot be prefixed by a period or File names cannot be suffixed by a period Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for file names A file name consists of up to 259 characters including the path Caution A workspace file name or a project file name consists of up to 255 characters 2 Path names Path names are composed of a to z A to Z 0 to 9 _ and one byte spaces Path names cannot be prefixed by a period or one byte space Path names cannot be suffixed by a period or one byte space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for path names Apath name consists of up to 259 characters 6 3 Explanation of Windows Wizards Dialog boxes This section explains each window wizard dialog box of PM as follows Window Wizard Dialog box name Briefly explains the function of the window wizard or dialog box and points
25. E1612 Message Cannot specify these options in the same time d s Cause Options that could not be specified simultaneously for a macro instruction were set at the same time d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Action by User Delete one of the options and try again Message Wrong the specific string d s Cause Character strings in a macro instruction were not enclosed by d indicates the line num ber with the error and s indicates the line contents E1613 Action by User Enclose character strings by E1614 Message Divide by Zero d s Cause An attempt was made to perform division by 0 while a macro instruction was being executed d indicates the line with the error and s indicates the character string with the error Action by User Check the division formula and do not perform 0 division Message Over 255 characters in the line d A macro instruction line has more than 255 characters d indicates the line number with the error Set a macro instruction with 255 characters or fewer E1615 Cause A macro instruction line has more than 255 characters d indicates the line number with the error Action by User Set a macro instruction with 255 characters or fewer E1616 Message Syntax Error d s Cause There was a syntax error in the macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the charac
26. EX V850_test Header h Insert the include sentence to the each source file This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Edit menu gt Make Function Prototypes Explanation of each area 1 Generation method selection area Select a generation method from the following option buttons The selectable buttons depend on the file type a Add Function Prototypes of index1 Source file at caret position to top of the Index1 Source file Adds the function defined in the first layer Source file at the caret position in the Edit window as a prototype dec laration at the top of the layer b Add Function Prototypes of each Index1 Source files to the top of each Index1 Source file Adds the function defined in each first layer Source file in the Edit window as a prototype declaration at the top of the layer No addition is made to a read only file c Add Function Prototypes to the top of file Adds a function defined in the Edit window as a prototype declaration to the top of the file d Make new windows of Function Prototypes Creates a function defined in the Edit window as a prototype declaration to a new window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 197 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE e Make header file of Function Prototypes Creates a new first layer header file at the top of the IDL file being edited and crea
27. Function buttons Opening Click the Add button on the Build menu gt Build Settings Pre Build Process tab Click the Add button on the Build menu gt Build Settings After Build Process tab Explanation of each area 1 Command Describe the DOS command to be executed before or after build Up to 127 characters can be specified as a com mand Function buttons Adds the specified command to the command list box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 286 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit Command dialog box This dialog box is used to edit commands specified as required processing either during build execution prior to after build processing Figure 6 103 Edit Command Dialog Box Edit Command 1 copy cMtest lib testlib c test Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Edit button after selecting each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Set tings Pre Build Process tab Double click each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Settings Pre Build Process tab Click the Edit button after selecting each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Set tings After Build Pr
28. Str GetTextt vf while do while const struct Function v PreProcessor Sooly Layer Rule only the Range fou Selected This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule Click the Layer Rule button in the Open dialog box Click the Layer Rule button in the Insert File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Apply Layer Rule Select the coding to be subjected to the layer rule By default all check boxes are selected The layer rule for each item is follows a if For an if statement or else if statement the lines from that following of if to are indented If is followed by a source coding the lines up to that preceding are indented b switch The contents of a switch statement are indented 226 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c case default The lines after a case statement are indented up to the next case statement or default statement default state ment the lines up to that preceding are indented d for The lines from that following of a for statement to are indented e while The lines from that following of a while statement to are indented f do while The lines from that following a do statement to the last line of the while statement are indented g const The line
29. a m_ BF le include Test3 h void Funcdtvoid LPTEXT FunchfLPCHAIN peTemp int nld IF sdi LONG ITemp Temp 1054 Select the Layer menu gt Expand Func im bF le m olodex Funedt Temp 58 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 5 Collapsing one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Note that Collapse menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Figure 5 5 Collapsing One of the Lower Layers finclude Test3 h int monIndex BOOL m_bFle void Funedivoid it LONG ITemp include Test h ae Teip 1054 int monIndex Func m_bF le 4 pa m nIindex Funcd Temp wld uned Gente 4 Select the Layer menu gt Collapsel pTEXT Func LPCHAIN pcTemp int nIdx 4 it 5 4 6 Expanding all of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand All Lower Layers expands all of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the
30. cut key is assigned Key This area displays the keys that are currently assigned to the menu item selected in Menu List Assign Assigns the entered key to the selected menu item If the input shortcut key has already been assigned to another menu item the assignment to the menu is cleared Deletes the shortcut key assigned to the selected menu item Reset Clears all assigned shortcut keys and restores the default state refer to APPENDIX C SHORTCUT KEYS Press new shortcut key Type the desired key on the keyboard that key is then displayed in the text box To execute a menu item using a two stroke key entry enter the second key following the first However if a key cannot be used as a shortcut it will not be displayed If the entered key has already been assigned to another menu item the current assignment of the shortcut key is displayed as Currently assigned to If the second key is assigned to the first key it is displayed as Prefixed Key Multiple keys can be assigned to a single command Cautions The following key allocations are not possible so allocate different keys Alt A Alt D Alt E Alt Shift A Alt Shift D Alt Shift E The shortcut keys for Help menu gt External HELP 1 to External HELP 3 are fixed User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 321 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Delete key is assigned to the Edit menu gt Delete The assignment of the Dele
31. the Project Settings wizard will be displayed and update its project information for compatibility with PM Figure 6 39 Open Workspace Dialog Box Open Workspace Look in O PMtest ee Fal gt Files_test IG Macro 5jother_products a zample prw File name Files of type workspace Filed priv Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Open Workspace Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below 2 File name and Files of type a File name Specify the name of the file to be opened Up to 255 characters can be entered The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 173 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Files of type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are displayed in the default con dition Workspace File prw Project File prj All Files Function buttons Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 174 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dial
32. 138 New WorkSpace Step 9 9 140 Open 167 Open Workspace 173 Play Back the Macro File 334 PM Settings 299 Print 186 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Project Group Name 256 Project Settings 246 Project Settings Step 1 3 161 Project Settings Step 2 3 163 Project Settings Step 3 3 165 Project Title 257 Properties 263 Register External Tool 293 Replace in Files 217 Replace String 204 Save As 175 Save Source Files Option 177 Save the Function List 232 Save the Key Operation 330 Select Active Project 235 Select External Tool 295 Select RTOS 288 Select the way of Function Prototypes 197 Set Comment Mark 185 Set Header Footer 191 Set Layer Rule 226 Shortcut List 343 Startup File 265 Startup File to register 269 Tool Version Detail Setting 261 Tool Version Settings 258 User Setting 316 Window List 342 Direct Build Mode Selection 93 Direct Search 56 90 Direct Select Active Project 67 92 Display All Object as Content 63 92 Display All Object as Icon 63 92 Display Content Icon 92 Display Functions 62 Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon 63 DLL 25 Download Some Load Module Files dump 850 dialog box 289 dump8s50 72 94 70 93 E Edit 70 88 93 Copy 43 88 Copy for Append 43 88 Cut 43 88 Cut for Append 43 88 Delete
33. 191 Set Layer Rule dialog box 226 Shortcut List 78 95 Shortcut List dialog box 343 Show Index 1 60 91 Show Index 2 60 91 Show Index 3 60 91 Show Index 4 60 91 Show Index 5 61 91 Same Layer Line Down 50 90 Some Layer Line Up 50 90 Split 76 95 Standard Bar 62 92 Standard bar 96 Start up Ex tool 73 94 Starting 28 Startup file 130 149 Startup File dialog box 265 Startup File to register dialog box 269 Status bar 92 63 99 Stop Build 69 93 T Tag Jump 53 90 Title bar 87 Title Horizontally 76 95 Title Vertically 76 95 Toa Specific Line 49 To the End of File 49 90 To the End of Line 49 90 To the Function Definition 51 90 To the Index Line 50 90 To the Matching Brace 51 90 To the Next Split Window 76 95 To the Next Window 77 95 To the Previous Window 77 95 To the Specific Line 89 To the Specific Line in the Source file To the Tag File 54 90 To the Top Layer at caret To the Top of File 49 90 To the Top of Line 49 90 Tool 94 dump850 94 74 94 Debugger Settings 49 90 50 90 Customize 73 94 Device File Installer 73 94 dump850 72 File Compare Font 74 94 Load the Macro File Play Back 74 94 Play Back the Macro File 73 94 75 94 75 94 Play Back the Register Macro 75 94 PM Settings 73 94 Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Operations 74 94 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 3
34. 282 Build Settings Dialog Box Build Tab 283 Build Settings Dialog Box Pre Build Process Tab 284 Build Settings Dialog Box After Build Process Tab 285 Add Command Dialog Box 286 Edit Command Dialog Box 287 Select RTOS Dialog Box 288 dump850 Dialog Box 289 Debugger Settings Dialog Box 291 Register External Tool Dialog Box 293 Select External Tool Dialog Box 295 File Compare Dialog Box 297 File Compare Dialog Box Mini 297 PM Settings Dialog Box 299 PM Settings Dialog Box Workspace Tab 300 PM Settings Dialog Box External Editor Tab 301 PM Settings Dialog Box File Tab 302 PM Settings Dialog Box Recent Tab 304 PM Settings Dialog Box Source File by idl File Tab 305 PM Settings Dialog Box Window Tab 306 PM Settings Dialog Box Path Tab 307 PM Settings Dialog Box Edit Tab 308 PM Settings Dialog Box View Tab 310 PM Settings Dialog Box Layer Tab 312 PM Settings Dialog Box Scroll Tab 313 PM Settings Dialog Box Find Replace Tab 314 User Setting Dialog Box 316 Font Dialog Box 318 Customize Dialog Box 320 Customize Dialog Box Keyboard Tab 321 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 19 6 128 6 129 6 130 6 131 6 132 6 133 6 134 6 135 6 136 6 137 6 138 6 139 6 140 6 141 6 142 7 1
35. 8 5 Registering external tools 5 8 11 Customizing settings Word based searching in all the source files of the project Refer to 5 3 23 Searching for a character string within a project Setting the tool to be used Refer to 5 6 18 Changing the tools used User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 35 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 File Management Operations related to the file handling in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the File menu in the Main window Creating a new file Opening a existing file Inserting a file Closing a window Opening a project file generated by the previous version Creating a new workspace Opening a workspace Saving a workspace Closing a workspace Saving a file by overwriting Saving a file with a new name Saving all files Saving all files Changed files only Saving and closing all files Closing all windows Closing all windows without saving Changing a source file name Saving all source files Checking printing status Printing Printing directly History of files History of workspaces Exiting PM 5 1 1 Creating a new file Selecting the File menu gt New opens a new Edit window Up to 64 Edit window can be opened together with the Search result display window and the OutPut window 5 1 2 Opening a existing file Selecting the File menu gt Open opens the
36. CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box The contents of the specification are confirmed and the wizard for creating a new workspace is terminated Figure 6 21 New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation Create the workspace and the project as follows Workspace Information select Tools Select Real Time 0514 Startup Filet Register Mode ti Link Directive File Ge Setup source Files CAPM test Project Group Name Servcays Series Hame W850 Microcontrollers Device Hame 1 uP 0703003 Tool Set Name select Debugger Changed Selected01 W850 Microcontrollers Software Packae 350 Conti Tool Versions _ Confirmation GADS s 00 i a e Sie e EE LOG 1 01 SM0 wagi ohl for Waai W200 coo om om amp oo pa startup File CAPM testhcrths Register Mode lt Cancel Help 1 Confirmation area The various information specified with this wizard for creating a new workspace is displayed If the contents shown in this dialog box are correct click the Finish button to terminate this wizard Then PM generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the information dis played Also generates a make file project file name mak automatically 2 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position
37. Clicking the right mouse button on the include file folder the file name or displays the following menus When a Include Files folder is selected Update Dependencies Updates a dependency relationship between source files and include files and reflects the updated contents in the Project window Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box When a include file name is selected reflects the updated contents in the Project window When a dependency relationship file name is selected reflects the updated contents in the Project window f Project Related Files folder The related files link directive files and library files to build the project are grouped here Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor refer to PM Set tings dialog box When the mouse cursor is placed on the project related file folder Project Related Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the project related file name the project related file name indi cated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up In a project that uses a real time OS the name of the configuration file used is automatically registered Meaning of icons File format in other than binary Binary file such as an object file or library file cannot be edited
38. Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed Clicking the Finish button in the dialog box at the last step Add New Project Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box causes a make file to be created automatically Refer to 5 6 10 Exporting a make file for details of make file creation 5 6 4 Inserting a project into a workspace Selecting the Project menu gt Insert Project opens Insert Project dialog box to insert an existing project into the project group 5 6 5 CVS update Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Update allows the CVS update command to be executed for the selected file and a file registered in the repository to be acquired The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of Windows Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 6 CVS commit Selecting the Project menu gt CVS commit executes the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflects the file in the repository The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of Windows Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 7 CVS log Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Log executes the CVS log command for th
39. Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Select Tools with a project group name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Tool Set The combination of tools to be used and their versions is regarded as a tool set and the tool set name can be selected from the drop down list The existing tool set and recommended tool set 78Kx Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the 78K Microcontrollers and V850 Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the V850 Microcontrollers are listed on the drop down list If the tool set has been changed in the Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box opened by clicking the Detail Set ting button Changed is appended at the top of the tool set name If the tool set name already exists the indi cation appended varies from Changed01 to Changed99 After Changed99 the tool set name is displayed as UserSet 258 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Save Saves the tool set currently selected in Tool Set This button is not available appears dimmed if the tool set file is read only Delete Deletes the tool set name selected in Tool Set from the list also deletes the corresponding tool set file This button is not available appears dimmed if there are no tool set fil
40. Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box Mark Jump dialog box 211 Find in Files dialog box 213 Replace in Files dialog box 217 Expand to Specified Layer dialog box 223 Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box 225 Set Layer Rule dialog box 226 Function List dialog box 229 Save the Function List dialog box 232 Layer List dialog box 234 Select Active Project dialog box 235 Insert Project dialog box 236 CVS Update dialog box 238 CVS Commit dialog box 240 CVS Log dialog box 242 CVS Status dialog box 244 Project Settings dialog box 246 Add Source Files dialog box 251 Add Project Related Files dialog box 253 Add Other Files dialog box 255 Project Group Name dialog box 256 Project Title dialog box 257 Tool Version Settings dialog box 258 Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box 261 Properties dialog box 263 Add New Memo dialog box 264 Startup File dialog box 265 Copy Startup File from dialog box 267 Startup File to register dialog box 269 Link Directive File dialog box 271 Copy Link Directive File from dialog box 273 Link Directive File to register dialog box 275 Select Project dialog box 277 Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box 278 Build Mode dialog box 280 Add Build Mode dialog box 281 Build Settings d
41. PM Settings dialog box Up to 2048 source files can be registered per project When the mouse cursor is placed on the source file folder Source Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the source file name the source file name indicated by the mouse cursor is dis played as a full path in a pop up Meaning of icons mouse button gt Special Compiler Options or Special Assembler Options Source file to which compiler or assembler options have been set individually Note Only for projects using a real time OS Source file created by the configurator and to which no compiler or assembler options have been set individually The name given by the tool DLL of the real time OS is used as the file name Source file to which no compiler or assembler options have been set individually by clicking the right vidually The name given by the tool DLL of the real time OS is used as the file name Note Only for projects using Applilet2 Source file created by Applilet2 and to which no compiler or assembler options have been set individually Note Only for projects using Applilet2 Source file created by Applilet2 and to which compiler or assembler options have been set individually Note Only for projects using a real time OS Source file created by the configurator and to which compiler or assembler options have been set indi User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 103 104 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFEREN
42. Project Related Files C Other Files registered CJ Other Files Libr ag 3 Library FLibrary HEJ Source Files EJ Include Files EJ Project Related Files J Other Files Servosys 2 Projects Set as Actre Project ervey Pas Active Project Edit Project Title Delete Project e Reeister order Ascending order The project Library is set Fix Window as the active project Click the right mouse button after selecting the project Library In PM multiple projects can be registered or managed together with related projects in a project group User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 33 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 5 Selecting Debugger Selecting the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings displays the Debugger Settings dialog box in which the debugger to be used can be set In this dialog box all the NEC Electronics debuggers and simulators that are specified as the tools to be used and their versions can be displayed and selected After executing build by selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug the debugger that is set here starts up automat ically and downloads a load module file at the same time to facilitate the debug operation Refer to Debugger Settings dialog box 5 6 18 Changing the tools used Figure 4 4 Selecting Debugger Debugger Settings select Debugger Debuecer AR aE SETS et elena File Name C Program Files NEC Electronics ToolesSM for w
43. and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 315 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE User Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to set arbitrary keywords for the smart lookup function The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set The keywords set in this dialog box can be saved as a keyword file A keyword file is a text file and can be edited easily with an arbitrary editor Figure 6 124 User Setting Dialog Box User Setting Keywords setup File Tnitialize Open lt etPo Page 1 2 gt Pty Sie Persema easm fendasm a as as N aA SS aaa SS OK Cancel hm En Eee eee Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the User Setting button on the Edit tab in the PM Settings dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Keywords Specify keywords directly Up to 64 keywords can be set If the keyword file kwd is read by clicking the Open button the name of the file read is displayed following after Setup File Displays the previous page Displays the next page 316 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize Deletes all the set keywords If there were any setting files being read that file name is cleared Open Opens the Open Keyword
44. dialog box The sample link directive file that is created in this process depends on the items specified on each of the wizards The combinations are shown below When Not use RTOS and Use Internal memory only are selected When Not use RTOS and Use External memory are selected The sample link directive file that was created in this process is saved in the project folder and registered in a project related file The name of the sample link directive file is project file name dir Caution The following sample files are all for cases when the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 In actual fact a sample link directive file corresponding to the start address of the internal memory of the specified device is created In the space for copyright and other notices the version information of PM device name device file name and start and end addresses of the internal RAM area are described as well as the copyright notice The link directive file that was created has to be customized by the user according to the specifications of the target or the user defined sections User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 373 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Not use RTOS and Use Internal memory only are selected Sample link directive file not use RTOS use internal memory only copyright and other notices SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBI TS A sconst I LOAD R const PROGBI TS A CONST I LOAD R
45. is selected in After Grouping Figure 6 49 Grouping by Keyword Dialog Box Find What 2 Conditions Faragraph After Grouping Grouping to Other C AND Search C Yes f Change Color Cancel fe OR Search i Mo 0 Delete C Do Nothing o Bb 5 W Match Gase i Restore Color of Grouping Lines Already 6 Ghanee Color of Grouped Lines Only 7 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Edit menu gt Grouping by Keyword Explanation of each area 1 Find What Specify a character string to be used as a keyword of grouping Multiple character strings can be specified by plac ing a semicolon between the character strings The word at the caret position is displayed by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for grouping is displayed If grouping is being performed for the first time this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored 2 Conditions a AND Search Collects lines having all the character strings specified in Find What b OR Search Collects lines having any of the character strings default 194 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Paragraph a Yes Collects lines in units of paragraph If a collected line has a lower layer the line is collected with the lower layer included as is b No Colle
46. main function In case of using the sample file please customize tt according as your target The specified Startup File is registered to the Project Related Files lt Back Cancel Help 1 Startup file specification area a Copy and Use the Sample file If this option button is selected the startup file of the sample that corresponds to the register mode set in the next wizard step is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files The name of the startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The startup file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in the The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If real time OS is selected for use in the previous wizard step Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box this option button cannot be selected b Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is used select this option button If Browse button is clicked the Startup File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The startup file name to be registered can be changed by directly inputting the name in the The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If this
47. menu gt Download Some Load Module Files enables the multiple load module files to be loaded onto the debugger This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Microcontrollers device is active The load module files to be loaded are those specified as the debug target files of an active project or the files in the Debug Target File List on the Debugger Settings dialog box the Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group check box must be selected When downloading files to the debugger the names of the downloaded files are displayed on the OutPut window Caution This menu item is available only when a project that uses a V850 microcontroller is active 5 7 14 Selecting build mode Selecting the Build menu gt Select Build Mode opens Build Mode dialog box in which the build mode can be selected added and deleted 70 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 15 Setting build options Selecting the Build menu gt Build Settings opens Build Settings dialog box in which the build options can be set The settable items are follows Options during build Processing to be executed before build Processing to be executed after build 5 7 16 Setting batch build Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Build Settings opens Build Settings dialog box in which the project for batch build or rebuild can be selected and the build sequence can be
48. this processing is set here The set items are always executed after build The order of execution is from the top of the list Commands can be specified in the Add Command dialog box by clicking the Add button Figure 6 101 Build Settings Dialog Box After Build Process Tab After Build Process Command copy C aout dd dbg Edit Remove ib BIE Add Opens the Add Command dialog box The specified command is inserted to the currently selected position in the com mand list box Opens the Add Command dialog box Changes the command contents selected in the Command list box to the edited contents Remove Deletes the command selected in the command list box Moves the selected command up within the command list Moves the selected command down within the command list Function buttons Button Function Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 285 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Command dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the commands used to execute any processing required before or after build copying of output files to another folder etc Figure 6 102 Add Command Dialog Box Add Command Command 1 jcopy ctest libtest lib c test Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area
49. will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt alb c This means that one of a b or c will appear Search replacement result When searching or replacing in a file ends the following History of Replace in files window will be opened to show the file history message of the replacement in files The message begins with the search key replacement character string file type and searched folder The body of the history contains the name of the searched files number of the lines for which the replacement was performed source file names where applicable and the contents of the lines before the replacement Figure 6 62 History of Replace in files Window a History of Replace m files Untitled X EBR Find string Task Replace string Tsk Displays the search conditions File type Hock Folder gt CONPH test other products samplet COMP test other_products sample task c was finished to search C yPM_test other_products sample task cll d TASK Taskl t C PH_test other_products sample task cll9 DeclareTask Taski1js CIyPM test other products sample task cl19 DeclareTsk Taski1j File Ci PH test other products sample task c Was replaced Replaced 6 Found 3 files were searched EOF Displays the number of search files Displays the names of search files numbers of the lines for which the replacement was performed source fil
50. 171 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening a file with checking the check box BF CAPM _test test _c Changed m ptNo Funchtm lptop nNo bTemp Funcetyi iff 0 bTemp m Char Funecbe ds lelsett m Char Zi tt oe A mst t Function buttons Open Inserts the contents of the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Layer Rule Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box to set the layer rule to be applied when reading a file This button is available only when the Apply Layer Rule check box is selected This button is unavailable when the Enable All Layer Rule s Options check box is selected on the File tab in the PM Settings dialog box 172 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open Workspace dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified workspace file lf a workspace file or a project file is already opened a workspace to be opened is displayed after the workspace file or the project file is closed If a project file created with PM Ver 3 xx or PM plus Ver 5 xx is specified a message will be displayed and the file is converted into a workspace file then opened refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version If an attempt is made to open a project file created with another NEC Electronics tool such as a debugger or simulator
51. 240 CVS Log Dialog Box 242 CVS Status Dialog Box 244 Project Settings Dialog Box 246 Project Settings Dialog Box Project Information Tab 247 Project Settings Dialog Box Source File Tab 248 Project Settings Dialog Box Tool Version Settings Tab 249 Add Source Files Dialog Box 251 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 6 80 6 81 6 82 6 83 6 84 6 85 6 86 6 87 6 88 6 89 6 90 6 91 6 92 6 93 6 94 6 95 6 96 6 97 6 98 6 99 6 100 6 101 6 102 6 103 6 104 6 105 6 106 6 107 6 108 6 109 6 110 6 111 6 112 6 113 6 114 6 115 6 116 6 117 6 118 6 119 6 120 6 121 6 122 6 123 6 124 6 125 6 126 6 127 Add Project Related Files Dialog Box 253 Add Other Files Dialog Box 255 Project Group Name Dialog Box 256 Project Title Dialog Box 257 Tool Version Settings Dialog Box 258 Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box 261 Properties Dialog Box 263 Add New Memo Dialog Box 264 Startup File Dialog Box 265 Copy Startup File from Dialog Box 267 Startup File to register Dialog Box 269 Link Directive File Dialog Box 271 Copy Link Directive File from Dialog Box 273 Link Directive File to register Dialog Box 275 Select Project Dialog Box 277 Edit Batch Build Settings Dialog Box 278 Build Mode Dialog Box 280 Add Build Mode Dialog Box 281 Build Settings Dialog Box
52. 48 Searching for a word upward 48 Searching for a word downward 48 Replacing a character string 48 Jumping to a specified line 49 Jumping to a specified line in a specified source file 49 Jumping to a marked line 49 Moving the caret to the top of line 49 Moving the caret to the end of line 49 Moving the caret to the top of file 49 Moving the caret to the end of file 49 Moving the caret to the index line 50 Moving the caret to the top layer 50 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth upward 50 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth downward 50 Moving the caret to the position before a jump 50 Moving the caret to the function definition line 51 Searching for matching braces 51 searching for a character string within multiple files 52 Replacing a character string within multiple files 52 Searching for a character string within a project 53 Jumping to a desired line tag jump 53 Returning from a tag jump 54 Continuing a tag jump downward 54 Continuing a tag jump upward 54 Moving the caret one word to the right 55 Moving the caret one word to the left 55 Moving the caret up by one line 55 Moving the caret down by one line 55 Moving the caret one character to the right 56 Moving the caret one character to the left 56 Making the search character string specification combo box active
53. 5 3 3 Searching for a character string downward Selecting the Find menu gt Find Downward searches for a specified character string in the downward direction toward the end of the text If you have not specified a character string to search for the Find String dialog box will be opened If Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab a message confirming whether to continue the search is output once the search to the end line is completed If this check box is not selected it terminates after searching to the end line Note that Find Downward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 4 Searching for a word upward Selecting the Find menu gt Find the Word Upward searches for the word at the caret position in the upward direction If Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab the word at the caret position will be stored as a search string and included in the search string his tory in the Find String dialog box If this check box is not selected the word will not be stored as a search string Note that Find the Word Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display spec
54. Definition 51 90 To the Index Line 50 90 To the Matching Brace 51 90 To the Specific Line 89 To the Specific Line in the Source file 49 90 To the Tag File 54 90 To the Top Layer at caret 50 90 To the Top of File 49 90 To the Top of Line 49 90 Find Downward 48 89 Find in Files 52 90 Find in Files dialog box 213 Find in Project 53 90 Find menu 89 Find String dialog box 200 Find the Word Downward 48 89 Find the Word Upward 48 89 Find Upward 48 89 Font 74 94 Font dialog box 318 Font dialog box Print 189 Function List 62 92 Function List dialog box 229 Functions 23 G GENERAL 22 Grouping by Keyword 46 89 Grouping by Keyword dialog box 194 H Help 95 About PM User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 79 95 NEC Electronics Microcontrollers Web 78 95 PM Help 78 95 Shortcut List 78 95 Help Functions 78 Help menu 95 History of files 40 History of Replace in files window 52 220 History of the workspaces 40 Host machine 25 I IDL File 23 Image Copy 43 88 Insert file 36 87 Insert File dialog box 170 Insert New Object 46 89 Insert Project 65 92 Insert Project dialog box 236 Installing 27 J Jump 208 210 234 Jump to Specified Line dialog box 208 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box 210 L Layer 91 Apply Layer Rule 61 91 Collapse
55. E O OE or A Oy GE OW O Oa eh O 2 Vo DV O OP NON N O P Po P P wD Po oN Po B P O P N OD N N P PV wY Canceling an edit operation 42 Canceling an Undo operation 42 Cutting off character strings 43 Copying character strings 43 Cutting off character strings Cut for Append 43 Copying character strings Copy for Append 43 Copying character strings as a screen image 43 Inserting the contents of clipboard 44 Inserting the contents of clipboard with specified format 44 Deleting character strings 44 Deleting a word 44 Deleting characters to the end of a word 44 Deleting aline 45 Deleting character strings to the top of line 45 Deleting character strings to the end of line 45 Selecting a word at the caret 45 Selecting a word to the left of the caret 45 Selecting a word to the right of the caret 45 Selecting a range to the top of line 45 Selecting a range to the end of line 46 Selecting entire contents 46 Grouping by keyword 46 Restoring color of grouping line 46 Creating function prototypes 46 Inserting a new object 46 Setting links for objects 46 Object 46 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 5 3 Search Functions 47 5 4 oi 9 Aanaaanaananaannananaanannaaaaanaaaaanaaaaa a ba Searching for a character string 47 Searching for a character string upward 48 Searching for a character string downward
56. Existing file gt 56 Link Directive File T Setup Source Files 6 Select Debugger C Do Not specify now 9 Confirmation E GH V850 Microcontrollers The Link Directive File Name to register Only 4 63 GAP M_test ButtonSys dir File Name The link directive tile describes information about the allocation of program code and data Ih case of using the sample file Please customize it according as your target Tf you map the external ROM to the internal ROM area in ROM less mode please select use internal memory only The specified link directive file i amp registered to the Project Related Files Back Cancel Help 1 Link directive file specification area a Create and Use the Sample file If this option button is selected a sample link directive file is created in the project folder in accordance with the selection in Memory Usage area and the selection of the OS in the Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box The link directive file is created under the name project file name dir and registered to the project related files automatically Memory Usage Use Internal memory only The external ROM is mapped to the internal ROM area when the compiler is used in ROMless mode Use External memory The TEXT sections are mapped to the internal memory and the DATA sections to the external memory The link directive file that is created is registered to the project related files
57. GH Link Directive File setup source Files Folder CAP hl test Browse Project Group Name ServoSve Microcontrollers Name Device Name VB50 Microcontrollers uPD703003 Conti mation Device Install l GH W850 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 Select Debugger 2 3 4 5 6 T a g This will set up the basic information about the workspace and the project Cancel H elp Workspace File Name Specify the name of the file to save the workspace information Up to 255 characters can be specified The file extension is prw If the extension is omitted it is automatically set to prw The file name which changed the workspace file extension prw to prj is assigned as the project file name In addition if a existing workspace file name is specified the message dialog box is displayed after the Next gt but ton is clicked and then the existing workspace file will be renamed as backup file e g test prw gt test prw bak If Create Blank Workspace is selected only a workspace is created In this case Project Group Name Micro controllers Name and Device Name become invalid Folder Specify the folder in which the workspace file and project file are stored Selecting the Browse button opens the Browse for Folder dialog box in which to specify the project folder posi tion The folder in which PM exe exists is default folder Project Group Name Specify t
58. LDG and try the com mand again Message Failed to start up the RTOS settings Make sure that the NEC Electronics RTOS was installed correctly Cause When creating a new workspace or adding a new project the RTOS settings button was E1715 E1716 selected but the OS setting dialog box could not be displayed Action by User Check whether the OS product is installed correctly If not install it Message The version information not found in the registry Make sure that the NEC Electronics tools with this function installed correctly Cause On displaying version information registry information could not acquired Check if the NEC Electronics tool product that is adapted to the function to display version is E1717 Action by User installed correctly If not install it Message s The file was not the latest load module file Please execute build command and update the load module file Cause When executing dump850 the out file which is a target analysis file is older than the source E1718 file s indicates the out file name which is a target analysis file Action by User Execute build update the load module file and try the command again E1719 Message s The folder name is illegal Enter the correct folder name Cause An incorrect folder name was specified s indicates the specified folder name Action by User Specify a correct folder name Message The Debugger not selected to execute T
59. Main Window at Starting When Starting PM from Windows Start Menu 29 4 1 Operation Flow until Debugging 30 4 2 Setting Options Related to Compilation 32 4 3 Selecting Active Project 33 4 4 Selecting Debugger 34 5 1 History of Replace in files Window 52 5 2 Promoting Layers 57 5 3 Demoting Layers 58 5 4 Expanding One of the Lower Layers 58 5 5 Collapsing One of the Lower Layers 59 5 6 Expanding All of the Lower Layers 59 6 1 Window Composition of PM 84 6 2 Main Window 86 6 3 Status Bar 99 6 4 Project Window 101 6 5 Project Window File Tab 102 6 6 Project Window Memo Tab 108 6 7 Position where a File is Dropped in a Workspace for which Project is Registered 6 8 Edit Window 112 6 9 Search Result Display Window 118 6 10 OutPut Window 120 6 11 New WorkSpace Wizard at Starting 122 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace 123 6 13 New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information Dialog Box 124 6 14 New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools Dialog Box 126 6 15 New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box 128 6 16 New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File Dialog Box 130 6 17 New WorkSpace Step 5 9 Register Mode Dialog Box 132 6 18 New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File Dialog Box 134 6 19 New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Dialog Box 136 6 20
60. Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 217 b CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace With This area specifies a replacement character string The last specified replacement character string is displayed by default If no replacement has been made this area is left blank The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab 2 Files specification area a Of Type This area specifies the name of the file to be searched The wild card can also be used for file names but not for the extensions Note that files with the following exten sions cannot be specified exe com dll ocx hlp fnc lib ilb bkl okm idm bak dat cab sys ini vxd inf Izh zip sdb plg xrf orn Multiple file names can be specified by separating them with a semicolon However a file with idl extension cannot be specified in multiple Folder This area specifies the folder to be searched A desired folder can be directly input or can be changed by clicking the button to open the Select Folder dia log box After selecting a folder in this dialog box clicking the OK button can be specify the folder If the Cancel button is clicked a folder cannot be selected 3 Replacement options area 218 a Look in Subfolders If this button is selected the subfolders of the specified fol
61. New WorkSpace Step 8 9 Select Debugger Dialog Box 138 6 21 New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation Dialog Box 140 6 22 Add New Project Wizard at Starting 141 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project 142 6 24 Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information Dialog Box 143 6 25 Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools Dialog Box 145 6 26 Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box 147 6 27 Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File Dialog Box 149 6 28 Add New Project Step 5 9 Register Mode Dialog Box 151 6 29 Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File Dialog Box 153 6 30 Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Dialog Box 155 6 31 Add New Project Step 8 9 Select Debugger Dialog Box 157 LIST OF FIGURES User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 110 17 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 60 6 61 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 6 71 6 72 6 73 6 74 6 75 6 76 6 77 6 78 6 79 18 Add New Project Step 9 9 Confirmation Dialog Box 159 Project Settings Wizard at Starting 160 Project Settings Step 1 3 Project Information Dialog Box 161 Project Settings Step 2 3 Select Tools Dialog Box 163 Project Settings Step 3 3 Setup Source Files Dialog Box 165
62. Object the end of the menu list starts an application and converts a file type for a selected object The character strings and functions displayed on this menu item differ depending on the type of the selected object 46 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 Search Functions Operations related to searching in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Search menu in the Main window Searching for a character string Searching for a character string upward Searching for a character string downward Searching for a word upward Searching for a word downward Replacing a character string Jumping to a specified line Jumping to a specified line in a specified source file Jumping to a marked line Moving the caret to the top of line Moving the caret to the end of line Moving the caret to the top of file Moving the caret to the end of file Moving the caret to the index line Moving the caret to the top layer Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth upward Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth downward Moving the caret to the position before a jump Moving the caret to the function definition line Searching for matching braces Searching for a character string within multiple files Replacing a character string within multiple files Searching for a character string within a project J
63. Open Dialog Box 167 Insert File Dialog Box 170 Open Workspace Dialog Box 173 Save As Dialog Box 175 Save Source Files Options Dialog Box 177 Change Source File Names Dialog Box 179 Change Selected Source File Name Dialog Box 181 Change Selected Source File Names Dialog Box 183 Set Comment Mark Dialog Box 185 Print Dialog Box 186 Font Dialog Box Print 189 Set Header Footer Dialog Box 191 Grouping by Keyword Dialog Box 194 Select the way of Function Prototypes Dialog Box 197 Find String Dialog Box 200 Find String Dialog Box Mini 201 Replace String Dialog Box 204 Replace String Dialog Box Mini 206 Jump to Specified Line Dialog Box 208 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file Dialog Box 210 Mark Jump Dialog Box 211 Find in Files Dialog Box 213 Find in Files Dialog Box Details 213 Select Folder Dialog Box 214 Replace in Files Dialog Box 217 History of Replace in files Window 220 Expand to Specified Layer Dialog Box 223 Collapse to Specified Layer Dialog Box 225 Set Layer Rule Dialog Box 226 Function List Dialog Box 229 Save the Function List Dialog Box 232 Layer List Dialog Box 234 Select Active Project Dialog Box 235 Insert Project Dialog Box 236 CVS Update Dialog Box 238 CVS Commit Dialog Box
64. Options When options are set to a file the icon of the file displays in green Reset Special Structured Cancels structured assembler options set to a file Assembler Options Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file Caution The source file added using the Add Source Files menu is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed on the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Source files can also be added by directly dragging the source file into the Project window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d Function name e The names of the functions in C language existing in the source files are displayed Double clicking a function name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a function name displays the function definition line under the set editor refer to PM Settings dialog box When the mouse cursor is placed on the function file name the function name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed in a pop up Clicking the right mouse button on the function file name displays the following menus Add Source Files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box Delete Source File Deletes a selected source file from the project Compile Compiles a selected file Caution The source file added using the Add Source Files menu is added at the end of the source file list The source file
65. PM Table D 10 Quantitative Limit List Number of projects that can be registered per project group p20 Length of source file name 259 characters Length of project related file name 259 characters Length of other file names 259 characters Number of source files that can be registered per project 2 048 Number of other files that can be registered per project Build related Lengths of command character strings that can be set in pre SESS foie snp Taos Numberofistayesteteanespit B Nerkiumpresies Nunberofmaristtatcanberegsived Maximum number of function candidates that user can register CO a a a Maximum number of C language keywords 388 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM INDEX A Compile 69 93 About PM 79 95 Debug 70 93 About PM dialog box 344 Direct Build Mode Selection 93 Active project 33 Download Some Load Module Files 70 93 Add Build Mode dialog box 281 Edit 70 93 Add Command dialog box 286 Rebuild 69 93 Add New Memo dialog box 264 Rebuild and Debug 68 93 Add New Project wizard 141 Select Build Mode 70 93 Add New Project Step 1 9 dialog box 143 Stop Build 69 93 Add New Project Step 2 9 dialog box 145 Update dependencies 70 93 Add New Project Step 3 9 dialog box 147 Build and Debug 68 93 Add New Project Step 4 9 dialog box 149 Build bar 62 92 97 Add New Projec
66. Relationship between Software for Program Development and PM Product planning System design Hardware design Inspection System debugging System evaluation Commercialization Software design PM Real time OS Editor Device Driver Configurator Note3 Compiler Assembler Structured assembler Note4 Linker Link Directive Generator Note2 ROM ization processor Note 2 Hex converter Note 2 Object converter Note 1 Integrated debugger Performance analyzer Note 2 Performance Analysis Tuning Tool Note 2 Cc eXaminer for system Operation Note2 Note 1 78K Microcontrollers only Note 2 V850 Microcontrollers only Note 3 78KOR Microcontrollers only Note 4 78KO or 78KOS Microcontrollers only User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 1 5 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Operating Environments The following environments are required in order to use PM Caution The operation of PM is not guaranteed in a network environment Do not use PM in a network environment 1 Host machine 2 3 CPU Pentium II 400MHz or higher Memory 128 Mbytes or more OS Windows 2000 Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition Caution Regardless of which OS is used higher and the latest Service Pack must be installed DLL The following DLL files provided by Microsoft Corp are required mfc42 dll V6 0 8665 0 or more It is provided when PM is install
67. Select Real Time OS No reate a project for V850 Microcontrollers Step 4 9 Startup File Check to Use the Sample file option Step 5 9 Register Mode Step 6 9 Link Directive File Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Yes Create a library project ____ Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Gea tray poe No Step 8 9 Select Debugger Step 9 9 Confirmation Explanation of each dialog box The following explains each dialog box displayed in this wizard 142 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box Specify a project group name a project file name a project folder position a project title and the device microcontrollers name of the target device to be used The specification of the item marked with in this dialog box can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected Figure 6 24 Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information Dialog Box Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information Workspace File Name eh C PM test sample ald ver priy ae as o t Project Group Name Eo IET 2 Buttons 3 Select Real Time O s 4 Startup File Gt 7 oe ee 5 Register Mode tH Uttornsys 3 D a 6 Link Directive File Project Folder ti iat T setup Source Files B z 4 SHEE se o Select Debugger 5 Aeree 9 Conti mation a0 VE50 Microcontrollers Microcontrollers Name Device Name On
68. When handling a word in the Edit window the definitions of words are as follows Consecutive single byte alphanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding tabs and spaces Range selection When handling a range selection in the Edit window you must observe the following range selection rules Arange can be selected by dragging using the Shift arrow key or by using Shift click With a single line a range can be selected in units of characters character strings range selection With multiple lines a range can be selected between the beginning and end of each line lines range selection If multiple lines with a layer are selected as a range any lower layers are automatically included in the range When you select multiple lines toward the beginning of file if a layer higher than that of the range selection start line appears the range selection cannot be performed any further When you select multiple lines toward the end of file if a layer higher than that of the range selection start line appears the range selection cannot be performed any further When you select multiple lines toward the beginning of file if you select a line with a expanded lower layer the lower layer is included in the range When you select multiple lines toward the end of file if you select a line with a expanded lower layer the lower layer is included in the range When
69. a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut win dow is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped Restrictions on the Edit window The following restrictions apply in the Edit window Amaximum of 5 119 characters can be entered per line The maximum allowable number of layers is 127 A line for which 128 or more layers is specified is corrected to a line with 127 layers No message is displayed The maximum allowable number of lines is 2 097 152 If an attempt is made to enter more lines a message is dis played When a file being edited is deleted a message is displayed User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 117 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Search result display window The Search result display window displays the result of the search performed by selecting Find in Files or Find in Project menu item Figure 6 9 Search Result Display Window 1 Ee SPH test testl c CrXPM_test testl cOlei fR7 ON ON WABO test Test idl F CAPM test ytest cOS fs Testl c at SSPH testytestl cl i include Test2 h 2 S PH_test testi cl9 finclude Testl h SPH test testil cll i static unsigned char TestDatal TestData2 MPM testtesti cld2 4 TestDataz Brest MPM testtesti cl a TestDatal 7A
70. a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters will appear E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 205 206 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly O times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null chara
71. a specified folder When Replace in Files is executed the History of Replace in files window is opened to show the file history message of the replacement in files The message begins with the search key replacement character string file type and searched folder The body of the history contains the name of the searched files number of the lines for which the replacement was performed source file names where applicable and the contents of the lines before the replacement Figure 5 1 History of Replace in files Window ea History of Replace in files Untitled EBR Find string Task Replace string Tsk Displays the search conditions sid File type gt ct Folder CONPH test other products samplet COMP test other_products sample task c was finished to search in C yPM_test other_products samples task cll 7d TASK Taskl t Cr PH_test other_products sample task cl1d DeclareTask Taski1js CI PM test other products sample task cl19 DeclareTsk Taski1j File Ci PH test other_products sample task c Was replaced Replaced 6 Found 3 files were searched EOF Displays the number of search files Displays the names of search files numbers of the lines for which the replacement was performed source file names where applica ble and the contents of the lines before the replacement Table 5 1 shows the messages on the History of Replace in files window T
72. a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression source Displays the source file name as well findalllayer Displays all searched files with layers foundlayer Displays the files in which character strings are found with layers foundnotlayer Displays the files in which character strings are found without layers autoselect Detects automatically Sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Copy for Append copyforappend Cut for Append cutforappend Find in Project findinproject User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 379 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Layer Menu Table B 4 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Layer menu Promote onelevelup Demote oneleveldown Expand expand Collapse collapse Expand All Lower Layers Expand All expandalllower expandall Collapse All collapseall Expand the Specific Layer expandspecified caret caret Limits the action to those layers below the caret position Collapse the Specific Layer collapsespecified caret caret Limits the action to those layers below the caret position Show Index 1 Show Index 2 Show Index 3 Show Index 4 Show Index 5 displaylayer1 displaylayer2 displaylayer3 displaylayer4 displaylayer5 Collapse This Layer collapsethislayer Jump related Table B 5 Co
73. added to a Cause project Action by User Rename the file using a file name without one byte spaces and register it again 356 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Number E1031 E1032 E1033 E1035 E1036 E1037 E1100 E1200 E1201 E1202 E1400 E1401 Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description A file name cannot contain any of the characters lt gt Do you wish to continue to add source files An attempt was made to create a file with a file name that includes prohibited characters This message is displayed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project Set the file name using characters other than the displayed prohibited ones s Cannot use the network path The specified folder was a network path s indicates the specified folder name Specified the folder other than the network path s Cannot use the network path Do you wish to continue to add source files The specified folder was a network path s indicates the specified folder name This mes sage is displa
74. all modified files that are currently open in the Edit windows Note Save and Close All Saves all the files that are currently open in the Edit windows and then closes the windows Note Close All Closes all the Edit windows currently open Note Destroy All Closes all the Edit windows currently open Any changes made to the files will not be saved The Project window and the OutPut windows cannot be closed Note Change Source File Name Changes the names of the source files that are currently being edited Opens the Change Source File Names dialog box Save All Source Files Updates all of the source files that are currently being edited Displays the printing status of the window currently being edited Print Prints the contents of the window currently being edited Opens the Print dialog box Print Direct Prints the contents of the window currently being edited The Print dialog box is not opened Note Recent File Displays the name of the ten most recently edited or saved files Recent Workspace Displays the name of the ten most recently opened workspaces Exit PM Exits from PM Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings for the File menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 2 Edit menu Undo Cancels the effect of an edit operation to restore the previous state Refer to 5 2 1 Canceling an edi
75. and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Setting Opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which the comment mark for the specified file can be changed 184 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Comment Mark dialog box This dialog box is used to change a comment mark for a specified file Figure 6 45 Set Comment Mark Dialog Box set Comment Mark Comment OK 1 TER lt l s gt Cancel Only Use less than 16 Characters Help h The Gaze of String Between Comment start Mark and Comment End Mark PM Inserts String into Me This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Original Mark or Setting button in the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box Select the Original Mark or Setting button in the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Comment Specify the symbol to be used as a comment mark as well as s Function buttons Button Function OK Enables the specified comment mark This button is invalid until a character is entered in Comment Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 185 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Print dialog box This dialog box is used to print the contents of the window being edite
76. any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document e NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products No license express implied or otherwise is granted under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others e Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples The incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of a customer s equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software and information e While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely To minimize risks of damage to property or injury including death to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products customers must incorporate sufficient s
77. area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 135 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box Specify the name of the source file to be registered into the project Figure 6 19 New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Please setup Source Files Source File Name 1 Workspace Information zaa 2 Select Tools test2 c 3 Select Real Time 05 Remove 4 Startup File Remove All 5 Register Mode tH 6 Link Directive File red Setup Source Files Up o Select Debugger g Confirmation B o Dom GH W850 seen Only 4 6 You can also add source files by specifying the list file or the folder You don t need ta specify all the files here and vou can setup sourc
78. as required Up to 260 characters can be entered 3 Tool Folder Specify the current folder for starting up the external tool Up to 260 characters can be entered User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 295 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Menu String Specify the menu name to be displayed when the Start up Ex tool menu item is selected Up to 32 characters can be entered If no character string is specified the name will be the tool execution file name without the path and extension Note that the same name cannot be set more than once 5 Tool tip String Specify the character string to be displayed as the tool tip on the toolbar Up to 32 characters can be entered 6 Status bar String Specify the character string to be displayed on the status bar when a menu item is selected Up to 32 characters can be entered Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the external tool and closes this dialog box The set tool is displayed on Menu List in the Register External Tool dialog box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 296 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Compare dialog box This dialog box is used to compare the contents of two Edit windows Figure 6 109 File Compare Dialog Box File Compare Orieinal file PET Gnother tile OutFut wi W Compare collapse layer Ww Compare layer number Oss D d Iw Display tiles side
79. automatically The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in the The Link Directive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard Refer to APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE for the detail of the link directive file to be created Caution The link directive file that is created must be customized in accordance with the target specification or user defined sections User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 153 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is used select this option button lf Browse button is clicked the Link Directive File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by directly inputting the name in the The Link Direc tive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If this option button is selected the File Name button cannot be selected c Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is copied and used select this option button Specify the link directive file name to be the copy sourc
80. b Show File Name was found string with Layer Displays only the names of files in which a match for the search key was found in the Search result display win dow with layer default c Show File Name was found string without Layer Displays only the names of files in which a match for the search key was found in the Search result display win dow without layer Function buttons Find Searches for a character string that matches the search key Opens the Search result display window to display the search results Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Details gt gt Updates the Find in Files dialog box and displays the detailed version If this button is Details lt lt clicked while this dialog box is the detailed version the dialog box changes back to the origi nal Find in Files dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The search results are displayed under File name searched line number contents of searched line up to 5 119 characters the lines after the 5120th character are not displayed 216 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string in multiple files in a specified folder When the replacement in files is performed the History of Replace in files window is opened to display the search key replacement character string file type and searched folder The contents of t
81. be added 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the any files to be added Up to 259 characters can be specified Wo Wk The extension of the file is doc xls or Function buttons Adds the specified files to the Other Files folder Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 255 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Group Name dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project group name Figure 6 82 Project Group Name Dialog Box Project Group Name Old Project Group 1 Buttorisy s Cancel 2 ButtonSys Help Hew Project Group This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Edit Project Group Name with a project group name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Old Project Group The name of the project group currently selected in the Project window is displayed 2 New Project Group Specify the newly set project group name directly in this area Up to 127 characters can be entered Function buttons Changes to the specified project group name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 256 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Title dialog box This dialog box is used to chang
82. be the same as the folder when PM was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be executed Only a file name with extension imc can be specified 334 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Loads the specified file and executes the saved key operations Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 335 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Entry Macro Files dialog box This dialog box is used to register a macro file to a key Figure 6 137 Entry Macro Files Dialog Box lis Entry Macro Files CAPM test Macro Entry Macro List i ib Macro File Name shortcut GX PM test Macros None Down H This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files Explanation of each area 1 Entry Macro List This area displays a list of the macro files that are already registered Files are added to the Play Back the Regis ter Macro menu in order from the top A registered macro is selected by selecting the title a Title Displays the titles
83. be used Up to 10 tools can be registered Edit Command dialog box The currently set tools are displayed Select External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a external tool to be used 82 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Compare dialog box This dialog box is used to compare the contents of two Edit windows PM Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to make various environment settings User Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to set arbitrary keywords for the smart lookup function Font dialog box This dialog box is used to select the type and size of charac ters to be displayed in the Edit window Customize dialog box This dialog box is used to set the options of keyboard menu toolbar user menu keyword Edit User keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords defined by the user to highlight arbitrary character strings Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords for highlighting of reserved words in C language Save the Key Operation dialog box This dialog box is used to save the recorded key operation in a file Load the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read a saved macro file Play back the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read the key operation from a saved macro file and execute the macro Entry Macro Files dialog box This dialog bo
84. being edited was stopped canceled xxx the number of the detected search character strings Found xxx The using file xxx was replaced The replacement was performed in the specified file under editing Replaced xxx Found yyy Replaced the number of the replaced character strings xxx the number of the detected search character strings The using file xxx was searched The searching was performed in the specified file under editing When Found xxx the searching was performed to the end of the file under editing this mes sage is displayed after selecting the Find Next button xxx the number of the detected search character strings 5 3 23 Searching for a character string within a project Selecting the Find menu gt Find in Project searches for a character string to which the caret is positioned or selected with range selection within all of the source files registered to a project The search result are displayed in the Search result display window to be newly opened This menu item is effective when a project file is open In the case of a search for a character string at the caret position this menu item cannot be selected if the caret is positioned to a character other than an alphanumeric character or _ In the case of a search for a character string selected with range selection this menu item cannot be selected if lines are selected with range selection Up to 5 119 characters are displayed as the search resu
85. box clicking the OK button can be specify the folder If the Cancel button is clicked a folder cannot be selected 4 Search options area a Search Active Window Only If this button is selected only the file being edited is searched default Accordingly Of Type Folder and Look in Subfolders are disabled b Look in Subfolders If this button is selected the subfolders of the specified folder are also searched through 214 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Regular Expression only details If this box is selected regular expressions are supported in global searching Expression Description Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to
86. box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If after selecting Do Not specify now for the startup file and registering the source file in the Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box and then returning to this dialog box and specifying the source file registered in the Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box as the startup file and ending the wizard as is the following linker option setting message is displayed and the st
87. buffer is cleared when a file is stored If the Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The End of Line in Saving a File check box is selected this box is selected and dimmed invalid Extension User Specify The specified extension is displayed in the drop down list of the Files of type in the Open dialog box Save As dialog box and Insert File dialog box The order in the drop down list is as displayed in the list of user exten sions Up to four extensions can be added Extension Enters the extensions to be added If multiple file extensions are compiled into one they are delimited by Examples are shown below To display a CPP file cpp To display a CPP file and an H file cpp h User Extension List Displays the added extensions Adds the extensions to User Extension List Changes the extension selected in User Extension List Deletes the extension selected in User Extension List Moves the selected extension up within User Extension List Moves the selected extension down within User Extension List Extension of Backup File Specify the extensions for creating backup files IDL file and text file extensions can be specified Up to 3 char acters of extensions can be set IDL File Specify the extensions for creating backup IDL files The default is bkl TEXT File Specify the extensions for creating backup text files The default is bak e Automatic Backup This area selects whether a file is au
88. by User Check if the file exists and is damaged and execute again 348 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0117 s Failed to read the workspace file Make sure that this file has broken The workspace file could not be read s indicates the workspace file name Action by User Verify that the workspace file is not damaged F0118 Failed to read the project file Make sure that a this file has broken The project file could not be read Action by User Verify that the file is not damaged and execute again F0119 Same project files cannot be read Cause When reading the workspace some of the registered project files could not be read Message s Failed to save this workspace file Make sure that disk space or this file has broken or this file using with other application F0120 F0121 Cause The disk capacity is full or the file is damaged Or the specified file is being used by another application s indicates the file name Action by User Check the disk capacity verify that the file is not damaged and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again Message Failed to create the backup file Make sure that the backup file is used by the other process or the disk is full Cause The backup file being created is already being used by another process or the disk capacity is smaller than the volume of the file to be written Action by
89. by User Set a project group name in the Project Group Name dialog box E1410 Message This project group name is using Please enter other project group names Cause A name that had already been used in the workspace was set in the Project Group Name dialog box and the OK button was clicked Action by User Set a character string that is not currently being used as a project group name E1411 s This file cannot edit Message Cause The Open command was selected for a non editable project related file s indicates the file name Action by User Select an editable file with the Open command E1412 Message The device file information cannot be found in project file It does not show the device file version Cause Action by User The device file information could not be found in the project file Install a device file to be used 358 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Number E1413 E1414 E1415 E1416 E1417 E1418 E1419 E1420 E1421 E1422 E1423 Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description Cannot add t
90. by pressing Enter key Promotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Demotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Expands Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection 96 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE _ Opens the Project window Closes the Project window when the Project windowis_ the Project window Closes the Project window when the Project window is already opened E Opens the OutPut window Closes the OutPut window when the OutPut window is already opened Starts the PM help 2 Build bar The build bar consists of the buttons and combo boxes that are related to the build processing Table 6 3 shows the list of items on the build bar in the default condition Table 6 3 Build Bar This is the Active Project This is the Active Project Selection combo box Active projects can be switched by combo box Active projects can be switched by main main ButtonSys F selecting a project This is the Active Project Selection combo box The following build modes can be Debug Build Build specified in the defaul
91. by side STEER start position f Top line Cancel C Caret position Help Figure 6 110 File Compare Dialog Box Mini File compare Up Details Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt File Compare Explanation of each area 1 Original file Select the original file to be compared from the drop down list If there is an active Edit window the name of the file in that window is selected If there is no active Edit window this area is left blank A list of all the files currently being edited is displayed on the drop down list If the button is clicked the Open dialog box is opened to select the any file In the Open dialog box the Apply Layer Rule and Gather Files into an Edit Window check boxes and the Layer Rule button are invalid User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 297 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Another file Select the file to be compared from the drop down list If the Original file is opened first the name of the file opened second is displayed If the Another file is other than the file opened first the name of the file opened first is displayed A list of all the files currently being edited is displayed on the drop down list If the selected file is the same as the Original file the file name is not displayed If the button is clicked th
92. can be used for the application programin assembly language and the overhead required for saving and restoring registers can be reduced Thoueh the variables allocated to registers lt Back Cancel Help 1 Register mode specification area a 22 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 22 register mode b 26 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 26 register mode c 32 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 32 register mode 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 132 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If the register mode of the compiler option is changed after a new workspace is created the quasi directive indicat ing the register mode in the
93. caret is at the end of the line 0 The caret is not at the end of the line Checking the end of line x iseof x Integer type variable Return values 1 The caret is at the end of the file 0 The caret is not at the end of the file Caution Even if the caret line appears to be a bottom line lower layers collapsed 1 is returned Checking the end of file EOF Obtaining the column position of the caret tab character 1 char acter x getcol x Integer type variable Return values The column number of the caret is returned Leftmost column 1 Obtaining the column position of the caret tab character speci fied number of space characters x getdispcol x Integer type variable Return values The column number of the caret is returned Leftmost column 1 Obtaining the line position of the caret excluding collapsed layers x getdispline x Integer type variable Return values The line number of the caret is returned First line 1 Obtaining the line position of the caret including collapsed layers x getabsline x Integer type variable Return values The line number of the caret is returned First line 1 x isdbcs x Integer type variable Return values 1 Two byte character 0 one byte character Inserting the current time into the time caret position Inserting the current date into the date caret position Checking the em size character at the care
94. caret line is positioned to the top of the screen Figure 5 6 Expanding All of the Lower Layers include Test3 h int monIndex Tinclude Testa h BOOL m_bFle t int m_nIndex void Funcdivoid BOOL m_bF le boid Funedivoid it LPTEXT FunecStLPCHAIN peTemp int nIdx it LONG I Temp Temp 103 Select the Layer menu gt Expand All Lower Layers Func tm bF le monIndex Func3 Temps 5 4 7 Expanding all of the layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand All expands all of the layers in the active Edit window 5 4 8 Collapsing all of the layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse All collapses all of the layers in the active Edit window If the caret is posi tioned to a collapsed layer it will be moved to the top layer User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 59 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 9 Expanding a specified number of layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand the Specific Layer opens the Expand to Specified Layer dialog box to expand a specified number of layers A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified in this dialog box The last setting is displayed in the default con dition When this value is specified for the first time 127 is displayed 5 4 10 Collapsing a specified number of layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse the Specific Layer opens the Collapse to Specified Laye
95. comparison If a difference in file contents is found the caret moves to the line including the difference Details Opens the normal File Compare dialog box only mini version Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 298 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE PM Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to make various environment settings The environment settings are performed on the following tabs 1 2 3 Workspace tab External Editor tab File tab 4 Recent tab 5 Source File by idl File tab 6 Window tab 7 Path tab 8 Edit tab 9 View tab 0 Layer tab 1 Scroll tab 12 Find Replace tab oe A m mm mm AOM mm AOM M mm Figure 6 111 PM Settings Dialog Box 1 7 8 2 9 3 4 10 5 11 12 6 Recent Source File by idl File Window W Investigate the files exist at open workspace Restore window position at each workspace This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Function buttons User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 299 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Select the Tool menu gt PM Settings Select the PM Settings from the right mouse click menu on the toolbar in the Main window Explanation of each tab 1 Workspace tab This tab is used to make settings related to the workspace Fig
96. currently set tools are displayed Figure 6 107 Register External Tool Dialog Box Register External Tool Menu List Add Edit Cancel Remove Help Remove All j o Do Detail Tool file name C Program Files NEG Electronics Toole STKS50 Parameter Tool folder C Program Files NEG Electronics Toole STKS50 Meru stk850 Tool tip etkhe5t Status bar stk850 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 293 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Menu List The menu item names of the currently registered external tools The menu item names are the Menu String spec ified in the Select External Tool dialog box using the Add button The menu item names are displayed as a pop up menu of Start up EX tool The menu items are displayed in the order of Menu List The icons of the external tools set here are displayed as buttons on the external toolbar Add Opens the Select External Tool dialog box for registering external tools The added tool is displayed at the end of Menu List Up to 10 external tools can be registered Therefore if 10 p external tools are already set this button is dimmed 2 Detail The information on the external tool selected in Menu List is displayed This inform
97. ee ee eee mee or the other process using this KT deticaie habia mmadaticbiall Cause The file could not be deleted when the Tha CUP Mounds balelare heen command on the Build menu was executed The Tha CUP Mounds balelare heen window indicates the file name that could not be deleted a Action by User Check whether the file displayed in the OutPut window has the Read Only attribute or is used in another process and if required cancel the Read Only attribute or close the other applications that use this file FO200 Failed to make the edit window a ee RR OEE may be not enough Please terminate other applica Lancia aiamaiaeeieieidiaainaniaaiemin aia The Edit window could not be created because the De was insufficient or the OS was not De Action by User Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0201 Cannot open any more window Please close other window An attempt was made to open more than 64 Edit Output and Search result display windows in total Close the other windows and try again 350 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description F0202 This file is too large size Please divide this file Cause An attempt was made to edit more than the maximum number of lines 2 097 152 on the Edit window Action by User Divide the file being edited using the copy or paste function FO203 Cannot input more Cause More than 5 119 characters were entered in a line
98. folder gt subfolder word match When searching case zen special source findalllayer foundlayer foundnotlayer autoselect sjis through multiple files euc jis unicode lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with lt file type gt Specify the file type character string with lt folder gt Specify the folder character string with subfolder Also search sub folders word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression source Also displays source file name findalllayer Displays all searched files with layers foundlayer Displays files in which character strings are found with layers foundnotlayer Displays files in which character strings are found without layers autoselect Detects automatically Sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Find in Files grepedit lt Character string to be searched gt word matchcase zen special source fin When searching dalllayer foundlayer foundnotlayer autoselect sjis euc jis unicode through the current edit lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with window word Searches for word matchcase Distinguishes
99. is b Indent Characters Specify the number of layer indent characters used when a layer is displayed 0 2 4 or 8 characters can be set c Image This area displays an image with the set layer mark d Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command If this check box is selected all the layers higher than the one specified are collapsed when Expand the Specific Layer is selected from the Layer menu If it is not selected the already expanded layers higher than one specified are left as is e Set Indent Character each Edit Window If this check box is selected the number of indent characters is set for each Edit window If itis not selected the setting is executed for the entire PM 312 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 11 Scroll tab This tab is used to make settings related to scrolling in the Edit window Figure 6 122 PM Settings Dialog Box Scroll Tab scroll a W Move Garet with Page Scroll M Scroll Half Page as Page UF Down Mouse Wheel b gt gt r i b Lines Scroll a Wheel a Way of scrolling setting area Move Caret in High Speed by Ctrl Up Down arrow Keys If this check box is selected the caret is moved quickly by 5 lines by pressing the Ctrl UP DOWN arrow keys default If it is not selected the caret is not moved quickly Move Caret with Page Scroll If this check box is selected the caret
100. is being used for the path name of the source file when execut ing make The order of linkage depends on the linker of the microcontrollers to be used User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 165 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Finish Terminates this wizard for creating a new workspace and generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the displayed information Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box 166 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified file Multiple files being edited can be opened in a read only attribute When closing files if there are multiple files opened in the read only status whose names are the same all of these files are closed Figure 6 37 Open Dialog Box Look in B PM_test ee Ez IO Macro Sjother_ products E crtN2 s I crtN s iC test c Files of type Source Files tt ck clak 2 Cancel Open as read only Help Apply Layer Rule ni Gather Files into an Edit Window This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu
101. is registered the registered mark name is displayed When the mark name is selected the selected mark name is displayed in the Mark Name edit box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 211 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Selecting mark and jumping Clicking the Jump button after selecting a mark or double clicking a mark makes a jump to the mark position in the window being edited Selecting mark and deleting Clicking the Remove button or the Delete key after selecting a mark deletes the selected mark Multiple marks can be added 3 FileName and Line The file name registered for the mark displayed in the Mark Name edit box and the contents of that line are dis played Function buttons Button Function Jump Clicking the Jump button after selecting a mark makes a jump to the mark position in the window being edited Add Clicking the Add button after setting the mark names in the Mark Name edit box register a mark Deletes a selected mark A mark can also be deleted with Delete key Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions In the following cases the mark is deleted from the list in this dialog box If the registered mark line has disappeared due to Cut or Delete menu item etc When the untitled Edit window is closed without saving while there is a mark added in the untitled Edit window When build or compile is executed and the co
102. layer rule Selecting the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box in which a layer rule can be applied to the contents of the Edit window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 61 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 5 Display Functions Operations related to display in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Display menu in the Main window Displaying a list of functions Displaying a list of layers Displaying the standard bar Displaying the build bar Displaying the option bar Displaying the external tool bar Displaying the status bar Displaying the Project window Displaying the OutPut window Displaying an object as contents or icon Displaying all objects as contents Displaying all objects as icons 5 5 1 Displaying a list of functions Selecting the View menu gt Function List opens the Function List dialog box to list the functions of the file dis played in the active Edit window The list of functions can be saved in the TEXT or CSV format with the Save the Func tion List dialog box 5 5 2 Displaying a list of layers Selecting the View menu gt Layer List opens the Layer List dialog box to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window 5 5 3 Displaying the standard bar Selecting the View menu gt Standard Bar toggles the standard bar between on and off 5 5 4 Di
103. menu gt To the Previous Window activating the window preceding the currently active one according to Z order window superposition order Note that To the Previous Window menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 9 8 Displaying a list of windows Selecting the Window menu gt Window List opens the Window List dialog box to display a list of currently open windows User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Tf CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 10 Help Functions Operations related to the help in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Help menu in the Main window Starting up the PM help Displaying the help of the Main window Displaying the help of a current window Displaying a list of shortcut keys Accessing to NEC Electronics microcontrollers web site Starting up a external help 1 Starting up a external help 2 Starting up a external help 3 Displaying the version information about PM 5 10 1 Starting up the PM help Selecting the Help menu gt PM Help starts up the PM help 5 10 2 Displaying the help of the Main window Selecting the Help menu gt Main Window displays the help topic of the Main window 5 10 3 Displaying the help of a current window Selecting the Help menu gt Current Window displays the he
104. must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics willingness to support a given application Note 1 NEC Electronics as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries 2 NEC Electronics products means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics as defined above M8E 02 11 1 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM MEMO Users Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual PREFACE The PM is an integrated development environment platform that enables efficient controls of programs running in Windows This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to develop application systems using the PM on Windows This manual explains how to operate PM on Windows For the Windows operations refer to the function guides provided with the Windows OS This manual consists of the following contents e GENERAL e INSTALLATION e STARTING AND EXITING e QUICK TOUR e METHOD OF OPERATION e WINDOW REFERENCE e MESSAGES It is assumed that the readers of this manual have a general knowledge of microcomputers and a basic knowledge of how to operate Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP Users Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Related Documents When using this manual also refer to the following documents Some related documents may be preliminary versions Note h
105. not exist it is automatically created when PMt is started up for example C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data NEC Electronics PM in the case of Windows XP 2 Tool Versions Combinations of tools to be used and their versions are displayed in this area When a tool set name is selected on the Tool Set drop down list the tools included in the tool set and their ver sions are displayed The tools included in the default tool set selected on the Tool Set drop down list and their versions are displayed by default The Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box is opened by clicking the Detail Setting button Tools to be used and their versions can be selected in this dialog box a Tool All the installed tools and tools included in the selected tool set are displayed in this area tools that have not been installed are displayed in gray b Version The tool versions specified in the selected tool set are displayed in this area However Unused is displayed for a tool whose version is not specified in the tool set c Select only Installed Tools If this check box is selected tools that have not been installed are excluded from the Tool Versions list box which corresponds to the tool set selected in the Tool Set default Selected01 is appended to the top of the name of the tool set with which this check box is selected if the tool set name actually exists SelectedOn is appended This check b
106. of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 3 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Finish Terminates this wizard for creating a new workspace and generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the displayed information Also generates a make file project file name mak automatically Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 140 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project wizard This wizard is used to add a new project to a workspace This wizard displays the following dialog boxes Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Add New Project Step 5 9 Register Mode dialog box Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box Add New Project Step 8 9 Select Debugger dialog box Add New
107. of the macros that are already registered The title is set by the Add or Change button The title can also be changed by selecting the character string displayed on the title and clicking it again The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu b Macro File Name Displays the registered macro file names 336 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Shortcut Displays the shortcut keys set in the macro file The shortcut keys are set on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab Function buttons Lowers the selected macro to the position directly below Add Opens the Add the Macro file dialog box to add a new macro Up to 32 macros can be reg istered Change Opens the Change the Macro file dialog box to change the contents of the macro selected from the entry macro list Deletes the selected macro User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 337 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to add a macro file for macro registration Figure 6 138 Add the Macro file Dialog Box Add the Macro File G PM_test Macro Look in E Macro ey E ex TMLee File name EIME Files of type Macro File ime Cancel Help New Eritry This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons O
108. on the function of each window refer to the following Project window Edit window Search result display window OutPut window Status bar The status bar displays brief description of the menu that has been activated by clicking and indicates the other various information Figure 6 3 shows an image of the status bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 6 3 Status Bar Copy the selection and put it on the clipboard odis CRLF JOVER IL 1 8 1 Y 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Brief description Displays the following descriptions The description of the menu that has been activated by clicking The contents of the line corresponding to a tag jump destination The name of the source file to be output When editing an IDL file Displays For Help press F1 in the default condition Character code type Displays the character code type used for the file currently edited Line feed code type Displays the line feed code type used for the file currently edited Key input mode Displays the key input mode In the overwrite mode OVER is displayed Depth of layers Displays the depth of the layers at the current caret position Number of columns Displays the number of columns at the caret position Number of lines Displays the number of lines at the current caret position User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 99 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Drag and drop function The followin
109. one word to the left When this check box is not selected if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the caret moves one word to the left and the range from the position where range selection started to the new caret position is re selected If lines have been selected with range selection nothing is performed Note that One Word Left menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 30 Moving the caret up by one line Selecting the Find menu gt One Line Up moves the caret up by one line If range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves regard less of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that One Line Up menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 31 Moving the caret down by one line Selecting the Find menu gt One Line Down moves the caret down by one line If range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves regard less of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that One Line Down menu item is
110. option button is selected the File Name button cannot be selected c Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is copied and used select this option button Specify the startup file name to be the copy source and the startup file name to be the copy destination If Browse button is clicked the Copy Startup File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be the copy source is displayed in Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 149 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE relative path using the keyboard The startup file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard d Do Not specify now 2 3 4 5 When no startup file is specified now select this option button In this case a startup file can be specified by selecting the project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options The Startup File Name to register Specify the name of the startup file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog
111. prw on the Project window At this time closes the currently opened workspace file and project file If a project file prj rather than a workspace file is specified a message is displayed after which the prw file correspond ing to prj is opened At this time the project file prj of PM V3 xx format can also be specified in this dialog box refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version If a workspace file is dragged to the main frame Edit window Search result display window OutPut window and User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 37 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Project window opens the workspace file that was dropped At this time closes the currently opened workspace file If a project file prj rather than a workspace file is moved using a drag and drop operation a prw file corresponding to prj is opened If an attempt is made to open a project file created by another NEC Electronics tool debugger or simulator a message is displayed after which the Project Settings wizard for updating the project information for PM are opened Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed 5 1 8 Saving a workspace Selecting the File menu gt Save Workspace saves the currently opened workspace The information of the opened workspace and the project s is saved into the current file by overwriting 5 1 9 Closing a workspace Selectin
112. read If a title setting has been performed with the read file it remains as its title If no title setting has been performed with the read file the project file name is set as its title Select Debugger information Only PM plus V5 xx Deleted Version information PM V6 xx The workspace name can not be renamed However the project group name or the project title name can be renamed by clicking the right mouse button on its name in the Project window If a project file generated by the other NEC Electronics tools debugger etc is to be opened refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace 5 1 6 Creating a new workspace Selecting the File menu gt New Workspace creates a new workspace To create a new workspace and its project the New WorkSpace wizard is displayed Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box to be displayed and click the Next gt button to proceed Click ing the Finish button in the dialog box at the last step New WorkSpace Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box causes a make file to be created automatically refer to 5 6 10 Exporting a make file for details of make file creation 5 1 7 Opening a workspace selecting the File menu gt Open Workspace or moving the workspace file using a drag and drop operation opens a workspace Selecting the File menu gt Open Workspace displays the Open Workspace dialog box and opens the selected workspace file
113. saved in the registry the settings are applied to the use environment the set tings in the Pre Build Process or After Build Process tab are saved in each project file Figure 6 98 Build Settings Dialog Box 1 2 3 Stop the Batch Build as Build Failed Stop the Build on Compile Error i Prompt Message Box as Build Finished Cancel Heb This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Function buttons Opening Select the Build menu gt Build Settings 282 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each tab 1 Build tab This tab sets the options for executing build Figure 6 99 Build Settings Dialog Box Build Tab bo stop the Batch Build as Build Failed c Stop the Build on Compile Error d gt Prompt Message Box as Build Finished Open the Log File as Build Failed When a build error occurs during build a log file is opened If an external editor is set it is displayed on the exter nal editor Stop the Batch Build as Build Failed If during batch build batch rebuild a build error occurs upon build termination batch build batch rebuild stops at that instant Stop the Build on Compile Error If even one error occurs during build building stops when compilation of that source file has finished When this box is not selected even if an error occurs during build building does not stop until compila
114. searched with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when the search does not end at the top of bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret Replace replace lt character string before replacement gt lt character string after replacement gt word matchcase zen special loop askloop frombottom source all lt character string before replacement gt Specify the character string before replacement with lt character string after replacement gt Specify the character string after replacement with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when search does not end at the top or bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret all Replace all when omitted same as the operation of Replace button 378 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Find in Files grepfile lt character string to be searched gt lt fiel type gt lt
115. selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 92 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Build menu Build and Debug Performs the build processing and then starts the debugger Refer to 5 7 1 Building and debugging Rebuild and Debug Performs the rebuild processing and then starts the debugger Refer to 5 7 2 Rebuilding and debugging Compile Compiles the selected file Refer to 5 7 3 Compiling Build Performs the build processing for the active project Refer to 5 7 4 Building Stop Build If during build execution build processing is stopped If during batch build or batch rebuild execution a question message is displayed and build pro cessing is paused Rebuild Performs the rebuild processing for the active project Refer to 5 7 6 Rebuilding Batch Build Executes building of the projects specified in the Edit Batch Build Set tings dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace Batch Rebuild Executes rebuilding of the projects specified in the Edit Batch Build Set tings dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace Update dependencies Updates the dependency relationship of the source files and include files Clean Deletes the intermediate files and hexadecimal code files that have been generated by the build processing Starts the specified editor to open the selected file Download Some Load Module Files Downloads multiple load module f
116. startup file may indicate a different mode from the register mode of the other source files Therefore execute the relevant processing measure from those shown below Modify the quasi directive that indicates the register mode in the startup file as follows In 22 register mode register mode option reg _ mode 55 In 26 register mode register mode option reg _ mode 77 In 32 register mode Deletes option reg mode line Ignore the following warning displayed at linking Id850 W4608 input file have different register modes use rc option for more information User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 133 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Specify a link directive file The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box Figure 6 18 New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File Please specify the Link Directive File 1 Workspace Information Memory Usage 2 select Tools f Use Internal memory only Use External memory 3 Select Real Time Os a 4 Startup File C Use the Existing file F 5 Register MadeG f Copy and Use the Existing file gt gt 6 Link Directive Filet T Setup
117. string to be searched was found in the source files of an IDL file This message is displayed when the of Display Message every Source File in the case of IDL file check box is selected s indicates the source file name Action by User Yes Executes replacement in the displayed source file No Skips replacement in the displayed source file and continue searching This message is not to be shown until new searching If this check box is selected and Yes is clicked global replacement continues without a message until the next global replacement is executed User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 367 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 368 Q2206 Do you wish to replace in the using file s Cause An attempt was made to execute global replacement in the file being edited s indicates the name of the file being edited Action by User Yes Executes replacement in the file being edited No Skips replacement in the file being edited and continue searching Q2207 Message s occurrence s have been replaced Do you wish to continue it from the top of file Cause Replacement finished at the last line in character string replacement s indicates the num ber of items replaced Action by User Yes Continues replacement from the first line No Stops replacement Q2208 Message Do you wish to cancel replacement Cause The Esc key was pressed during replacement of a character string to stop replacement Action by
118. that Select to the End of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 21 Selecting entire contents Selecting the Edit menu gt Select All selects the entire contents of the Edit window 5 2 22 Grouping by keyword Selecting the Edit menu gt Grouping be Keyword opens the Grouping by Keyword dialog box in which the lines that contain a specified character string can be collected 5 2 23 Restoring color of grouping line Selecting the Edit menu gt Restore Color of Grouping Lines restores the color assigned to the lines collected with Grouping by Keyword 5 2 24 Creating function prototypes Selecting the Edit menu gt Make Function Prototypes opens the Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box in which a function prototype can be created automatically 5 2 25 Inserting a new object Selecting the Edit menu gt Insert New Object opens the Insert Object dialog box to insert a new embedded object In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 5 2 26 Setting links for objects Selecting the Edit menu gt Link opens the Links dialog box to edit link objects change sources and cancel links In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 5 2 27 Object Selecting the Edit menu gt
119. the Tab Delete BackSpace and Enter keys File gt Insert file Edit gt Cut Edit gt Paste Edit gt Paste Special Edit gt Delete Edit gt Delete the Line Edit gt Insert New Object Replacement of a character string using Find gt Replace except Replace All Copying of lines by dragging of mouse Movement of lines by dragging of mouse Insertion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Deletion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Layer gt Promote Layer gt Demote 42 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 3 Cutting off character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Cut sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them from the Edit window If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed When a character string is cut the caret position will not be changed When lines are cut the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line following the cut position When the last line of a document is cut the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line 5 2 4 Copying character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Copy sends the character string or the lines se
120. the following buttons When a button is clicked the corresponding characters are entered in the text box Page number p Date d Time t Time t Source file name s b Position Specify the position at which the contents of the footer 192 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Draw a Line Below Footer Draws a line below the contents of footers d Draw a Filename and Path Prints a file name with the path name if the file name is printed in the footer e Draw a Source Filename and Path Prints a source file name with the path name if the source file name is printed in the footer f Footer Font Displays the font type and font size under currently set in the footer Clicking the Change Header Font button opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be specified Function buttons Enables the specified items Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 193 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Grouping by Keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to collect lines including a specified character string and display the collected results at the top of the Edit window In the collected results the search key is displayed in the first layer and the collected lines are dis played in the second layer The collected lines also remain in their original positions unless Delete
121. the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select Change File Names with a single source file name selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area 1 File Name Specify the newly set file name Up to 259 characters can be specified The file name selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box is displayed in the default condition 2 Folder The current folder is displayed Clicking the button opens the dialog box to select the folder 3 Comment Mark Select a comment mark from the option buttons If the contents of the Edit window is a C source is selected by default Otherwise a semicolon is selected by default Selecting the Original Mark or clicking the Setting button opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which a desired comment mark can be specified User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 181 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the IDL file name to the specified file name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Setting Opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which the comment mark for the specified file can be changed 182 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Selected Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to rename multiple source files selected in the Change Source Fil
122. the project is also displayed User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 79 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 1 Window Composition PM has the following windows wizards and dialog boxes Table 6 1 Window Wizard Dialog Box List Main window This window is the first window to be opened after PM is started To use PM start operation from this window Project window This window is used to display various information on the projects currently opened Edit window This window is used to edit source programs Search result display window This window is used to display the results of search OutPut window This window is used to display the execution status of the make file during build processing New WorkSpace wizard This wizard is used to create a new workspace and its project Add New Project wizard This wizard is used to add a new project to a workspace Project Settings wizard This wizard is used to update the project information for PM If an attempt is made to open a project file created by another NEC Electronics tool debugger or simulator Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified file Insert File dialog box This dialog box is used to insert the contents of a specified file to the current caret position in the active Edit window Open Workspace dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified workspace file Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the current active file into a s
123. the start position to the specified line If however a layer higher than that of the line at which the range selection starts appears between the start position and the specified line the range selec tion will cover until just before the higher layer line 208 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Makes a jump to the specified line Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 209 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destination line number in a specified source file Figure 6 56 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file Dialog Box Jump to Specified Line in the Source file File name Line No 1 V8ilteste o a i Cancel 3 Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Find menu gt To a Specific Line in the Source file Explanation of each area 1 File name Specify a destination file name If the active window has source files the drop down list sequentially lists the source file names If the active win dow does not have a source file a text file etc the drop down list displays only the file name 2 Line No Specify a destination line number If a value exceeding the high
124. to be opened The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above b Files of type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are displayed in the default con dition When opening a workspace file Source Files Caution The source file extension corresponding to the currently active project is displayed Include Files h inc idl Files idl Text Files txt All Files When not opening a workspace file Source Files c cpp asm s Include Files h inc idl Files idl Text Files txt All Files File types user specified extension etc can be added with the Tool menu gt Customize 3 Apply Layer Rule The specified file is inserted applying a specified layer rule This check box is not selected in the default condition however if Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s is selected on the File tab in the PM Settings dialog box this check box is selected automatically and dimmed The Layer Rule button can only be valid when Apply Layer Rule check box is selected Example Opening a file without checking the check box CAPM test testi c Chaneed m_ptNo Func im_lpTop nNo bTemp Fune2 iff bTemp m Char Funebl js jelsej t m Char 2 34 z t f TestDatal A say tt User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM
125. to select a menu that includes the menu item to be set from the drop down list Menu List This area lists the buttons and menu items included in the menu selected from Menu Select a button to be added Toolbar This area is used to select the toolbar to be customized The standard bar and build bar can be customized Buttons This area displays the buttons and menu items currently specified for the toolbar selected in Toolbar Inserts the menu item selected in Menu List at the position selected in Buttons Remove Deletes the menu item selected in Buttons Inserts a separating line at the position selected in Buttons Returns the configuration of the toolbar to the default state Moves the menu item selected in Buttons up Moves the menu item selected in Buttons down User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 323 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 User Menu tab This tab is used to set the menu displayed by the right mouse button or by the assigned shortcut key Figure 6 130 Customize Dialog Box User Menu Tab User Menu Menu Customize Menu a alle Right Button Menu Reset c Menu List wiew Menu Oper Insert file Close New Workspace b gt Open Workspace Femove Add gt nave Workspace Close Workspace Separator C cu T x Down a Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to be set from the drop down list b Me
126. to the first layer of the IDL file being edited the source file name of the copy source is set as is If the same source file name exists in the IDL file being edited however the information of the source file name of the copy source will be deleted If an attempt is made to save the IDL file being edited in this case a message prompting you to change the path of the source file name will be dis played then if you will select Yes in response to this message the Change Source File Names dialog box will be dis played In this dialog box specify the name of the source file to be created from the IDL file being edited 5 2 9 Inserting the contents of clipboard with specified format Selecting the Edit menu gt Paste Special opens the Paste Special dialog box to select the format in which the con tents of the clipboard are to be pasted and then inserts the contents of the clipboard to the caret position In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 5 2 10 Deleting character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete deletes the character string or the lines selected with range selection The charac ter string or the lines selected with range selection are not sent to the clipboard When a character string is deleted the caret position will not be changed When lines are deleted the caret will be posi tioned to the beginning of the line following the deleted position When the last line of
127. use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted whi
128. windows vertically 5 9 4 Splitting a window Selecting the Window menu gt Split splits the currently active Edit window into two At this time the editing opera tions performed in one part of the window are reflected in the other To split a window use either of the following After selecting the Window menu gt Split specify the split position with mouse When the mouse cursor is positioned to the top of the vertical scroll bar in the Edit window the split enabling cursor is displayed and specify the split position by it To return a split window to the previous state use either of the following Move the split line toward the top or bottom of the window with mouse Double click the left mouse button on the split line 5 9 5 Moving the caret to the other split window Selecting the Window menu gt To the Next Split Window moves the caret from the split window to the other split win dow 76 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 9 6 Activating the next window Selecting the Window menu gt To the Next Window activating the window following the currently active one accord ing to Z order window superposition order Note that To the Next Window menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 9 7 Activating the previous window Selecting the Window
129. with no internal RAM was specified s indicates the specified device name WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box 129 Message s Failed to start up NEC Electronics tool Please check the NEC Electronics tool is installed correctly Action by User Return to the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File Select any other device with internal RAM in the New Cause The DLL of the NEC Electronics tool could not be loaded s indicates the name of the file that could not be loaded Action by User Verify that the NEC Electronics tool product is installed correctly F0130 Message Failed to copy the file Failed to copy the file The original file cannot be opened or disk space may be not enough or the other process may be using the destination file Copy from s1 Copy to s2 Cause Failed to copy the file s1 indicates the name of the file to be the copy source and s2 indi hae cates the name of the file to be the copy destination Action by User Check whether there is a Read attribute in the file to be the copy source If there is no attribute assign the Read attribute and execute again Free up disk space Check if the file is being used by another application If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again FO131 Failed to remove the file Make sure that this file is read ee
130. 0 Message This IDL file has added or deleted the IDL source files Please add or delete the source file from the project file by Project Project Settings Command Cause When closing an IDL file the source files of the IDL file are added or deleted User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 371 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description I3401 Message The version of the device file specified by the project file differs from the version of the device file installed Make sure that the version of the installed device file is right The device file specified by the project file s1 The installed device file s2 Cause The device version described in the project file and the version of the installed device differ s1 indicates the device version described in the project file s2 indicates the version of the installed device 13500 Build completed normally The build operation finished with O errors 13501 Error detected on termination cea i a ip Base r tty a oi yt ap Cause The debugger to be used was changed but the new debugger is only valid the next time the debugger is started up 372 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE This appendix shows the sample link directive files These files are created when the Create and Use the sample file check box is selected in the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box or Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File
131. 1 8668 Japan Tel 044 435 5111 http www necel com America NEC Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Blvd Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 408 588 6000 800 366 9782 http www am necel com Europe NEC Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 0211 65030 http www eu necel com Hanover Office Podbielskistrasse 166 B 30177 Hannover Tel 0 511 33 40 2 0 Munich Office Werner Eckert Strasse 9 81829 Munchen Tel 0 89 92 10 03 0 Stuttgart Office Industriestrasse 3 70565 Stuttgart Tel O 711 99 01 0 0 United Kingdom Branch Cygnus House Sunrise Parkway Linford Wood Milton Keynes MK14 6NP U K Tel 01908 691 133 Succursale Francaise 9 rue Paul Dautier B P 52 78142 Velizy Villacoublay C dex France Tel 01 3067 5800 Sucursal en Espana Juan Esplandiu 15 28007 Madrid Spain Tel 091 504 2787 Tyskland Filial Taby Centrum Entrance S 7th floor 18322 Taby Sweden Tel 08 638 72 00 Filiale Italiana Via Fabio Filzi 25 A 20124 Milano Italy Tel 02 667541 Branch The Netherlands Steijgerweg 6 5616 HS Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel 040 265 40 10 Asia amp Oceania NEC Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 010 8235 1155 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd Room 2511 2512 Bank of China Tower 200 Yincheng Road Central Pud
132. 44 89 Delete the Line 45 89 INDEX Delete the Word 44 89 Delete to the End of Line 45 89 Delete to the End of Word 44 89 Delete to the Top of Line 45 89 Grouping by Keyword 46 89 Image Copy 43 88 Insert New Object 46 89 Link 46 89 Make Function Prototypes 46 89 Object 89 Paste 44 88 Paste Special Redo 42 88 44 88 Restore Color of Grouping Lines 46 89 Select All 46 89 Select to the End of Line 46 89 Select to the End of Word 45 89 Select to the Top of Line 45 89 Select to the Top of Word 45 89 Select to the Word 45 89 Undo 42 88 Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box 278 Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box 328 Edit Command dialog box 287 Edit Functions 41 Edit menu 88 Edit User keyword dialog box 326 Edit window 112 Character input 113 Copying lines layers 114 Definitions of words 113 Drag and drop function 117 Moving lines layers 114 Opening 112 Operations performed with the right mouse button 114 Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button 114 Range selection 113 Restrictions on the Edit window 117 Scrolling 115 Smart lookup function 115 Entry Macro Files dialog box 336 Exit PM 40 88 Exiting 29 Expand 58 91 Expand All 59 91 Expand All Lower Layers 59 91 Expand the Specific Layer 60 91 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 391 Expand to Spec
133. 59 91 Collapse All 59 91 Collapse the Specific Layer 60 91 Collapse This Layer 61 91 Demote 58 91 Expand 58 91 Expand All 59 91 Expand All Lower Layers 59 91 Expand the Specific Layer 60 91 Expand Collapse 58 91 Promote 5 7 91 Show Index 1 60 91 Show Index 2 60 91 Show Index 3 60 91 Show Index 4 60 91 Show Index5 61 91 Layer List 62 92 Layer List dialog box 234 Layer Management 57 Layermenu 91 INDEX Layer rule 168 171 226 Link 46 89 Link Directive File dialog box 271 Link Directive File to register dialog box 275 Load the Macro File 75 94 Load the Macro File dialog box 332 M Main window 86 Drag and drop function 100 Menu bar 87 Status bar 99 Title bar 87 Toolbar 96 Make Function Prototypes 46 89 Mark Jump 49 90 Mark Jump dialog box 211 Menu bar 87 Messages 346 N NEC Electronics Microcontrollers Web 78 95 New 36 87 New WorkSpace Step 1 9 dialog box 124 New WorkSpace Step 2 9 dialog box 126 New WorkSpace Step 3 9 dialog box 128 New WorkSpace Step 4 9 dialog box 130 New WorkSpace Step 5 9 dialog box 132 New WorkSpace Step 6 9 dialog box 134 New WorkSpace Step 7 9 dialog box 136 New WorkSpace Step 8 9 dialog box 138 New WorkSpace Step 9 9 dialog box 140 Ne
134. 6 9 LinkDirec tive File dialog box Click the Browse button after selecting the Use the Existing file on the Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirec tive File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to be specified from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 2 1 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a link directive file The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 212 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Copy Link Directive File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a link directive file Figure 6 92 Copy Link Directive File from Dialog Box Copy Link Directive File from Look ir B Fhl_test ct y Files test IE Macro 1 B other products IE Buttonsys dir IE sample dir Files of type Link Directive File dir bd Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Browse button after selecting the Copy and Use the Existing f
135. 6 Creating a new workspace 2 Creating a workspace using a project file created by the PM V3 xx or PM plus V5 xx In PM a workspace can be created by reading a project file or workspace file created by the PM V3 xx or PM plus V5 xx Refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version 3 Creating a workspace using a project file created by a NEC Electronics debugger simulator A workspace can be created by using a project file that has been updated the project information for PM in a wiz ard format Refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace Multiple projects can be registered to one workspace Refer to 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 31 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 3 Setting Options Related to Compilation Options related to compilation can be set for each project from the Tool menu Refer to the user s manual of the compiler for details of each option To set option individually in source file units select the appropriate file on the Project window and click the right mouse button When option is set individually the icon of the source file will change to green on the Project window Figure 4 2 Setting Options Related to Compilation Seles Project indow Files Wie mo Project indow Files Memo fs ButtonSys 1 Project s TER Source Files ge testle EE test2 c FE test E
136. 76 Func2 C PM_test testl c 91 Func3 The names of files defined in the functions Defined line number Function name Function buttons Saves the function list to the specified file Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 233 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Layer List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window Figure 6 68 Layer List Dialog Box lus Layer List E se manad i a i void Funct tint nGrte ey H BOOL Funceivoidh 75 W int FuncstlONG INo 902 1 a test cfE Program Files NEC tool one OI Furodiyvoids 1142 LPTEXT Func amp LPCGHAIN peTemp for 0 lt nids nldx peTemy fe char Func itvoid aa This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the View menu gt Layer List Explanation of each area 1 Layer The list indicates the text and line number with lower layers If the first layer has a file name the file name is dis played as well Clicking displays a list of the layers lower than the line Clicking hides the list Double clicking a layer or clicking the Jump button with a layer selected makes a jump to the selected layer in the Edit window Function buttons Jump Jumps to the layer selected in Layer Cancel Does n
137. 95 INDEX Register Ex tool 73 94 Window menu 95 Register the Macro Files 75 94 Window reference 80 Save the Key Operations 74 94 Workspace 22 Start up Ex tool 73 94 Close 38 Toolbar 96 New 37 Tool Management 72 Open 37 Toolmenu 94 Save 38 Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box 261 Tool Version Settings dialog box 258 U Undo 42 88 Uninstalling 27 Update dependencies 70 93 User Setting dialog box 316 V View 92 Build Bar 62 92 Display All Object as Content 63 92 Display All Object as Icon 63 92 Display Content Icon 92 Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon 63 Ex tool Bar 62 92 Function List 62 92 Layer List 62 92 Option Bar 62 92 Output Window 63 92 Project Window 63 92 Standard Bar 62 92 Status Bar 63 92 View menu 92 W Window 95 Cascade 76 95 Open window information 95 Split 76 95 Title Horizontally 76 95 Title Vertically 76 95 To the Next Split Window 76 95 To the Next Window 77 95 To the Previous Window 77 95 Window List 77 95 Window composition 80 Window List 77 95 Window List dialog box 342 Window Management 76 396 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM For further information please contact NEC Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki Kanagawa 21
138. APTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the widows that are currently open Double clicking a window in the list makes that win dow active Figure 6 140 Window List Dialog Box Window List Project indow i Cancel Close Window ts 1 Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Window menu gt Window List Explanation of each area 1 Select Window Displays the names of open windows Double clicking a window name in the list makes the window active Function buttons Makes the selected window active Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog box Close Window s Closes the selected window s Multiple windows can be closed at a time Opens the help for this dialog box 342 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Shortcut List dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of the shortcut keys set in PM Figure 6 141 Shortcut List Dialog Box shortcut List shortcut List Menu shortcut Hew Gtri N Oper Gtr o Insert file Glose New Workspace 1 Open Workspace save Workspace Close Workspace DAYE Dave AS save All Save All Changed Files nave and Close All Clase All 4 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons
139. Always Open New Files Display Message If Source Files Updated Layer Option as Update f Not Apply Layers b pe z Recover Layers f Follow Layer Rule Layer Indent f No Replace Cc Replace Tab E C Replace Space _ d m Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File a Compare Time Stamp of Source Files as Open idl File If this check box is selected the time stamps of the IDL file and source file are compared when the IDL file is opened default The operation to be performed if the time stamps are different is also selected here Always Open New Files The file with the later time stamp is always read Display Message If Source Files Updated A message is displayed when the source file is newer than the IDL file If the OK button is clicked in this message dialog box the source file is read instead of the first layer corresponding to the file When read the layer option settings is applied to the file at the that time If the No button is clicked the IDL file is read The source file is not updated If Apply to all update files is selected all source files found subsequently later are updated without any messages being displayed b Layer Option as Update This area sets the layer when the source file is read Not Apply Layers When a new source file is read it is read again without layer Recover Layers When a new source file is read the layer set in the previous source file is re
140. ButtonSys This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Insert Project Select the right mouse button menu gt Insert Project with a project group name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the project file to be inserted from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the project file to be inserted The project file extension is prj Files with any other exten sions cannot be specified 3 Project Group Name Select the project group name to which the project is added Up to 20 projects can be registered per project group If a new project group is added enter the group name in the combo box directly 236 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Inserts the selected project group into the workspace Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 237 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Update dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS update command for the selected file and acquire files registered in the repository The result is displayed on the OutPut window Figure 6 71 CVS Update Dialog Box CVS Update File 1 GAPMiestMestle 1 CAFM te
141. CE Clicking the right mouse button on the source file folder or the source file name displays the following menus When a Source File folder is selected Add Source Files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box When a source file name is selected Special Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box When options are set to a file the icon of the file displays in green Reset Special Compiler Options Cancels compiler options set to a file Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file When an assembler source file is selected Special Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box When options are set to a file the icon of the file displays in green Reset Special Assembler Options Cancels assembler options set to a file Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file When a structured assembler source file is selected These menu items become valid only when a project that uses a 78KO or 78KOS Microcontrollers is active Add Source Files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box Delete Source File Deletes a selected source file from the project Opens a selected file under the set editor Special Structured Assembler Opens the Structured Assembler Options dialog box
142. D OF OPERATION 5 2 8 Inserting the contents of clipboard Selecting the Edit menu gt Paste reads the contents of the clipboard and inserts them at the caret position At this time the layer information is also inserted When a character string is pasted the caret will move to the position following the character string in the default condi tion If however Don t Move Caret as Paste is selected on the Edit tab on the Option menu PM Settings the caret will not move When lines are pasted they are inserted to the line above the caret position and the screen is redisplayed without mov ing of the caret position If however the caret is positioned to the top line of the screen or if is not visible on the screen the screen is scrolled and redisplayed so that the caret is positioned to the middle of the screen If you perform Paste while performing range selection the lines selected with range selection will be deleted and the contents of the clipboard will be inserted to the position occupied by the lines selected with range selection At this time the caret will be positioned to the top of the line following the inserted position If however the caret is positioned to the top line of the screen or if is not visible on the screen the screen is scrolled and redisplayed so that the caret is positioned to the middle of the screen If the first layer line having a lower layer is copied or cut off from the other file and pasted
143. DOW REFERENCE Cautions If alayer higher than the one specified is already expanded there is no change If however Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Set tings Layer tab the layer lower than the one specified are collapsed If the current caret position is lower than the specified layer the updated caret position will differ depending on the following settings A Expand Caret Line Only check box which is in this dialog box B Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command check box which is on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Layer tab OA BO The Position of the Caret OFF OFF Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret OFF Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret The layers lower than the one specified are collapsed OFF Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret Not moves The layers lower than the caret position are collapsed 224 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to collapse specified layers Figure 6 64 Collapse to Specified Layer Dialog Box Collapse to Specified Layer 1 Specify The Layer Collapse Layer i ET 7 an Valid 1 127 Help k cel
144. Debug Build Share ee Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Build menu gt Select Build Mode Explanation of each area 1 Build Mode The currently selected build mode is displayed Select the build mode using this combo box as required There are two default build modes Debug Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is output default Release Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is not output Function buttons eo aaa the Add Build Mode dialog box If a language product that does not support build mode is used this button is invalid o Deletes the currently selected build mode and selects the build mode registered at the top Note that Debug Build and Release Build cannot be deleted If a language product that does not support build mode is used this button is invalid 280 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new build mode There are two default build modes Debug Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is output default Release Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is not output In this dialog box options can be added and deleted and any build mode can be defined based on these build modes Figure 6 97 Add Bu
145. Detail Setting dialog box opened by clicking the Detail Set ting button Changed is appended at the top of the tool set name If the tool set name already exists the indi cation appended varies from Changed01 to Changed99 After Changed99 the tool set name is displayed as UserSet Button Function Save Saves the tool set currently selected in Tool Set This button is not available appears dimmed if the tool set file is read only Delete Deletes the tool set name selected in Tool Set from the list also deletes the corresponding tool set file This button is not available appears dimmed if there are no tool set files corresponding to the selected tool set or the tool set file is read only Remark A file is saved as tool set name extension The extension varies depending on the product used as shown below 78KOR Microcontrollers including libraries tOr 78KO Microcontrollers including libraries tkO 78KOS Microcontrollers including libraries tOs V850 Microcontrollers including libraries t85 The file is saved under NEC Electronics PM in the Application Data folder which is accessible by all users User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 163 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If this folder does not exist it is automatically created when PM is started up for example C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data NEC Electronics PM in the case of Windows XP 2 Tool versions C
146. E Font dialog box Print This dialog box is used to specify the font and size of the characters to be printed Figure 6 47 Font Dialog Box Print Courter New Batanglhe Courier otumChe habhYyZe Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Change Font button in the Print dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Font and Size a Font Displays the font type under currently set Select a desired font type by the scroll bar b Size Displays the font size under currently set Select a desired font size by the scroll bar 2 Sample Displays sample characters in the selected font and size User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 189 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Enables the specified font and size Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 190 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Header Footer dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the contents of the header or footer to be printed Figure 6 48 Set Header Footer Dialog Box Set Header f Footer Header Header cai Cancel e E zj af Header Font Eee es 1 Font Arial _ Hep Position Size 10 point Draw a Line Below Header Draw a Filename and Path Ghange Header Font Draw a Source Filename a
147. E1430 Message A Toolset name cannot contain any of the following characters W i 2 lt gt Cause Action by User An attempt was made to use a character which can not be used for the tool set name Specify the tool set name using the character which can be used E1500 Message Cannot exit PM while a build is in progress Select the Stop Build command before exit PM Cause Action by User An attempt was made to close PM during build Cancel build before closing PM E1501 Message Cannot exit PM while make file creating Cause Action by User An attempt was made to close PM while a make file was being created Cancel make file creation before closing PM E1502 Message Failed to execute build Make sure that compiler and assembler was installed correctly Cause Build could not be started up The compiler or assembler is likely to have been installed incorrectly Action by User Check that the compiler or the assembler is installed correctly User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Number E1503 E1504 E1505 E1506 E1507 E1508 E1509 E1510 E1511 E1512 Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by
148. Ea ButtonSys 1 Projecti jl main Source Files Add Source Files Delete Source File testl c Compile testl c Open testl c Special Compiler Options Froperties Options are set individually per source file test1 c Click the right mouse button after selecting the source file test1 c In PM individual options related to the compiler can be set for each registered source file 32 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 4 Selecting Active Project In PM multiple projects can be registered to one workspace When build is executed therefore the project to be built must be pre specified To specify the active project select the appropriate project on the Project window and click the right mouse button The icon of the project will change from gray to pink when selected as an active project Only an active project is built or debugged Refer to 5 6 2 Selecting active project Figure 4 3 Selecting Active Project Project indow HE Memo lala ProjectWindow aad Files Memo fe Project group name Fas ButtonSys 2 Projects Ls ButtonSys 2 Projectie main Multiple projects can be managed E main H E Source Files the example shows main Library Source Files H test1c H E testlc i teste c testZ c IE iE 9 Include Files J Include Files H E Project Related Files Specifications etc can be freely
149. Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace 5 7 9 Updating dependency relationship of files Selecting the Build menu gt Update dependencies updates the dependency relationship of the source files and include files and reflects the update contents in the Project window Caution If a change that affects the dependency relationship change of include file path etc has been made in the compiler option settings or assembler option settings the dependency relationship must be updated 5 7 10 Cleaning Selecting the Build menu gt Clean deletes all the intermediate files and output files generated by building projects The user is not asked for confirmation when these files are deleted 5 7 11 Editing Selecting the Build menu gt Edit enables the file selected on the Project window to be opened with the set editor If a file that cannot be edited is selected on the Project window an external editor is opened and the file is edited as a new document 5 7 12 Debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Debug starts up the debugger and downloads a load module file During downloading the name of the load module file is displayed on the OutPut window At this time if a program is being executed on the debugger an error will occur Therefore Select the Debug menu item after stopping the program 5 7 13 Downloading multiple load module files Selecting the Build
150. Existing file on the New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Star tup File dialog box Click the Browse button after selecting Copy and Use the Existing file on the Add New Project Step 4 9 Star tup File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the startup file to be the copy source from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the startup file to be the copy source The extension of startup file is o or s by default User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 267 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Sets the specified file as a startup file to be the copy source Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 268 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Startup File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to register The file is to be the copy destination when a sample file or an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Figure 6 90 Startup File to register Dialog Box Startup File to register Look in E PM_test i ey E Files test crth s Macro Ejother products crtn2 o a Crt lE crtM o Files of type Start up files oo s Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the File Name
151. File dialog box and reads the keyword file kwd At this time the previous keyword is deleted If there are over 65 keywords in the setting file the 65th and subsequent keywords are ignored Opens the Save Keyword File dialog box and saves the keywords in a setting file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 317 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Font dialog box This dialog box is used to select the type and size of characters to be displayed in the Edit window Figure 6 125 Font Dialog Box Batanglhe Courter Hew F DotumChe Sample 3 haBbYyZZ Default Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Font Explanation of each area 1 Font Specify a desired font 2 Size Specify a desired size 3 Sample This area displays the sample characters of the selected font and size 318 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Defaut Registers the Registers the font specified here as the default font to be used when displaying a new Edit specified here as the default font to be used when displaying a new Edit window or when loading a file OK Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Does not enable the specified items and clos
152. Files crth2 s zample dir Other Files Library Servooyvs 2 Projectts This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Drag and drop function Opening Select the View menu gt Project Window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 101 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Files tab 102 The File tab displays the file information to be managed by a project file When there are multiple projects the information is displayed in project units A file can be added into a project by dragging and dropping the file onto this tab refer to Drag and drop function Figure 6 5 Project Window File Tab Source Files c E testl c main Funct d Funce Funes test c tests c crths Include Files e Test2h testlc testZc testic Test h 4 Project Related Files f crits sample dir E Other Files g Library Servooys 2 Projectts a Project group name Multiple registered projects can be arranged with related projects in a group The project group name can be set by the user freely and up to 127 characters names can be set The initial setting for the project group name is made when a workspace is created Up to 20 projects can be reg istered in one project group Register the same device file for multiple registered projects as they are managed as a project group When the mouse cursor is placed on the pr
153. Find menu 378 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Layer menu 380 Command Format for Keyboard Macro jump related 380 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Help menu 381 Command Format for Keyboard Macro no menu 382 Command Format for Keyboard Macro control command related 383 List of Shortcut Keys Default Condition 386 Quantitative Limit List 388 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 21 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 1 Overview The project manager PM is an integrated development environment platform for NEC Electronics microcontrollers 78KOR 78KO 78KOS and V850 Microcontrollers A series of operations in user program development can be performed from PM such as editor startup builder startup and debugger startup 1 2 Terminology The terms used for PM are defined below Figure 1 1 shows the image of the Main window Figure 1 1 Main Window of PM Workspace nn PM sampleipre OutPut TBR File Edit Find Laver View Project Build Tool Window Help a OGen Sal amp melarat main ButtonSys Debug Build a 4 a roject Window indow EORI se irni a Source Files test ic 1 test2 c i testae cris Inelude Files Project Related Files Other Files p pervooyve 2 Projectts i For Help press F1 LT ET OT Workspace A workspace is the unit which manages the file name of multiple project files PM saves the file names of multiple project files in
154. Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box 148 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Specify the startup file to be used by a option button This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box Figure 6 27 Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File Dialog Box Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File Please specify the Startup File 1 Project Information 2 Select Tools MG a Select Real Time O35 en l 5d Startup File C Copy and Use the Existing file 5 Register Mode tH 6 Link Directive File G T Setup Source Files s 8 Select Debugger C Do Not specify now Be g9 Confirmation GH V50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 GAP Wl test crths File Name The Startup File Hame to register The Startup File includes codes to be executed on Startup or Reset The sample file initializes RAM and stack then calls the
155. GP_SYMBOL amp tp _TEXT DATA ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 7A AX pro_epi_runti me 7 AX 7A use RTOS use external S CONS TS text const sedata ebss tidata byte tibss byte tidata word ti bss word tidata tibss sidata S bss 375 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS This appendix shows the command format that can be used for modifying macro files imc that have been saved as key commands How to read command format lt gt indicates an argument that cannot be omitted and indicates an argument that can be omitted indicates selection of either side File Menu Table B 1 Command Format for Keyboard Macro File menu New newfile idl idl Creates new IDL file Open openfile lt filename gt readonly layer autoselect sjis euc jis unicode filename Specify the file name with full path readonly Opens the file as a read only file layer Reads the file with layer rule autoselect Detects automatically Sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Insert file insertfile lt filename gt filename Specify the file name with full path Open workspace openworkspace lt filename gt
156. Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file If multiple projects are registered into the project group or if the debugger simulator is running these drop down lists are invalid User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 247 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Source File tab This tab specifies the source file information on the current active project Figure 6 77 Project Settings Dialog Box Source File Tab source File ource Files Add test ale Remove Remove All a Source Files This area displays the names of the source files set in the active project in build order including the relative path starting from the project folder Up to 2048 source files can be registered Opens Add Source Files dialog box to add the source file to the project Remove Removes the selected source file from the list Remove All Removes all the source files from the list Niessen ner OK Sets the project information on the currently active project Cautions If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible Executing make assembles compiles the source files in the order displayed in the source file list in accor dance with the program type The path of the project folder is used for the path name of a source file during make In addition the linking order depends on the linker of the microcontrollers used 248 User s Manual U18416EJ1V
157. Macro sss initime Files of type Macro Filek imc Cancel Help New Entry This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Change button in the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files Explanation of each area 1 Look in This area displays the folder containing the selected macro file The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be changed Only a file name with extension imc can be specified 3 Title This area specifies the title of the registered macro Up to 32 characters can be set The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu 340 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the stored contents of the specified macro file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 341 CH
158. Name O PM_test sample priv Project Group Buttonsys Project Title b gt B ButtonSys Series Name Device Name c gt V850 Seres ti rl juP D70300 Device Install a Information display area Project File Name The project file name of the active project is displayed Folder The project folder specified with the project file is displayed Workspace File Name The name of the workspace file to which the active project belongs is displayed with an absolute path Project Group The name of the project group to which the active project belongs is displayed If you wish to change the name of the project group click the right mouse button on the project group name in the Project window and select the Edit Project Group Name menu Project Title The project title to be displayed in the Project window is displayed When the project title is modified here that modification is reflected in the Project window Up to 127 characters can be entered for project title Microcontrollers Name and Device Name The microcontrollers and device name of the target device to be used are displayed They can be changed by selecting from the drop down lists If the device file for the device to be used has not been installed the following message will be displayed under the device name displayed The device file that has been selected is not registered When this message is displayed clicking the Device
159. OUM 3 a CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool Version Settings tab This tab specifies the tools used for the current active project Figure 6 78 Project Settings Dialog Box Tool Version Settings Tab Tool Version Settings Tool Set all YESO Series Software Package W410 Tool Versions Tool Version The tool which is not installed with the CASED Oo tool specified by the selected tool set c is digplayed in the gray LOW WO b oMe50 W300 SM for WASO W200 m o ony ele eak Detail Setting a Tool Set The combination of tools to be used and their versions is regarded as a tool set and the tool set name can be selected from the drop down list The existing tool set and recommended tool set 78Kx Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the 78K Microcontrollers and V850 Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the V850 Microcontrollers are listed on the drop down list The name of the tool set specified for use in the current active project is displayed by default If the tool set has been changed in the Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box opened by clicking the Detail Set ting button Changed is appended at the top of the tool set name If the tool set name already exists the indication appended varies from Changed01 to Changed99 After Changed99 the tool set name is dis played as UserSet Save Saves the tool set currently selected in To
160. Open dialog box to open a selected file 5 1 3 Inserting a file Selecting the File menu gt Insert file opens the Insert File dialog box to insert a specified file at the caret position in the currently active Edit window The files that can be inserted are IDL file and text file 36 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 4 Closing a window Selecting the File menu gt Close closes the window being edited If the contents of the window has been modified a message for confirming whether to save the changes is displayed Note that if there are any files with read only having the same name those files will all be closed 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Selecting the File menu gt Open Workspace opens the Open Workspace dialog box to read a project file prj or workspace file prw that was generated by the previous version PM V3 xx or PM plus V5 xx At this time PM outputs a message that prompt the user to confirm that PM is going to convert the file format into the workspace file format of PM V6 xx Click the OK button the file format is then automatically converted as follows and read Workspace file name If a project file is read project file name extension prw Project group name lf a project file is read device microcontrollers name e g V850 Microcontrollers Project title name If a project file is
161. PTER 4 QUICK TOUR 30 RRR RR BR RK N ODO OO BR W DPS Overview 30 Creating Workspace 31 Setting Options Related to Compilation 32 Selecting Active Project 33 Selecting Debugger 34 Executing Build 35 Other Settings 35 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 36 3 1 File Management 36 5 Creating anew file 36 Opening a existing file 36 Inserting afile 36 Closing a window 37 Opening a workspace 37 Saving a workspace 38 Closing a workspace 38 _ _ _ amp A _ I 1 2 3 4 5 6 Creating anew workspace 37 7 8 9 1 aana 0 Saving a file by overwriting 38 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Opening a project file generated by the previous version 3 5 2 aaa a _ _ _ amp A _ _ I I 11 s12 13 14 Pai 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Saving a file with anew name 38 Saving all files 39 Saving all files Changed files only 39 Saving and closing all files 39 Closing all windows 39 Closing all windows without saving 39 Changing a source file name 39 Saving all source files 39 Checking printing status 40 Printing 40 Printing directly 40 History of files 40 History of workspaces 40 Exiting PM 40 Edit Functions 41 gi N OW ST Sl OF AE O OP a A Cel Or T OE
162. Project Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box Figure 6 22 Add New Project Wizard at Starting Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information Workspace File Name GAF test sample ald verprw EE Oa select Tools select Real Time OS Startup File Gt Register Mode tH Link Directive File Setup Source Files Project Group Name ButtonSye r Project File Name ButtonSys Project Folder CAPM test Browse Project Title Confirmation GH VWO50 Microcontrollers Microcontrollers Name Device Name nly 4 6 VB50 Microcontrollers uPD703003 r Device Install This will set up the basic information about the project elect Debugger oo aS oe oo e oP Required field Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Wizard flow Explanation of each dialog box Opening Select the Project menu gt Add New Project Click the right mouse button at a project group on the Project window and select the Add New Project User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 141 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Wizard flow The dialog boxes to be displayed differ depending on the selection The wizard flow of each selection is shown below Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information Step 2 9 Select Tools Create a library project Yes No No s a real time OS specified as the tool used Yes Step 3 9
163. R 7 MESSAGES Description 0219 Too big print font so cannot print any more Cause When printing was executed with a large font after text wrap around line numbers and hier archy symbols were specified to be printed in the Print dialog box printing was canceled because a linefeed occurred between the line numbers and layer marks and the characters Action by User Set a smaller font and try again FO300 s Failed to delete temporary file Aborted to add a new project into workspace Cause The displayed temporary file could not be deleted when the Add New Project command was executed s indicates the file name that could not be deleted Action by User When specifying the project file name on Add New Project if overwriting the project file is enabled the original file is left with the extension bak Restore this file F0301 Failed to rename the file name s1 to s2 Aborted to add a new project into workspace Cause The displayed temporary file could not be renamed as the original file when the Add New Project command was executed s1 indicates the name of the temporary file and s2 indicates the name of the original file enabled the temporary file is the original file Restore this file Action by User When specifying the project file name on Add New Project if overwriting the project file is The characters in one line after the macro was expanded in a make file exceeded 5120 Act
164. R 7 MESSAGES Q2700 PM has finished comparing the file s Do you wish to continue it from the top of file When comparing the files comparison finished at the last line s indicates the file name Action by User Yes Compares from the start No Does nothing Q2701 PM has finished comparing the file s Do you wish to continue it from the last of file When comparing the files comparison finished at the start s indicates the file name Action by User Yes Compares from the last line No Does nothing Q2702 Set the default font This is applied to create a new file and open an existing text file Cause An attempt was made to change the set font value for when a new document is created or a text file is read by selecting the Default button in the Font dialog box Action by User OK Changes the set value of the font Cancel Returns to the Font dialog box without doing anything Q2703 The debugger was not selected Do you wish to select the debugger The Debug menu item was selected but the debugger was not selected Action by User OK Opens the Debugger Settings dialog box Cancel Returns to the active window Q2704 The tag jump format not specified Cannot jump to the error line if you don t set this Do you wish do it The tag jump format has not been specified when using an external editor is selected Action by User Yes If another environmental setting page is selected move to that p
165. Source Files 6 Select Debugger C Do Not specify now 9 Gontir mation GH VO50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 GAP M_test sampleP M dir File Name The link directive tile describes information about the allocation of program code and data h case of using the sample file Please customize it according as your target If you map the external ROM to the internal ROM area in ROM less mode please select use internal memory only The specified link directive file is registered to the Project Related Files The Link Directive File Name to register Back Cancel Help 1 Link directive file specification area a Create and Use the Sample file If this option button is selected a sample link directive file is created in the project folder in accordance with the selection in Memory Usage area and the selection of the OS in the New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box The link directive file is created under the name project file name dir and registered to the project related files automatically Memory Usage Use Internal memory only The external ROM is mapped to the internal ROM area when the compiler is used in ROMless mode Use External memory The TEXT sections are mapped to the internal memory and the DATA sections to the external memory The link directive file that is created is registered to the project related files automatically The name of the link directive file to be
166. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http www renesas com inquiry sCENESAS 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is grante
167. U18416EJ1VOUM 381 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS No Menu Table B 7 Command Format for Keyboard Macro no menu Insert character insert lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters independently of insert overwrite mode Overwrite character overwrite lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters independently of insert overwrite mode Enter character input lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters dependently of insert overwrite mode Input mode can be switched between insertmode overwritemode over writeswitch etc Enter new line insertreturn count count Specify an input count default is 1 Begin select beginsel Caution After executing beginsel execute a character move command or line move com mand to specify a range End select endsel Caution Releases the range selection mode set by beginsel Enter backspace backspace count count Specify an input count default is 1 Fast caret up upfast count count Specify a movement count default is 1 Fast caret down downfast count count Specify a movement count default is 1 Insert mode insertmode Overwrite mode overwritemode Edit window selection window lt window name gt readonly ReadOnly No lt window name gt
168. UM 307 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 8 Edit tab This dialog box is used to make settings related to edits Figure 6 119 PM Settings Dialog Box Edit Tab Edit W Select a String between Double Single Quotations az Tae Jump Don t Move Caret as Paste a wd isa Evin N Double Click Release Range Selected Before Jump Layer Expand Collapse b iw Beep Warning Sound C Select a Word Image Copy Object c gt C Convert Indent to Tab i Disable abject resize d f Convert Indent to Space Keep object when execute paste command iw Smart Look up Function Use iw Function List display Display the List at more than z character ts We User Setup List display User Setting e a Setting at the time of edit area Don t Delete The Line If it has Lower Layers If this check box is selected lines with lower layers are not deleted when the line delete command is exe cuted default If it is not selected lines are deleted regardless of whether they have lower layers Select a String between Double Single Quotations as Tag Jump If this check box is selected if a character string enclosed by or at the jump origin is at the jump destina tion when a tag jump is executed that character string is range selection default If it is not selected range selection is not executed Don t Move Caret as Paste If this check box is selected the caret position is not moved to the place where character stri
169. User CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description s Failed to start up the editor Make sure that the correct path and file name given The external editor could not be started up s indicates the path of the editor that could not be started up Check whether the set external editor exists If not use another editor or the editing function of PM s Failed to start up the debugger Make sure that the correct path and file name given The debugger could not be started up s indicates the path of the debugger that could not be started up Check whether the set debugger exists If not install it or specify another one User program is running Please stop it to execute the command The New Workspace Add New Project Insert Project Open Workspace Build and Debug or Debug command was executed while the user program was being exe cuted Stop the user program via the debugger and execute it again Cannot execute this command while the debugger executing While the debugger was starting up an unexecutable command was selected Close the debugger and execute it again The file s was not found Abort to compile The source file specified when executing compilation could not be found The source file name for which compile was executed is displayed to s Check whether the specified source file exists If not then create it Cannot add the build mode Please conform using the latest version compiler asse
170. User Yes Stops replacement No Continues replacement Q2300 Message Do you wish to apply layer rule Cause An attempt was made to open a file with layers This message is displayed when the Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s check box on the File tab under PM Settings on the Tool menu is selected The This message is not to be shown until restart check box is valid only when Yes is selected Action by User Yes Opens the file with layers No Opens the file without layers Message Do you wish to clear the undo buffer Do nothing if you select No Cause This is to verify whether the undo buffer is cleared when applying layer rule to a file Action by User Q2301 Yes Clears the undo buffer No Returns to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed even if the same opera tion is performed while PM is running Message s has already set Do you wish to change a setting Now s2 After s3 Cause When adding a project related file an attempt was made to add a file type that has already been set The type of file startup file etc to be set is displayed to s1 the currently set file name is set to s2 and the file name to be newly set is set to s3 Select Yes button to change the setting and No button to not change the setting Q2400 Action by User Yes C
171. User If the backup file is being used by another application close the application Check the disk capacity and execute again F0122 F0123 Message s Failed to delete temporary file Aborted to create a new workspace Cause The displayed temporary file could not be deleted when New Workspace on the File menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be deleted Action by User When specifying the workspace file name on the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box if overwriting the workspace file is enabled the original file is left with the extension bak Restore this file Message Failed to rename the file name s1 to s2 Aborted to create a new workspace F0124 Cause The displayed temporary file could not be renamed as the original file when New Workspace on the File menu was executed s1 indicates the name of the temporary file and s2 indicates the name of the original file Action by User When specifying the workspace file name on the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box if overwriting the workspace file is enabled the temporary file is the original file Restore this file Message s Failed to create the sample file Make sure that disk space or the same name file exists that is read only or the other process using F0125 Cause Failed to create the sample file s indicates the sample file name Action
172. VOUM 143 5 6 7 8 9 144 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Title Specify the project title to be displayed in the Project window Up to 127 characters can be specified If this specification is omitted the project title will be set as the project file name without the path and extension Microcontrollers Name and Device Name Select the item to be created and the device file to be used from the drop down list If an existing project group name is displayed in Project Group Name the microcontroller name and device name that are set to the project are fixed shaded If the device file for the device to be used has not been installed the following message will be displayed under the device name displayed The device file that has been selected is not registered When this message is displayed clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons This button is always disabled Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the sel
173. W Please select the debugger with Debugger Set tings E1720 Cause Action by User When executing TW850 the debugger to be used was not set Set the debugger to be used from Debugger Settings on the Tool menu and try again User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 4 Question The question messages output by PM are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the mes sage in message number order All question messages have Q prefixed to the message number When these messages are displayed the users must select a button in the message dialog box Table 7 4 Question Message List Number Description Q2000 Message Do you wish to save s Cause When closing PM or the Edit window the windows were not saved s indicates the char acter string on the caption of the window Action by User Yes Saves No Closes the window without saving Cancel Returns to the Edit window Q2001 Message Another process has changed s Do you wish to reload it Cause The contents of the currently open file were changed by another application s indicates the updated file name Action by User Yes Reads the new file No Displays the Edit window without reading the file Q2002 Message s is already using It is opened as read only Cause An attempt was made to read a file that has already been read s indicates the specified file name Act
174. Workspace Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 125 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Specify the tool to be used in this dialog box Figure 6 14 New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools Tool Set 1 Workspace Information V850 Microcontrollers Software Package V4O00Enelish Version al 35 gt Select Toole Save i 3 Select Real Time 0S Tool Wersions 4 Startup File G eee tars 5 Register Modet 4 CASSO a00 6 Link Directive File LOG VIO SMeBO vapo T Setup Source Files 2 SM for vasi Ve00 5 Select Debugger J Confirmation GH WOO Microcontrollers Only 4 62 if Select only Installed Tools Detail Setting Please select the Tools fram NEG Electronics to be used The following tools have been excluded trom selection because they are not installed STEE50 D850 IDS50 Nw Tyvs60 Back Cancel Help 1 Tool Set The combination of tools to be used and their versions is regarded as a tool set and the tool set name can be selected from the drop down list The existing tool set and recommended tool set 78Kx Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case o
175. X pro _epi_runti me PROGBI TS pro _epi_runti me text PROGBI TS text SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidata byte PROGBI TS tidata byte tibss byte NOBI TS tibss byte tidata word PROGBI TS tidata word tibss word SNOBI TS ti bss word tidata PROGBI TS tidata tibss SNOBI TS AC DSS sidata PROGBI T sidata Si bss SNOBITS SibSS I LOAD RW VOxffel00 data PROGBI TS sdata PROGBI TS sbss S NOBI TS bss SNOBI TS P __tp_TEXT TP_ SYMBOL gp DATA GP_ SYMBOL amp _tp_TEXT DATA __ep_DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 374 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM When Not use RTOS and Use External memory are selected APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE Sample link directive file not copyright and other notices SCONST sconst PROGBI TS SEDATA sedata PROGBITS ebss NOBITS i SI DATA tidata byte PROGBITS tibss byte S NOBI TS tidata word PROGBI TS tibss word NOBI TS tidata PROGBI TS ti bss NOBI TS sidata PROGBI TS Si bss S NOBI TS J I LOAD R I LOAD RX pro_epi_runti me PROGBI TS text PROGBI TS I LOAD RW VOx100000 data PROGBI TS sdata PROGBI TS sbss S NOBI TS bss SNOBI TS I LOAD R const PROGBI TS I LOAD RW VOxff6000 I LOAD RW VOxffe000 __tp_TEXT TP_SYMBOL __gp_DATA
176. a document is deleted the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line 5 2 11 Deleting a word Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete the Word deletes a single word at the caret position The deleted characters are not sent to the clipboard Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Delete the Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 12 Deleting characters to the end of a word Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to End of Word deletes the portion of the word that is to the right of the caret posi tion The deleted characters are not sent to the clipboard Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Delete to the End of Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 44 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 13 Deleting a line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete the Line deletes a single line at the caret position If multiple lines are selected with range selection Delete the Line cannot be selected The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard 5 2 14 Deleting character strings to the top of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to the Top of Line deletes the porti
177. able 5 1 Messages on the History of Replace in files Window The folder of xxx is invalid The specified folder is invalid The extension of xxx is invalid The extension of the specified file is invalid The System File of xxx is invalid An attempt was made to replace in a system file The Hidden File of xxx is invalid An attempt was made to replace in a hidden file The Read Only File of xxx is invalid The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a read only attribute The Binary File of xxx is invalid The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a binary file File xxx was Replaced The replacement and saving were performed in the specified file Replaced xxx Found yyy xxx the number of the replacement yyy the number of the detection File xxx was closed The specified file was closed Found xxx xxx the number of the detected search character strings 52 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The using file xxx is skipped The specified file was skipped because it was under editing When the message whether the search will be performed in a file under editing is displayed the above message is displayed after selecting the No button The search string was not found into the The search character string was not detected in the specified file under using file xxx editing The processing of using file xxx was Search of the specified file currently
178. able the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 288 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE dump850 dialog box This dialog box is used to activate the dump command dump850 The analysis results are saved under project file name dmp and displayed in the Edit window The execution of dump850 can be stopped by pressing the Esc key This dialog box is available only when a project that uses a V850 microcontroller is active and the CA850 Ver 3 10 or earlier is selected as the tool to be used The dump function is provided in CA850 Ver 20 or later Refer to the CA850 compiler package user s manual for details on dump850 Figure 6 105 dump850 Dialog Box dumpat OK Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt dump850 Explanation of each area 1 Dump the load module file This button is selected when a load module file is to be dumped default The analysis target files are the load module file of the currently active project The file name out to be output by the linker which is the analysis target file is displayed in the edit box 2 Dump the object file This button is selected when an object file is to be dumped The analysis target file is the object file generated by the source file selected in the currently active Edit window or Pr
179. afety measures in their design such as redundancy fire containment and anti failure features e NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades Standard Special and Specific The Specific quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer designated quality assurance program for a specific application The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade as indicated below Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots Special Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems life support systems and medical equipment for life support etc The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics they
180. age If the OK button is clicked return to the active window No Returns to the external editor page Q2705 Message Found key settings of Project Manager standard editor idea L Do you wish to use this set tings The key setting of idea L could be found Action by User Yes Copys the key setting of idea L so that it can also be used in PM No Does not use the key setting of idea L and uses the default key setting of PM 370 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 5 Information The information messages output be PM are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the message in massage number order All information messages have I prefixed to the message number When these messages are displayed the users must click the OK button as consent Table 7 5 Information Message List Number 3000 Description Message Another process has changed s If you wish to reload it Please change read only attribute Cause The source file has been updated but the IDL file is Read Only and could not be read again s indicates the source file name in the IDL file 3001 3002 3003 3004 Message s This file is read only It is opened as read only Cause The file specified to be opened was Read Only s indicates the open file name Message A workspace s1 will be opened instead of the specified project s2 Cause A prj file was specified
181. al editor s Failed to start up DFINST Make sure that the correct path and file name given DFINST could not be started up s indicates the executed full path name Check the set path and verify that DFINST exists Cannot register only box or separator Please register one or more command buttons An attempt was made to register only combo boxes and partition lines when customizing the standard bar or build bar Register more than one command button and then click the OK button s Cannot open this file Choose the application that open file The specified file could not be opened s indicates the specified file name Make an association with the application to be started up using Explorer Cannot open URL you specified Choose the application to open URL The specified URL could not be opened s indicates the specified URL Check if the browser used normally is set s Cannot start up this application Make sure that the correct path and given The specified application could not be opened s indicates the full path name of the appli cation Check that the path for the application is correct and try again A reserved word cannot contain any of the characters t lt 2 amp lt gt N S Prohibited characters were specified for the keywords of reserved words Specify characters other than prohibited ones for the keywords The Title menu string is already in use An attempt was made to s
182. ame project group If the device microcontrollers is the same but the device name differs a number is suffixed to the project group name Such numbers are suffixed from 1 A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut win dow is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped When dropping a workspace file and a file other than the workspace file together Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Opens other files that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened When dropping a project file and a file other than the project file together Creates a project group newly and add a project file Other dropped file is added as a source file to the added project and opened in the Edit window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 109 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When opening a workspace for which project is registered When opening a workspace for which project is registered is opened the operation differs depending on the location where the file was dropped Figure 6 7 Position where a File is Dropped in a Workspace for which Project
183. and filename given Cause When opening a file the specified file did not exist s indicates the specified file name Action by User Check the file name and try again Message Cannot change to the using file name Cause An attempt was made to save a file under the name of the file currently being edited Action by User Use the name of a file that is not being edited and try again Message The file s is read only Please input other file name E1002 E1003 Cause Action by User Use the name of a file that is not read only and try again Message Found the Layer in the Text File Please save to IDL format file Cause The open text file has layers when it was overwritten and saved Action by User Save layer information in an IDL file format An existing read only file was specified s indicates the specified file name E1004 E1005 Message The layer state is different when the file opened If you save layer information please save to IDL format file Cause The user applied layers to a file after reading it with layer and tried to save it in a text file for mat Action by User Save layer information in an IDL file format Message The file name is too long E1006 Cause The file name set when tag jump is performed is too long for saving the file under another name Action by User Change the file name to a shorter name and try again E1007 Message PM cannot divide the source files there were t
184. and lowercase character Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character Specifies a paragraph when omitted no paragraph is specified Changes the color after grouping Deletes after grouping Does nothing after grouping Only changes the color cannot be specified at same time as process after grouping Restores the original color of grouped lines Groups lines in a new Edit window Restore Color of Grouping undogroupcolor Lines User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 377 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Find Menu Table B 3 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Find menu Find Upward findup lt character string to be searched gt word matchcase zen special loop ask loop frombottom Source lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when the search does not end at the top or bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret Find Downward finddown lt character string to be searched gt word matchcase Zen special loop ask loop frombottom Source lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be
185. anings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicati
186. artup file is registered to both the source file and project related files Startup file specification is illegal Delete the startup file registered to the source file 150 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 5 9 Register Mode dialog box Specify the register mode option for the compiler The sample file of the startup file corresponding to the register mode which is selected in this dialog box is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box and Copy and Use the Sample file has been selected in the previous wizard step Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Figure 6 28 Add New Project Step 5 9 Register Mode Dialog Box Add New Project Step 5 9 Register Mode Please select the Register Mode 1 Project Information 29 Register Mode 2 Select Tools 3 Select Real Time 05 4 Startup File M 26 Register Mode gt 05 Register Mode Gt 6 Link Directive File T Setup Source Files o Select Debugger g Confirmation GH WOO Microcontrollers Only 4 62 According as the selected C4650 Register Mode the sample Startup File will be copied and used The Register Mode sete the number of registers internally used by the C4e50 4s a result of u
187. ation is the contents set by the Select External Tool dialog box Function buttons OK Registers the external tool and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The external tools are common setting item in PM They cannot be set in project units 294 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a external tool to be used Figure 6 108 Select External Tool Dialog Box Select External Tool File Name 1 GAWIN DOWS Notepad exe Browse Parameter Cancel 2 CO Help Tool Folder 3 CAWIN Des Menu String 4 Notepad Tool tip String 5 Motepad Status bar String 6 Start Notepad This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Add button in the Register External Tool dialog box Click the Edit button in the Register External Tool dialog box Explanation of each area 1 File Name Specify the name of the execution file for the external tool to be registered with the full path Up to 260 characters can be entered If Browse button is clicked the Open dialog box is opened to select the any file 2 Parameter The arguments used when executing the external tool can be specified here
188. back key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back plays back the recorded key operations If this menu item is selected during recording the recording stops and the operations start to be played back If the previous key operation is read by selecting the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File that key operation is played back 5 8 14 Saving key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Save the Key Operations opens the Save the Key Operation dialog box in which the recorded key operations can be saved to a file The extension of the file macro fle in which the operations are saved is imc 5 8 15 Commands corresponding to key operations When the recorded key operations are saved the command corresponding to each key operation is described in a macro file imc The macro file is text file and can therefore be referenced or modified Addition is also possible in accordance with the prescribed format refer to APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS 14 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 16 Reading key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File opens the Load the Macro File dialog box in which a key opera tion can be read from the specified file imc To play back the key operation select the Tool menu gt Play Back the Macro File 5 8 17 Executing macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back the Macro File opens
189. be found the caret position does not move Any braces in comments are ignored If range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and then the caret moves regard less of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Example gt oub title bithdeal NotUpdate TRUE niWork 0 for psc Work 0 psc Word NULL amp amp nWork lt BORDCHAIN NUM if psc Work gt szWordList 0 I NULL The matching brace No 1 The matching brace No 3 The matching brace No 2 The caret position is alternately moved to the matching brace by the input of the Ctrl L key combination TP gt bub title bitideal NotUpdate TRUE nWork 0 for psc Work 0 pscWord NULL amp amp nWork lt BORDCHAIN NUM if osc Work gt szWordList 0 NULL The matching brace No 2 The matching brace No 3 The matching brace No 1 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 51 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 21 Searching for a character string within multiple files Selecting the Find menu gt Find in Files opens Find in Files dialog box to search for a character string within mul tiple files in a specified folder 5 3 22 Replacing a character string within multiple files Selecting the Find menu gt Replace in Files opens Replace in Files dialog box to replace a character string within multiple files in
190. box This dialog box is used to save the functions displayed in the Function List dialog box to a file Layer List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window Select Active Project dialog box This dialog box is used to select the active project Insert Project dialog box This dialog box is used to insert an existing project into a project group Function List dialog box CVS Update dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS update command for the selected file and acquire files registered in the reposi tory CVS Commit dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflect the file in the repository CVS Log dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS log command for the selected file and display the file s log contents in the Out Put window CVS Status dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS status command for the selected file and display the file s status in the OutPut window Project Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the information on the current active project Add Source Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add source files to a project Add Project Related Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add project related files to a project User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 81 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Other Files dialo
191. building Selecting the Build menu gt Rebuild starts up a set of language tools assembler compiler and link commands for the active project With Build menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their depen dent files have been scanned whereas with Rebuild menu item all the source files are built unconditionally The messages output form the language processing tools during rebuild are output to a log file and displayed on the OutPut window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop rebuild select the Build menu gt Stop Build Caution In PM Ver 3 xx if the Rebuild menu item is executed while the debugger is activated a load module file is down loaded automatically but in PM a load module file is not downloaded To perform batch processing from rebuild to download use the Rebuild and Debug menu item 5 7 7 Batch building Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Build opens Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box and executes building of the projects specified in the Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 69 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 8 Batch rebuilding Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Rebuild opens Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box and executes rebuilding of the projects specified in the
192. but it has a corresponding workspace so an attempt is being made to open that workspace s1 indicates the name of the workspace file to be opened that corre sponds with the project and s2 indicates the project file name specified by the user Message The search string was not found Cause The specified character string could not be found during a character string search Message The string s has not be found in the file s Cause PM judged that the file to be read was a binary file s indicates the file name 3005 13200 13201 Cause The specified character string could not be found during global searching with the Search Active Window Only check box selected The first s indicates the character string specified to be searched and the second s indicates the file name Message PM has finished searching the files The string s has not been found in d files Cause The specified character string could not be found during a global search d indicates the num 13202 ber of searched files and s indicates the searched character string 13203 Message s occurrence s have been replaced Cause All replacement has finished and the number of replaced character strings is displayed s indicates the number of replaced character strings the replacement Cause Global searching is being executed now s indicates the name of the file name currently being searched 13204 13205 13206 13207 1340
193. by User Free up disk space Check whether or not a file with the same name is read only or being used by another application If the file is read only clear the attribute and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 349 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description F0126 Message Cannot found the data file for creating the sample link directive file Make sure that PM has installed correctly Cause When creating a link directive file sample the data file to be used could not be found ball by User In the last dialog box of the wizard click the Cancel button close PM and install PM again Or return to the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File F0127 Message Cannot read the data file for creating the sample link directive file Make sure that PM has installed correctly Cause The data file to be used for creating the link directive file sample is damaged Action Cac User In the last dialog box of the wizard click the Cancel button close PM and install PM again Or return to the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File F0128 Message s The internal RAM area information not found The sample link directive file cannot be cre ated FO The name of a device
194. can be selected When multiple projects have been selected and the check box one of the selected projects is manipulated the check boxes of the other selected projects are manipulated likewise 2 8 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Up Moves the selected project up within the list When the project at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected project moves to the bottom of the list When multiple projects are selected this button is disabled Down Moves the selected project down within the list When the project at the bottom of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected project moves to the top of the list When multiple projects are selected this button is disabled Cautions If the project build Mode is added after closing the Batch Build dialog box the next time the Batch Build dialog box is opened the added project build mode item is added to the Build Project and Build Order to be built If the project build Mode is deleted after closing the Batch Build dialog box the next time the Batch Build dialog box is opened the deleted project build mode item is deleted to the Build Project and Build Order to be built User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 219 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to select add and delete build modes Figure 6 96 Build Mode Dialog Box Build Mode Build Mode 0 1
195. cannot be selected grayed if there are no dimmed tools all the listed tools have been installed 3 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 4 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 5 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 127 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box Specify whether or not to use NEC Electronics real time OS This dialog box is displayed only when a real time OS has been selected as the combination of tools to be used in the New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Figure 6 15 New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time 0S Please select the Real Time OS RTOS RTOS 1 Workspace Infor
196. caret is displayed at the first line when an IDL file is opened If it is not selected the caret is displayed at the position saved the previous time 310 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE f Memorize number of Tab Characters each Window If this check box is selected the number of Tab character expansions is set for each Edit window If it is not selected the setting is executed for the entire PM g Color Background Sets the background color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to character The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button Character Sets the underline color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to char acter The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button Underline Sets the underline color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to underline The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button CR and EOF Sets the linefeed code and EOF color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to CR and EOF The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button ReadOnly Source File Sets the character color of the source files set as read only in the IDL files The currently set color is dis played in the text box next to ReadOnly Source File The color can be changed by
197. ce All Searches for matches from the current caret position or the end of the specified edit range toward the end of the text and replaces all the character strings that match the search key Details Displays the normal Replace String dialog box in which the search conditions can be changed Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE e Replace All from Top of Line If this box is selected the replacement starts from the first line regardless of the position of the caret f This Source File Only If this box is selected only the source file to which the caret is currently positioned is searched Function buttons Button Function Find Next Searches for a match for the search key Replace Replaces the character string and continues searching for another match for the search key If a read only file is active this button cannot be selected Replace All Performs a search from the current caret position and replaces all the character strings that match the search key without confirming If a read only file is active this button cannot be selected Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions When the Esc key is pressed the search is aborted The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed at the next repla
198. ce file can be changed 5 1 18 Saving all source files Selecting the File menu gt Save All Source Files saves all the source files by overwriting regardless of whether the contents are modified or not User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 39 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 19 Checking printing status Selecting the File menu gt Print Preview displays the printing status of the active Edit window in the condition set in the Print dialog box The following functions are supported on the print preview window Print Displays the Print dialog box Next Page Displays the next screen Prev Page Displays the previous screen One Page Two Page Toggles the display mode between one page or two page Zoom In Expands the display in two steps Zoom Out Reduces the display in two steps Close Closes the print preview window 5 1 20 Printing Selecting the File menu gt Print opens the Print dialog box to print the contents of the active Edit window 5 1 21 Printing directly Selecting the File menu gt Print Direct prints the contents of the active Edit window without opening the Print dialog box 5 1 22 History of files The bottom of the File menu displays the names of the ten most recently edited saved files Selecting any one of them causes the Edit window for that file to open 5 1 23 History of workspaces The bottom of the File menu displays the names of the ten most recentl
199. cement If the replacement ends without finding any match for the character string to be replaced the operator is notified by the issue of a message or beep depending on the setting of Warning for Find Replace on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 207 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Jump to Specified Line dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destination line number in the current file Figure 6 55 Jump to Specified Line Dialog Box Jump to Specified Line OK oo Zz Ok SONS i Cancel 2 Valid 1 107 Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Find menu gt To a Specific Line Select the To a Specific Line button on the tool bar Explanation of each area 1 Line No Specify a destination line number A jump to the specified line is performed by clicking the OK button 2 Valid The valid range is from the first line to the last line on the display Note If there is a range selection in the Edit window the operation is as follows according to the status of Release Range Selected Before Jump check box on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Selected The range selection is released and the caret is moved to the top of the specified line Not selected The range selection will cover from
200. ch is the same operation as the description of at User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear d Display the Source File Names in the case of IDL file only details If this button is selected the source file name is also displayed for an IDL file default e Match Case If this box is selected a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default f Match Whole Word Only only details If this box is selected a whole word match for the search key is searched for 5 Show File Names only details a Show All File Names with Layer Displays the names of all searched files in the Search result display window
201. clicking the Set Color button Error Line Specifies the color used to highlight characters in the error indication line in the OutPut window The cur rently set color is displayed in the text box next to Error Line The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button Warning Line Specifies the color used to highlight characters in the warning indication line in the OutPut window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to Warning Line The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button h Appear Flat Toolbar If this check box is selected the toolbar is displayed flat default User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 311 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 10 Layer tab This tab is used to make settings related to layers Figure 6 121 PM Settings Dialog Box Layer Tab Layer a p Layer Mark at Top of Line Tar Line with Lower Layer Bo H EE ed c Line without Lower Layer 7 RAR Indent Characters AAA bro c2 4 ce o d Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command e Set hdent Character each Edit Window a Layer Mark at Top of Line This area sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line Line with Lower Layer Sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line with lower layers The default is Line without Lower Layer Sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line without lower layers The default
202. contents of the first line in the Edit window A newly created source file A default file name is created based on the contents of the first layer line of each file in the Edit window 5 1 11 Saving a file with a new name Selecting the File menu gt Save as opens the Save As dialog box to assign a name to the file being edited and save it In addition the indent by the layer and the setting of the Tab can be specified with the Save Source Files Options dialog box 38 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 12 Saving all files Selecting the File menu gt Save All saves all of the files currently open in the Edit window by overwriting The con tents of the Edit window including those that have not been modified are also saved however the contents of the Edit win dow OutPut window and Search result display window that have the read only attribute are not saved Note that Save All Changed files Only menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 13 Saving all files Changed files only By selecting the File menu gt Save All Changed files Only the contents of all the Edit window currently opened are saved by the same file name However the contents of the Edit window including those that have not been modified is not saved Note that Save All Changed file
203. cter strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of at To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear Display Mini Dialog If this check box is selected the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box when the Find Next button is next selected default Figure 6 54 shows an image of the Replace String dialog box mini Figure 6 54 Replace String Dialog Box Mini Replace String i Up Replace Down Replace All Details Cancel Help Button Function Down Continues the downward search for a character string matching the specified search key U Continues the upward search for a character string matching the specified search key Replace Down Replaces the found characters string then continues the downward search Repla
204. cts lines including the specified character string regardless of the paragraph default The definitions of paragraph are as follows Beginning of a paragraph Line preceded by a blank or a higher layer End of a paragraph Line followed by a blank or a higher layer 4 After Grouping a Change Color Displays the collected lines in blue default b Delete Deletes the collected lines from the original positions If Yes is selected in Paragraph the lines cannot be deleted c Do Nothing Performs no processing on the collected lines 5 Match Case Collects lines including a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the char acters in the search key 6 Restore Color of Grouping Lines Already Collects lines in the original color which was changed by the previous grouping default 7 Change Color of Grouped Lines Only Collects no lines and instead only changes the color of the lines including the search key specified in Find What If this check box is selected the setting made in After Grouping is disabled By default this check box is not selected Function buttons Grouping to The Top Collects lines including the search key and displays the collected lines at the top of the searched Edit window in the order in which the lines are found Grouping to Other Collects lines including the search key and displays the collected lines at the top of a new Edit window in th
205. d Figure 6 46 Print Dialog Box Printer Name Generic PostScript Printer Properties 1 Status Ready Type 9 AdobePSGenerncPostScrptPrinter Where LPT Comment Print Range Line Humber fe Al Print Line Numbers 2 Selec C Caret Line and Lower Layer abt Laver Font rial Iw Print with Indentation size 10 point Print Layer Marks Change Font 3 if Print Collapse Layers Other Insert New Page Code at Enable multiple lines print Tat L EYCI ISt Lapele Print Header Footer Print Until le ayer 1 127 Preview E This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Print Select the Print button on the File menu gt Print Preview Explanation of each area 1 Printer a Name Select the printer to be used from the drop down list The name of the printer specified as the default printer is displayed by default Clicking the Properties button can change the printer settings 186 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Print Range a All Prints all of the contents of the window b Selection Prints the selected portion in the window c Caret Line and Lower Layer Prints a line and subsequent lower layer lines at the caret position 3 Layer a Print with Indentation Prints lower layers with indent aligning a first line of the select
206. d Settings Cause Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item was executed with not even one project spec ified for building in the batch build setting Action by User After opening the Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box from the Batch Build Settings menu item and performing the batch build setting execute Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item again E1600 Message Cannot change to the folder for macro file Cause A macro folder other than the file specified when reading saving the macro file was set Action by User Specify the set folder for the macro file E1601 Message Over 32 characters Cause When registering the macro an attempt was made to set more than 32 characters for the title of the macro Action by User Set a title with fewer than 32 characters E1610 Message Not enough the options Y d s Cause The options set by the macro instruction are insufficient Such as no specification of the line number by the specified line jump d indicates the line number with the error and s indi cates the line contents Action by User Correct the macro with the correct option setting E1611 Message Wrong the specific number d s Cause A value other than a decimal number was specified for the numeric setting of a macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Action by User Specify the value with a decimal number
207. d and continues adding a source file This message is not be shown until next adding the source files If this check box is selected this message is not displayed until the next source file addition s This file generated by the configurater Do you wish to add it to the project An attempt was made to register a source file automatically generated by the configurator to the project s indicates the specified file name Yes Registers the specified file to the project No Makes the specified file invalid and does not register it to the project The NEC Electronics tool to be used was changed When these tools are changed it is nec essary to compile all source files at the time of next build Are all object files deleted in order to compile all source files at the time of next build An attempt was made to change the configuration of the tool to be used in the Too Version Settings dialog box Yes Deletes all the object files of the modified project No Does nothing and closes the message s This Workspace was generated by a previous of Project Manager Do you want to con vert all projects After being converted they cannot read by a previous version of Project Manager An attempt was made to open a workspace file generated by the PM plus V5 xx s indi cates the workspace file name Yes Converts all projects and reads the workspace file No Does nothing and closes the message s An old versi
208. d hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but R
209. der You don t need ta specify all the files here and you can setup source files using Project gt Project Settings later Back Cancel Help 1 Source File Name The names of the source files to be registered into the project are displayed in the source file list box The source files are registered to the project file in the order currently shown in this list box In addition the build processing are performed in the registered order Add Opens the Add Source Files dialog box to specify the source code files to be registered to the project Up to 2048 source files can be registered per project The extension of source code file differs depending on the microcontrollers name registered to the project Remove Removes the selected file from the source file list box By selecting a file name while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key multiple source file names can be selected at once The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Remove All Removes all the source files from the source file list box The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Moves the selected file up within the source file list box Moves the selected file down within the source file list box User s Ma
210. der are also searched through This setting is linked with the setting made in the Find in Files dialog box Match Whole Word Only If this box is selected a whole word match for the search key is searched for This setting is linked with the set ting made in the Find in Files dialog box Display Message every Source File in the case of IDL file If this box is selected if the replacement target file is an IDL file used to create a source file the name of the source file in which the search key was found is displayed as the message Q2205 Clicking the Yes button performs search replacement for the displayed source file Clicking the No button makes search replacement skip from the displayed source file to the next source file A read only source file line is not replaced in this case the message box will not appear and the search will skip to the next source file Match Case If this box is selected a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default This setting is linked with the setting made in the Find in Files dialog box Regular Expression If this box is selected regular expressions are supported in global searching Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation X or Y appears selection User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Expression Description X appears
211. dex 3 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 14 Displaying the first to fourth layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 4 collapses the fifth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fourth layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the fourth layer it will be positioned to the fourth layer Note that Show Index 4 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 60 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 15 Displaying the first to fifth layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 5 collapses the sixth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fifth layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the fifth layer it will be positioned to the fifth layer Note that Show Index 5 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 16 Collapsing a layer at the caret Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse This Layer collapses the layer of the line to which the caret positioned If the caret line has lower layers and these lower layers are expanded the lower layers will also be collapsed 5 4 17 Applying a
212. displayed c Workspace File Name The name of the workspace file to which the project belongs is displayed with an absolute path The file name is automatically determined as project file name extension prw d Project Group The name of the project group to which the project belongs is displayed If you wish to change the name of the project group after this wizard terminates click the name of that project group with the right mouse button in the Project window and select the Edit Project Group Name menu 2 Project Title The project title to be displayed in the Project window is displayed If the project title is modified here the modification is reflected in the Project window Up to 127 characters can be entered for a project title User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 161 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Microcontrollers Name and Device Name The microcontrollers and device name of the target device to be used are displayed They can be changed by selecting from the drop down lists If the device file for the device to be used has not been installed the following message will be displayed under the device name displayed The device file that has been selected is not registered When this message is displayed clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file If multiple projects are registered into the project group or if the debugger simulator is running
213. e use legal ones If the disk is full free up memory FO104 Message Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file The original source file by IDL file cannot be opened Cause When changing the name of a source file generated by IDL the original source file could not be opened Action by User Check the path for the source file and specify the correct path using Change Source File Name from the File menu F0004 Message Make file is broken Make sure that the make file is remade Cause An attempt to execute build failed because the make file was damaged Cannot save this file This file is used by the other process or specified illegal file name or the disk is full A file already specified by another process is being used for storing source files or the disk capacity is smaller than the volume of the files to be written If the specified file is being used by another application close the application If the disk is full free up memory If the file name is illegal specify it with usable characters User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 347 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0105 Failed to open the project file Cannot accentuate the register Cause The project file could not be found or the project file could not be opened because it is dam aged Action by User Check the path for the project file or verify that the project file is not damaged F0106 Failed to open the device file Cannot accentuate the reg
214. e Open dialog box is opened to select the any file In the Open dialog box the Apply Layer Rule and Gather Files into an Edit Window check boxes and the Layer Rule button are invalid 3 Way of comparison setting area a Compare collapse layer If this check box is selected the contents of collapsed layers are also compared default If it is not selected the contents of collapsed layers are not compared b Compare layer number If this check box is selected differences in the layer positions are also compared default If it is not selected differences in the layer positions are not compared c Display files side by side If this check box is selected the Original file and the Another file are displayed side by side default If it is not selected they are displayed in the status they were in during comparison 4 Start position a Topline If this button is selected comparison starts from the first line of the file default b Caret position If this button is selected comparison starts from the caret position Function buttons Upward Compares files in the upward direction This dialog box becomes mini version after the com parison If a difference in file contents is found the caret moves to the line including the difference Note that when the Top line button is selected this button is dimmed Downward Compares files in the downward direction This dialog box becomes mini version after the
215. e File This area displays the device name file name and version of the device file used in the currently open project file under device name device file name version date If the tree is opened the device file name is displayed with the full path 344 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 345 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 1 Display Format The messages output by PM are displayed in the message dialog box shown in Figure 7 1 There are four kinds of messages When a message is displayed a letter indicating the message type is prefixed to the message number The meaning of each message type is shown in Table 7 1 Figure 7 1 Message Dialog Box A E1600 Cannot change to the folder for macro Tile Table 7 1 The Meaning of each Message Type Fatal Error This message is displayed when a fatal error occurred Operation Error This message is displayed when an operating error occurred and execution is not possible Qf Question This message is displayed when some kind of choice is required for the operation 1 information This message is displayed to report some kind of information 346 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 2 Fatal Error The fatal error messages output by PM are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the mes sage in message number order All fatal error messag
216. e Names dialog box Figure 6 44 Change Selected Source File Names Dialog Box Change Selected Source File Names D Si Cancel Folder CAPM test je Help Comment Mark C 4 Double Slash fe Ak ow CD 3 C Semicalon2 C Sharp C Original Mark Setting This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select Change File Names with multiple source file names selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Extension If all the selected files have the same extension the extension is displayed If the files have different extensions this area is left blank 2 Folder If all the selected files are saved in the same folder the folder is displayed If the files have different settings this area is left blank Clicking the button opens the dialog box to select the folder 3 Comment Mark Select a comment mark from the option buttons If all the selected files have the same comment marks the current comment mark is selected Otherwise nothing is selected by default Selecting the Original Mark or clicking the Setting button opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which a desired comment mark can be specified User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 183 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the IDL file name to the specified file name Does not enable the settings
217. e Project Selects the project to be the target for the build processing Opens the Select Active Project dialog box Add New Project Opens the wizard to add a new project into the workspace Insert Project Inserts an existing project into the workspace Opens the Insert Project dialog box CVS Update Acquires the source files registered in the server when CVS is used CVS Commit Reflects the contents of the modification of source files into the server when CVS is used CVS Diff Displays the difference between the files when CVS is used CVS Status Displays the status of the file when CVS is used Export Makefile Creates a make file for the project Add Source Files Adds source files to an active project Opens the Add Source Files dialog box Add Project Related Files Adds project related files to an active project Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Add Other Files Adds any files to an active project as other files Opens the Add Other Files dialog box Direct Select Active Project Make the Active Project Selection combo box of the toolbar active Active projects can be switched by selecting a project Note Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings CVS Log Displays the log contents of the file wnen CVS is used Project Settings Sets the project information Opens the Project Settings dialog box for the Project menu by
218. e Search result display window When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut win dow is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 119 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OutPut window The OutPut window displays the execution status of the make file during build processing On second and subsequent opens this window re displays the status when the window was exited previously Regarding the execution status error lines and warning lines are displayed in red and blue respectively Figure 6 10 OutPut Window F OUT Us eeeenlM 1 C Program Files NEC Electronics Too
219. e a project title Figure 6 83 Project Title Dialog Box Project Title Old Project Title 1 main New Project Title Cancel 2 main Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Edit Project Title with a project title selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Old Project Title The name of the project title currently selected in the Project window is displayed 2 New Project Title Specify the newly set project title directly in this area Up to 127 characters can be entered Function buttons Changes to the specified project title Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 257 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool Version Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to change the tools to be used by a project included in the selected project group at once Figure 6 84 Tool Version Settings Dialog Box Tool Version Settines Tool Set 850 Microcontrollers Software Package W400 English Version ete Tool Versions Tool Version The tool which i not installed with the CASSO wani tool specified by the selected tool set i is displayed in the grav LOG VIO a Meni Ws00 ahlt for wasg We00 M Select only Installed Tools eal Sehne fence
220. e and the link directive file name to be the copy destination If Browse button is clicked the Copy Link Directive File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be the copy source is displayed in Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an abso lute path or a relative path using the keyboard The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard d Do Not specify now When no link directive file is specified select this option button A link directive file can be specified by selecting a project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options after exiting the wizard 2 The Link Directive File Name to register Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard 3 Message ar
221. e character string vari able name When the initial value is omitted is assumed Example str initialized to str2 ABC initialized to ABC Operator Example cnt value value 5 cnt 12 idx cnt idx cnt idx idx 2 cnt Conditional expression lt gt lt gt I Example a lt b a is smaller than b a gt 10 a is larger than 10 a b I a is equal to b a lt 5 a is 5 or less a gt 8 a is 8 or more al b a is not equal to b while statement while conditional expression process Example routine to insert 1 ten times cnt 0 while cnt lt 10 insert 1 insert 1 insertreturn return cnt add cnt User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 383 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS break statement continue statement if statement Display message box Obtaining the character at the caret Checking the title line at the caret 384 Command Format break Example cnt 0 while 1 infinite loop insert 1 insert 1 insertreturn return if cnt 5 break finish after 5 loops ont add cnt continue Example cnt 0 while cnt lt 10 if cnt 0 insert 1 insertreturn else continue ont if conditional expression process elseif process else process Example c
222. e extension was wrong Please change the file extension Cause Action by User An unsupported extension was specified Change the extension and try again E1022 Message s This file cannot save settings because of read only attribute Please change read only attribute Cause Action by User An attempt was made to write a read only file s indicates the file name Clear the Read Only attribute with Explorer etc and set the file again The source and include files registered in the workspace file project file specified to be opened could not be found If this massage is displayed the same contents are also dis E1023 Message Some files cannot be found Please check the files exist Cause played in the OutPut window Action by User Check that all the source and include files registered in the workspace project exist E1024 Message s Project file cannot be found Make sure that the correct path and filename given Cause Action by User The specified project file could not be found s indicates the specified project file name Check that the specified project file exists E1025 Message s Cannot create the folder Cause The folder name was illegal or a folder without access rights was specified s indicates the specified folder name Action by User Specify the correct folder name or specify a folder with access rights E1026 Message Enter the folder name with absolute path Cause Action by U
223. e file Note that To the Specific Line in the Source file menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 9 Jumping to a marked line Selecting the Find menu gt Mark Jump opens Mark Jump dialog box to register the current caret position as a mark or to jump to a marked line 5 3 10 Moving the caret to the top of line Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top of Line moves the caret to the top of the line to which the caret is currently positioned 5 3 11 Moving the caret to the end of line Selecting the Find menu gt To the End of Line moves the caret to the end of the line to which the caret is currently positioned 5 3 12 Moving the caret to the top of file Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top of File moves the caret to the top of the top line the top layer line of a file When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top of the top line When this check box is not selected if range selection has been performed the range from the position where range selection started to the top line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start posi
224. e files using Project gt Project Settings later lt Back Cancel Help 1 Source File Name The names of the source files to be registered into the project are displayed in the source file list box The source files are registered to the project file in the order currently shown in this list box In addition the build processing are performed in the registered order Add Opens the Add Source Files dialog box to specify the source code files to be registered to the project Up to 2048 source files can be registered per project The extension of source code file differs depending on the microcontrollers name registered to the project Remove Removes the selected file from the source file list box By selecting a file name while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key multiple source file names can be selected at once The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Remove All Removes all the source files from the source file list box The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Moves the selected file up within the source file list box Moves the selected file down within the source file list box Cautions If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition
225. e global replacement s Cannot specify the wild card for the file without extension When setting Of Type during global replacement wildcards were specified instead of extensions s indicates the specified extension Execute without specifying wildcards The file extension is not PRW PRJ The specified workspace file has an extension other than prw Specify the file with a prw or prj extension and execute The workspace file name not specified Please enter it The workspace file name is not specified Specify a workspace file name and execute User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 357 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description E1402 Message The project file name not specified Please enter it Cause Action by User The project file name is not specified Specify a project file name and execute E1403 Message s The file already exists Please enter other file name Cause Action by User An existing file name was specified s indicates the specified file name Specify another file name and execute again E1404 Message s The file was not specified the device Do you wish to specify it You can specify it with Project Settings command after this time Cause Action by User No device is specified in the open project file s indicates the specified project file name Build cannot be executed in this status Specified a device here now or later using the Project Settings command
226. e name mak automatically Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons Function Returns to the previous wizard step Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Terminates this wizard for creating a new workspace and generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the displayed information Also generates a make file project file name mak automatically 159 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings wizard This wizard is used to update the project information for PM If an attempt is made to open a project file created by another NEC Electronics tool debugger or simulator This wizard displays the following dialog boxes Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed Project Settings Step 1 3 Project Information dialog box Project Settings Step 2 3 Select Tools dialog box Project Settings Step 3 3 Setup Source Files dialog box Figure 6 33 Project Settings Wizard at Startin
227. e names where applica ble and the contents of the lines before the replacement Table 6 6 shows the messages on the History of Replace in files window Table 6 6 Messages on the History of Replace in files Window The folder of xxx is invalid The specified folder is invalid The extension of xxx is invalid The System File of xxx is invalid The Hidden File of xxx is invalid The Read Only File of xxx is invalid The Binary File of xxx is invalid The extension of the specified file is invalid An attempt was made to replace in a system file An attempt was made to replace in a hidden file The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a read only attribute The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a binary file 220 File xxx was Replaced The replacement and saving were performed in the specified file Replaced xxx Found yyy xxx the number of the replacement yyy the number of the detection File xxx was closed The specified file was closed Found xxx xxx the number of the detected search character strings User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM The search string was not found into the using file xxx The processing of using file xxx was canceled Found xxx The using file xxx was replaced Replaced xxx Found yyy The using file xxx was searched Found xxx Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The using file xxx is skipped The specif
228. e of the 78K Microcontrollers and V850 Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the V850 Microcontrollers are listed on the drop down list If the tool set has been changed in the Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box opened by clicking the Detail Set ting button Changed is appended at the top of the tool set name If the tool set name already exists the indi cation appended varies from Changed01 to Changed99 After Changed99 the tool set name is displayed as UserSet Function Save Saves the tool set currently selected in Tool Set This button is not available appears dimmed if the tool set file is read only Delete Deletes the tool set name selected in Tool Set from the list also deletes the corresponding tool set file This button is not available appears dimmed if there are no tool set files corresponding to the selected tool set or the tool set file is read only Remark A file is saved as tool set name extension The extension varies depending on the product used as shown below 78KOR Microcontrollers including libraries tOr 78KO Microcontrollers including libraries tkO 78KOS Microcontrollers including libraries tOs V850 Microcontrollers including libraries t85 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 145 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The file is saved under NEC Electronics PM in the Application Data folder which is accessible by all users If this folder does
229. e order in which the lines are found Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 195 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Cautions If Grouping to Other is selected the new window is titled Grouping search key UntitledX Changed The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed when the next grouping is performed Collected lines cannot be deleted from a read only file If Change Color of Grouped Lines Only is selected the Grouping to The Top button can be selected If lines are collected from a read only file by selecting Grouping to Other Delete key cannot be selected in the new window of the collected results 196 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box This dialog box is used to automatically generate the prototype declaration of a function Figure 6 50 Select the way of Function Prototypes Dialog Box Select the way of Function Prototypes e Add Function Prototypes of index Source file at caret OK position to top of the Index Source file e Add Function Prototypes of each Idex Source files to Cancel the top of each Index Source filet Hal Help Add Function Prototypes to the top of file Make new windows of Function Prototypes f Make header file of Function Prototypes Header file Name
230. e selected file and displays the log contents of the file on the OutPut window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of Windows Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 65 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 8 CVS status Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Status executes the CVS status command for the selected file and displays the status of the file on the OutPut window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of Windows Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 9 CVS comparison Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Diff executes the CVS comparison command for the selected file and compares that file with the previous version The comparison result is displayed on the OutPut window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of Windows Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 10 Exporting a make file Selecting the Project menu gt Export Makefile creates a make file corresponding to the currently active project When a make file is created a
231. e too bar Explanation of each area 1 Character strings specification area a Find What This area specifies the character string to be replaced A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to the ten most recently specified character strings to be replaced are stored If there are over ten character strings the oldest one will be deleted The character strings to be replaced can be saved into an IDL file by checking Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab The setting of the character string to be replaced can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What check box on the same tab 204 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Replace With This area specifies a replacement character string The last specified replacement character string is displayed by default If no replacement has been made this area is left blank A replacement character string can be saved into an IDL file by checking Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab The setting of a replacement character string can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position t
232. ea The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 4 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 5 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 154 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box Specify the name of the source file to be registered into the project Figure 6 30 Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Dialog Box Add New Project Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Please setup Source Files Source File Name 1 Project Information 2 Select Tools test ic 3 Select Real Time O85 se 4 Startup File Remove All 5 Register Mode tH 6 Link Directive File Peal Setup Source Files Up o Select Debueeer g Confirmation B o Dom GH W850 Microcontrollers nly 4 62 You can aleo add source files by specifying the list file or the fol
233. ease customize it according as your target The specified Startup File te registered to the Project Related Files Back Cancel Help 1 Startup file specification area a Copy and Use the Sample file If this option button is selected the startup file of the sample that corresponds to the register mode set in the next wizard step is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files The name of the startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The startup file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in the The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If real time OS is selected for use in the previous wizard step New WorkSpace Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box this option button cannot be selected b Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is used select this option button If Browse button is clicked the Startup File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The startup file name to be registered can be changed by directly inputting the name in the The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If this option button is selected the File Name button can
234. ected the following caution is required If the range selection does not extend from following an instruction to the layer rule is not applied void SetStatus int State Coe the in the fifth line is not included in Te ceaceu OsOm m range selection the layer rule is not applied Mimo ake Sead e else if State 1 2 3 4 D3 6 7 8 9 m nState lelse m nState If the range selection does not cover the switch statement corresponding to a case or default statement the layer rule is not applied void SetStatus int switch State 1 2 3 4 gase Toxo Because the switch statement in the third line Se m nState is not included in the range selection the E break layer rule is not applied 7 case OFF 8 9 m nState default m nState If the range selection does not extend to the breakpoint of a case or default statement the layer rule is not applied void SetStatus int State switch State 1 2 3 4 case 0x50 The case statement in the fourth line is applied p m_nstate to the layer rule but the case statement in the 6 7 8 9 break seventh line is not applied to the layer rule case OFF Myitkot abe 10 default 11 m nState 12 228 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to lists the functions of the file displayed i
235. ected again the previous file name for the file not to be divided is displayed Note that when the Edit window is closed the name becomes invalid This check box is not selected in the default condition 3 Remove the Source File before renamed If this check box is selected the file with original name is deleted when the source file name is changed This check box is not selected in the default condition Function buttons Button Function Changes the IDL file name to the specified file name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Change File Names Opens the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box when a single source file name is selected Opens the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box when multiple file names are selected Select All Selects all files listed in Source File Names 180 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Selected Source File Name dialog box This dialog box is used to rename the source file selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Figure 6 43 Change Selected Source File Name Dialog Box Change Selected Source File Name VWO5O_testc Cancel Folder CAPMtest O SE Comment Mark C Double Slash fe Ae ok TC C Semicolon C Sharp C Original Mark Setting Mow File Name W850 test Title 1x Testid This section describes
236. ected with range selection to the end of the clipboard This menu item dose not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the copy portion to the end of the contents of the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed Note that Copy for Append menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 7 Copying character strings as a screen image Selecting the Edit menu gt Image Copy sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clip board exactly as they are displayed on the screen as a screen image When the contents of the lines are sent to the clipboard no layer information is sent Each time the layer is demoted by one a space or Tab code is written The code to write can be specified with Image Copy on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Furthermore the number of the indent characters can be specified with Indent Characters on the same Edit tab If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines that have been col lapsed will not be sent to the clipboard Note that objects cannot be copied User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 43 CHAPTER 5 METHO
237. ection Refer to Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Specify the tool to be used in this dialog box Figure 6 25 Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools Dialog Box Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools Tool Set 1 Project Information Selected YASO Microcontrollers Software Package V4 00 Enelish Wer gt Select Tools Save Tool Wersions 4 Startup File GH Version 5 Register Mode t Va 6 Link Directive FileG v1 01 Ya gg q Setup Source Files Sht for W850 We 00 o Select Debugger J Confirmation GH WOO Microcontrollers Only 4 62 Ww Select only Installed Tools _ Detail Setting Please select the Tools from MEG Electronics to be used The following tools have been excluded from selection because they are not installed o Tka50 IDB50 IDSS0N vy Twasg Back Cancel Help 1 Tool Set The combination of tools to be used and their versions is regarded as a tool set and the tool set name can be selected from the drop down list The existing tool set and recommended tool set 78Kx Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the cas
238. ed msvctr dll V6 1 or more It is provided when PM is installed ComCtl32 dll V5 81 or more It is necessary to install in addition to PM Related development tools 78K Microcontrollers Compiler Assembler Compiler CC78KOR Ver 1 00 or later CC78KO0 Ver 4 00 later CC78KOS Ver 2 00 later Assembler RA 78KOR Ver 1 00 or later RA78KO Ver 4 00 later RA78KOS Ver 2 00 later Integrated debugger System simulator Integrated debugger ID 8KOR QB Ver 3 20 or later System simulator SM for 78KOR Ver 2 20 or later Device File A device file of target device to be used Device Driver Configurator for 78K Microcontrollers if necessary Applilet 2 Under development V850 Microcontrollers Compiler CA850 Ver 3 00 or later Integrated debugger System simulator Integrated debugger D850 Ver 3 10 or later ID850NW Ver 3 10 or later or ID850QB Ver 3 10 or later System simulator SM850 Ver 3 00 or later or SM for V850 Ver 2 00 or later Device File A device file of target device to be used Performance analysis tuning tool if necessary TW 850 Ver 2 00 or later Link Directive Generator if necessary LDG Ver 1 01 or later eXaminer for system Operation if necessary X0850 Ver 3 20 or later User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 6 Files Created Managed by PM The files created and managed by PM are as follows 26 Refer to the user s
239. ed by the active project and their versions are displayed by default Tool All the installed tools and tools included in the selected tool set including tools that have not been installed are displayed in this area However tools that have not been installed are dimmed Version The tool versions specified in the selected tool set are displayed in this area However tools that have not been installed are dimmed and Unused is displayed for a tool whose version is not specified in the tool set Select only Installed Tools If this check box is selected tools that have not been installed are excluded from the Tool Versions which corresponds to the tool set selected in the Tool Set Selected01 is appended to the top of the name of the tool set with which this check box is selected if the tool set name actually exists Selected nn is appended This check box cannot be selected grayed if there are no dimmed tools all the listed tools have been installed This check box is not selected in the default condition c Brief description area A message is displayed when a dimmed item is displayed in the Tool Versions area Function buttons Sets the project information on the currently active project Closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions To transfer a project group select a project title in the Project window delete the registered project by clicking the right mouse button and
240. ed range with the left end The number of space characters for the indent is specified with Indent Characters on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Layer tab b Print Layer Marks Prints specified layer marks as well c Print Collapse Layers Prints currently collapsed layers as well d Insert New Page Code at every ist Layers Prints the contents Inserting a new page code for each first layer e Print Until x Layer 1 127 Prints the contents for up to the specified layer 4 Line Number a Print Line Numbers Prints line numbers at the left end b Renumber Line Numbers in every 1st Layer Renumbers lines from 1 for each layer 1 line 5 Font The currently set font type and font size are displayed Clicking the Change Font button opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be speci fied 6 Other a Enable multiple lines print Enables multi line printing b Print Header Footer Prints the headers or footers c Header Footer button Opens the Set Header Footer dialog box in which the contents of the header and footer can be specified When the Print Header Footer check box is not selected this button becomes invalid User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 187 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 188 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENC
241. efault Function buttons Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 2 7 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to select the project for batch build or rebuild and set the build sequence The settings in this dialog box are saved in a workspace file when the workspace is saved Figure 6 95 Edit Batch Build Settings Dialog Box Edit Batch Build Settings Build Project and Build Order iw main Button Sys Debue Juild main ButtonSvs Release Build Library ButtonSys Debue Build Library ButtonSys Release Build ServoSys ServoSys Debue Build ServoSve ServoSys Release Build jServoLibrary ServoSvs Debue Build ServoLibrary ServoSyse Release Build This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Build menu gt Batch Build Settings Explanation of each area 1 Build Project and Build Order This area displays the names of the projects registered in the open workspace with their build modes Select the check box of the build mode of the project for which build is to be performed The build mode of the currently active project is selected by default Build is executed in order from the top of the list To change the order select the project and use the Up or Down button Multiple projects
242. el Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 156 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 8 9 Select Debugger dialog box Select the debugger which debug the project to be created newly The specification of the item marked with in this dialog box can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected The debugger specified with this dialog box can be changed after exiting this wizard 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 6 31 Add New Project Step 8 9 Select Debugger Dialog Box Add New Project Step 879 Select Debugger Please select the Debueeer 1 Project Information Debugger 2 Select Tools 1 of Veo Wedu system simulator ee 9 Select Real Time OS 4 Startup Filet File name 5 Register Mode GH 2 CA Program Files NEG Electronics Toole SM for V8S0 V2 00 bini S ME amp Link Directive Filet T Setup Source Files Option ooo Select Debugger 3 pees 0 Confirmation GH VO50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 You can change the selected Debugger usine Tool gt Select Debugger Back Cancel Help Debugger Select the debugger to be used from the drop down list All the NEC Electronics debuggers that have been installed are displayed in the drop down list
243. end of file if you select Ys Cause Searching finished at the first line s indicates the key assigned to Up Action by User Yes Searches from the last line No Stops searching Q2202 Message PM has finished searching this IDL source file Do you wish to continue it from the top of IDL source file Continue it from the top of IDL source file if you select s Cause No character string could be discovered during the character string search in the source file s indicates the key assigned to Down Action by User Yes Continues searching from the start of the source file No Stops searching Q2203 Message PM has finished searching this IDL source file Do you wish to continue it from the end of IDL source file Continue it from the end of IDL source file if you select s Cause No character string could be discovered during the character string search in the source file s indicates the key assigned to Up Action by User Yes Continues searching from the start of the source file No Stops searching Message Do you wish to replace all the files Cause Replacement of all the files was selected in global replacement Yes Replaces all the files Q2204 Action by User No Returns to the active Edit window without doing anything Q2205 Message The search string was found in the IDL source file s Do you wish to replace in it Cause During global replacement the character
244. enesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office e
245. ens When starting PM using parameters Input the command line as shown below Format pmplus exe A filename A Ln A filename2 A Ln A filename3 A Ln A space t A i A t A File names opened at startup Line numbers in which the caret is placed n line number Caution If a workspace file prw or project file prj is specified for the file name specification of the line number will be ignored Example pmplus exe A F SRC CALLTREEVIEW CPP A L12 gt F SRC CALLTREEVIEW CPP is loaded to the Edit window and the caret is placed on the 12th line pmplus exe A F PRJ CALLTREE PRW A L12 A F SRC CALLTREEVIEW CPP A L12 gt FA PRJ CALLTREE PRW opens and L12 is ignored F ASRC CALLTREEVIEW CPP is loaded to the Edit window and the caret is placed on the 12th line Caution Multiple instances of PM cannot be started at the same time If an attempt is made to start a new PM while PM is already running the currently running PM will be displayed on the forefront User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING The Main window will be displayed after PM is started Figure 3 1 Main Window at Starting When Starting PM from Windows Start Menu re PM No Workspace ProjectWindow Seles File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help S cr ed Sela amp amp we AT gt 4 ProjectWindow DOS OutPut aaa Files Memo a
246. ent Tab Characters Set Color c 73 gt o Ta g Error Line f i SetColor Title Warning Line ml met Color d gt C Show Filename f Show Filename and Full Path e ie Fut Caret at The Top Line as opened idl File W Appear Flat Toolbar h P Memorize number of Tab Characters each Window a Show Under Line with Caret Line If this check box is selected an underline is displayed at the caret line on the Edit window CR and EOF If this check box is selected a blue is displayed for a linefeed code CR and EOF is displayed for a ter minating code EOF default Tab Characters If this check box is selected a Tab code is displayed in a gray b Window Horizontal Scroll Bar If this check box is selected a horizontal scroll bar is displayed at the bottom of each Edit window default Vertical Scroll Bar If this check box is selected a vertical scroll bar is displayed at the right side of each Edit window default c Indent Tab Characters This area sets the number of characters for a Tab indent 2 4 or 8 characters can be set d Title This area is used to select the method to display the title bar on the Edit window Show Filename Only file names are displayed on the title bar in the Edit window Show Filename and Full Path The title bar on the Edit window is displayed with the full path default e Put Caret at The Top Line as opened idl File If this check box is selected the
247. erations are achieved by dropping a file in the Project window The operation differs depending on whether or not the workspace is open When not opening a workspace When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut win dow is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped When opening an empty workspace file When dropping a workspace file prw extension Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Creates a project group newly and add a project file The newly created project group name is the device microcontrollers name used in the added project file When multiple project files are dropped if the dropped project file uses the same device it is registered to the s
248. es corresponding to the selected tool set or the tool set file is read only Remark A file is saved as tool set name extension The extension varies depending on the product used as shown below 78KOR Microcontrollers including libraries tOr 78KO Microcontrollers including libraries tkO 78KOS Microcontrollers including libraries tOs V850 Microcontrollers including libraries t85 The file is saved under NEC Electronics PM in the Application Data folder which is accessible by all users If this folder does not exist it is automatically created when PM is started up for example C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data NEC Electronics PM in the case of Windows XP 2 Tool Versions Combinations of the tools in the tool set specified in the Tool Set area and their versions are listed When a tool set name is selected on the Tool Set drop down list the tools included in the tool set and their versions are displayed The tools included in the default tool set selected on the Tool Set drop down list and their versions are displayed by default The Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box is opened by clicking the Detail Setting button Tools to be used and their versions can be selected in this dialog box a Tool All the installed tools and tools included in the selected tool set including tools that have not been installed are displayed in this area However tools that have not been instal
249. es have F prefixed to the message number Table 7 2 Fatal Error Message List Description F0001 Message Memory is not enough Please terminate other applications Cause Action by User Close other applications to free up memory Memory could not be secured Action by User Since the OS is likely to be unstable restart the machine FOO0O3 Message Failed to executing the command Cause The DOS command could not be executed Action by User Check whether the command can be executed correctly at the DOS prompt and set so that the command can operate If this message is displayed prior to build execution create the make file again using Export Makefile from the Project menu and execute build FO101 Message Cause Action by User FO102 Message Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file Make sure the IDL file memorized this source file by IDL file Cause A source file generated by an IDL file could not be changed or created when being stored Action by User The IDL file is likely to be damaged Check if the file is damaged or not FO103 Message Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file Make sure that the correct path and filename given or disk space Cause The specified path is invalid the file name is illegal or the specified disk is full Action by User Check the path and specify a valid one If illegal characters have been used for the file nam
250. es this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 319 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Customize dialog box This dialog box is used to set the following options The option settings are performed on the following tabs 1 Keyboard tab 2 Menu tab 3 Toolbar tab 4 User Menu tab 5 Keyword tab Figure 6 126 Customize Dialog Box i Delete New Workspace Reset Open Workspace l Save Workspace Fress new shortcut key Close Workspace _ _ _ _ is oeei Hee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Customize Select the Customize from the right mouse click menu on the toolbar in the Main window 320 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each tab 1 Keyboard tab This tab sets the options for the keyboard a b Figure 6 127 Customize Dialog Box Keyboard Tab keyboard Menu Key a File Delete Oper Insert file Close New Workspace WW Reset eel Press new shortcut key m Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to assign keys from the drop down list Menu List This area lists the menu items included in the menu selected from Menu Select a menu item to which a short
251. est line number of the file is specified a jump is made to the last line 3 Display with Path If this check box is selected displays the file name with the path This check box is not selected in the default con dition Function buttons Makes a jump to the specified line Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 210 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Mark Jump dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the current caret position as a mark or to make a jump to a marked line Figure 6 57 Mark Jump Dialog Box Mark Jump 1 Mark Name Func Oh 2 Mark List Remove Close Help FileName CAFM CAPM test other products WEGD_testc teste Line F uricel i This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Find menu gt Mark Jump Explanation of each area 1 MarkName Sets the mark names The contents of that line at the caret position are displayed by default The mark name can be set by the user freely and up to 5 119 characters can be set Moreover uppercase charac ters and lowercase characters are distinguished for the mark name Clicking the Add button register a mark Up to 20 marks can be registered Note that the same name cannot be set more than once 2 MarkList Selects the marks If a mark
252. et a menu character string that had already been set Change the menu name to one that has not been set and set again Wrong the tag jump format It needs F and L There is an error in the tag jump format in the external editor setting F and L need to be specified in the tag jump format User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 363 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description 364 E1710 Message Cannot exit PM while TW analyzing Cause Action by User An attempt was made to close PM while TW850 was executing analysis Close PM after TW850 has finished E1711 An incorrect file name was specified This includes the specification of a reserved device E1712 Cause such as con and com1 s indicates the specified file name Action by User Specify a correct file name Message s The file was not the latest object file Please execute build command and update the object file Cause When executing dump850 the v file which is a target analysis file is older than the source E1714 file Action by User Execute build update the object and try the command again Message Failed to start up the Link Directive Generator Make sure that it was installed correctly Cause The Open with Link Directive Generator filename menu was selected with the right mouse button on the Project window but LDG could not be started up Action by User This is displayed when tool DLL for LDG is not installed Install the
253. executing Delete Project and then transfer the project to the new location by executing Insert Project from the Project menu 250 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Source Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add source files to a project Figure 6 79 Add Source Files Dialog Box Add Source Files main Look ir B Phl_test ei E Files test testZ c Macro iC test3 c yother_products r crth2s E crths e test1 C File name e Files of type Source Files c c2s s1 0 l O Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Add Source Files Select the Project menu gt Project Settings Source File tab Click the Add button on the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Source Files in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the source files to be inserted from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the source file to be inserted Up to 256 characters can be specified The source file exten sion depends on the microcontrollers name registered in the project If a list file in which source file names are described is specified for the file name Ist csv
254. f the 78K Microcontrollers and V850 Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the V850 Microcontrollers are listed on the drop down list If the tool set has been changed in the Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box opened by clicking the Detail Set ting button Changed is appended at the top of the tool set name If the tool set name already exists the indi cation appended varies from Changed01 to Changed99 After Changed99 the tool set name is displayed as UserSet Function Save Saves the tool set currently selected in Tool Set This button is not available appears dimmed if the tool set file is read only Delete Deletes the tool set name selected in Tool Set from the list also deletes the corresponding tool set file This button is not available appears dimmed if there are no tool set files corresponding to the selected tool set or the tool set file is read only Remark A file is saved as tool set name extension The extension varies depending on the product used as shown below 78KOR Microcontrollers including libraries tOr 78KO Microcontrollers including libraries tkO 78KOS Microcontrollers including libraries tOs V850 Microcontrollers including libraries t85 126 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The file is saved under NEC Electronics PM in the Application Data folder which is accessible by all users If this folder does no
255. float for goto if int long register return short signed sizeof static struct switch type def union unsigned void volatile while Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Does not enable the specified items and closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 329 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save the Key Operation dialog box This dialog box is used to save the recorded key operation in a file Figure 6 134 Save the Key Operation Dialog Box Save the Key Operation C PM test Macro Save in B Macro ey E E init ime Save as type Macro File imc Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Save the Key Operations Explanation of each area 1 Save in This area displays the folder in which the file is to be saved The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 2 File name and Save as type Specify the name of the file to be saved Only a file
256. g Project Settines Step 1 3 Project Information Project File Name RO B60 pr Folder CAPM testother_products eample Workspace File Name GAPM test other products sample RD S50 prw Project Group RD a50 Project Title Microcontrollers Mame Device Name VB850 BF 1S uPDvO31 OF hai Device Install Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each dialog box Opening Select the File menu gt Open Workspace Explanation of each dialog box The following explains each dialog box displayed in this wizard 160 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings Step 1 3 Project Information dialog box Confirms the project information and modify the project title and the device microcontrollers name of the target device to be used Figure 6 34 Project Settings Step 1 3 Project Information Dialog Box Project Settines Step 1 3 Project Information Project File Name F O _S50 prj Folder CAPM testother products sample Workspace File Name GAPM testXother products sample RO S50 prw Froject Group RD 850 Project Title Microcontrollers Mame Device Name VE50 Series T uP D703 07 hai Device Install Cancel Help 1 Information display area a Project File Name The name of the project file is displayed b Folder The project folder specified in the project file is
257. g box This dialog box is used to add any files to a project as other files Project Group Name dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project group name Project Title dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project title Tool Version Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to change the tools to be used by a project included in the selected project group at once Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to select the tools to be used and their versions Properties dialog box This dialog box is used to displays the path information and read attribute of the selected file Add New Memo dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new memo Startup File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file when an exist ing file is used as a startup file Copy Startup File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Startup File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to register Link Directive File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Copy Link Directive File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a link directive file Link Directive File to registe
258. g operations are achieved by dropping a file in the main frame When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut win dow is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped 100 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project window The Project window is used to display various information on the projects currently opened Figure 6 4 Project Window fs ButtonSys 2 Project s a main Source Files testle main Func Func Funcs teste testa c crths 9 Include Files E Test2h testle test2 c testa c es Test h Project Related
259. g options for each tool 72 Selecting the real time OS to be used 72 2 3 4 5 Registering external tools 73 6 Starting up external tools 73 7 Comparing files 73 8 Inserting device file 73 9 Setting environment 73 10 Setting font 74 11 Customizing settings 74 12 Recording key operations 74 13 Playing back key operations 74 14 Saving key operations 74 15 Commands corresponding to key operations 16 Reading key operations 75 17 Executing macro 75 ON I er eh GOT lt r GON ONY Str 2OF oe ON a 095 00n 709 100 Por 00 gt T00 OO 09 pO 09 00 GO 09 e 0 09 18 Registering macro 75 5 8 19 Executing registered macro 75 5 9 Window Management 76 5 9 1 Arranging windows so they overlap 76 5 9 2 Arranging windows horizontally 76 5 9 3 Arranging windows vertically 76 5 9 4 Splitting a window 76 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Dumping the load module file or the object file Selecting and setting the debugger to be used 7 17 Making the build mode selection combo box active 72 73 74 71 13 5 9 5 Moving the caret to the other split window 76 5 9 6 Activating the next window 77 5 9 7 Activating the previous window 77 5 9 8 Displaying a list of windows 77 Help Functions 78 5 10 1 Starting up the PM help 78 5 10 2 Displaying the help of the Main window 78 5 10 3 Display
260. g the File gt Close Workspace closes all the currently opened windows At this time you can select whether all the Edit window are to be closed After the all windows are closed No Workspace will appear on the File tag in the Project window 5 1 10 Saving a file by overwriting Selecting the File menu gt Save saves an IDL file or and a source file are saved into the each current file by overwrit ing All the current file information including such as the layer information and the location of the caret in the Edit window is saved into the IDL file By specifying the Layer Indent area Tool menu gt PM Settings Source File by idl file tab the indent by layer can be replaced with the Tab code or a single byte space If the following files are active the Save As dialog box is displayed to specify the name of the file Anewly created Edit window A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window A Search result display window A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window An IDL backup file opened by selecting the Open menu or the history of the file A default file name is backup file name idl An Edit window in which multiple files were read A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window A file saved automatically A default file name is created based on the
261. g50Wu2 Option Debue Target Debug Target File CAP M teztaout Execute Symbol Reset after Download Iw Execute GPU Reset after Download Debug Options Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Debue Target File List IDG NPM _test a out cancel He 34 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 6 Executing Build selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug starts batch processing from build to debug for the active project If build ends correctly the set debugger starts up automatically and loads the created load module file if the debugger does not have to be started up execute build by selecting the Build menu gt Build At this time a make file mak is also created automatically in default condition The messages that are output from the language processing tool during build execution are displayed on the OutPut window At this time place the caret on the error warning line that is displayed and double click the left mouse button to open the source file and tag jump to the relevant error warning line Refer to 5 7 1 Building and debugging 4 7 Other Settings There are many other functions is provided to enable more efficient and smooth execution of the debug operation flow using the PM platform Setting the layer rule Refer to 5 4 17 Applying a layer rule Registration of external tools and customization of menu toolbars Refer to 5
262. gister Ex tool 73 94 Register mode 132 151 Register the Macro Files 75 94 Regular expression 201 205 394 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM INDEX Release Build 280 281 Replace 48 89 Replace in Files 52 90 Replace in Files dialog box 217 Replace String dialog box 204 Restore Color of Grouping Lines 46 89 S Sample link directive file 373 Save 38 87 Save All 39 88 Save All Source Files 39 88 Save and Close All 39 88 Save As 38 87 Save As dialog box 175 Save Source Files Options dialog box 177 Save the Function List dialog box 232 Save the Key Operation dialog box 330 Save the Key Operations 74 94 Save Workspace 38 87 Search Functions 47 Search result display window 118 Drag and drop function 119 Explanation of each area 118 Opening 118 Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button 118 65 92 Select Active Project dialog box 235 Select All 46 89 Select Build Mode 70 93 Select External Tool dialog box 295 Select Project dialog box 277 Select RTOS dialog box 288 Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box 197 Select Active Project Select to the End of Line 46 89 Select to the End of Word 45 89 Select to the Top of Line 45 89 Select to the Top of Word 45 89 Select to the Word 45 89 Set Comment Mark dialog box 185 Set Header Footer dialog box
263. gt Open Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below 2 File name and Files of type a File name Specify the name of the file to be opened The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 167 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Files of type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are displayed in the default con dition When opening a workspace file Source Files Caution The source file extension corresponding to the currently active project is displayed Include Files h inc idl Files idl Text Files txt All Files When not opening a workspace file Source Files c cpp asm s Include Files h inc idl Files idl Text Files txt All Files If a file whose extension is bkl is selected it is identified as a backup file File types user specified extension etc can be added with the Tool menu gt Customize 3 Open as read only The specified file is opened as a read only attribute This check box is not selected in the default condition 4 Apply Layer Rule The specified file is read applying a specified layer rule This check box is not selected in the default co
264. h result display win dows and the OutPut windows Loads a existing file and opens the Edit window The name of the file loaded is displayed on the title of the Edit window Opens the Open dialog box Insert file Inserts a specified file at the caret position in the currently active Edit window Opens the Insert File dialog box Close Closes the currently active Edit window or Search result display window If there are any files with read only having the same name those files will be closed New Workspace Opens the wizard to create a workspace newly Open Workspace Opens a Workspace Opens the Open Workspace dialog box Refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace Save Workspace Saves the contents of the workspace by overwriting Close Workspace Closes the currently open workspace Save Overwrites the file currently being edited Refer to 5 1 10 Saving a file by overwriting Save AS Saves the file currently being edited to the file whose name is specified Opens the Save As dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 87 88 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save All Overwrites all the files that are currently open in the Edit windows The contents of the Edit windows including those that have not been modified are saved However the contents of the Edit windows OutPut windows and Search result display windows which have the read only attribute are not saved Note Save All Changed files Only Overwrites
265. hange Source File Name button Explanation of each area 1 Source File Names a Source File After selecting a source file name inline editing can be performed by clicking the left mouse button Up to 259 characters can be specified Moreover after selecting a source file name double clicking it or clicking the Change File Names button opens the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box At this time if multiple source file names are selected the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box is opened If the name of the source file has not been set the contents of the first layer line which corresponds to the first line of the source file will be the source file name If there are any other source files with the same name that name suffixed by a 4 digt number is displayed as the source file name If the first layer line contains no characters a 4 digt number extension will be the source file name The exten sion will be c if there are any C language comments between the first and 300th lines or asm if there are no comments User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 179 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Title The contents of the first layer line which corresponds to the first line of the source file are extracted and dis played 2 Not Divide the Source File If this check box is selected the source file is not divided The entire file is saved as a single source file If the check box is cleared then sel
266. hanges the setting and returns to the Project window No Returns to the Project window without changing the setting Message s This project file was generated by a previous version of Project Manager PM converts to the new format Cause An attempt was made to open a project file created in PM V3 xx s indicates the specified project file name Q2401 Action by User OK Changes to a new format Cancel Cancels the operation to open the project file Message s The project file already exists Do you wish to rename old file to s bak and replace it Cause The project file name that was specified in the Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Informa tion dialog box is the same as an existing file name s indicates the specified file name Q2402 Action by User Yes Overwrites the project file and save the existing file with the extension bak No Returns to the window without doing anything User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Number Q2403 Message Cause Action by User Action by User B Action by User B Action by User _ Action by User Action by User Action by User Action by User CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description s The file was not found Do you wish to create it The specified file does not exist s indicates the specified file name Yes Creates a vacant file with the specified file name and continue adding a source file No Makes the specified file name invali
267. he Shift F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button 2 Ctrl F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing the Ctrl F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button 3 Shift Ctrl F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing the Shift Ctrl F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button b Make Backup File in Specified Folder This area specifies the folder in which the backup file is created for the file being edited If there is no specifica tion the backup file is created in the same folder as the file being edited Specify the folder by checking the box and entering the folder The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button c Open Save in Specified Folder This area specifies the folder to be displayed first when a file is manipulated If there is no specification the cur rent folder is displayed Specify the folder by checking the box and entering the folder The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button d Folder for Macro File Specify the folder in which macro files are saved If there is no specification the macro files are saved in the same folder as PM The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button User s Manual U18416EJ1VO
268. he 1st layers hasn t lower layer Not Divide the Source File was not selected when saving a source file or changing a source file name but the file could not be divided because there was a first layer without the lower Cause layers Action by User Attach lower layers to the first layer line E1008 Message A file name cannot contain any of the characters lt gt Cause An attempt was made to create a file with a file name that includes prohibited characters Action by User Set the file name using characters other than the displayed prohibited ones E1009 Message This filename already exists Please enter other filename Cause When changing the source file name an attempt was made to change the file name to an existing source file name Action by User Set a different file name and try again 354 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description E1010 Message The filename was not set Cause Action by User Set the file name and try again Message s was not found Cause s used to specify a character string when setting the user comment mark of the source file name was not entered Message Cannot include s many times Message IDL Control Error Please set the Control Mark to same comment mark of the source file by Change Source File Names Cause When tag jumping from the OutPut window to the first error line in the source file the com ment symbols associated with
269. he CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 245 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the information on the current active project The information is set on the following tabs 1 Project Information tab 2 Source File tab 3 Tool Version Settings tab Figure 6 75 Project Settings Dialog Box 1 2 3 Project Settines Projeyt Information ource File Too Version Settings Project File Name Buttonsys pr Folder CAFM test Workspace File Name O PM_test sample pryy Project Group Buttonsys Project Title ButtonSys peries Hame Device Name V850 Series 13003 Device Install caret Hee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Project menu gt Project Settings Select the right mouse button menu gt Project Settings with a project name selected in the Project window 246 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each tab 1 Project Information tab This tab displays the information on the current active project and changes the project title or the device name Figure 6 76 Project Settings Dialog Box Project Information Tab Project Information Project File Name Buttonsys pr Folder CAFM test Workspace File
270. he Function Definition To the Matching Brace Jump from Function List of the View menu Jump from Layer List of the View menu Some Layer Line Up Some Layer Line Down if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that Back Jump menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 19 Moving the caret to the function definition line Selecting the Find menu gt To the Function Definition moves the caret to the definition line of the function name that is at the current caret position or is selected with range selection Specification except for a function cannot be per formed If a project is opened it searches for the definition line in all the files registered with the project If a project is not opened it searches for the definition line within all the files open in the active Edit window 5 3 20 Searching for matching braces Selecting the Find menu gt To the Matching Brace searches for the matching brace that at the caret position and moves the caret to that brace in the Edit window PM can search for the following three types of braces and If no matching brace can
271. he dialog box During a file search or replacement this button displays Cancel Stops the search or replacement When the search stops this button displays Close Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions If Find Next or Replace is selected the file in which a match for the search key is found is displayed in the Edit window and a range selection is assigned to the corresponding character string By selecting a button in this state the replacement is skipped continued or stopped If a character string is replaced in a file a backup file is created in the same folder The extension of the backup file is aS specified in Extension of Backup File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings File tab The backup file is always created regardless of whether In a search through a file being edited Make a Backup File is selected or not a message confirming the replacement is displayed If the Yes button is selected the replacement is performed for the file being edited Meanwhile the file is not saved If the contents of an IDL file are replaced and saved the corresponding source file is saved with the same contents Aread only source file line is not replaced The read only source file is skipped and the next source file is searched User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The following files are not searched Read only system and hidden files Binary fi
272. he file s to the project because of the wrong extension The extension specified a file name that was not applicable to a source file s indicates the specified file name Change the extension and try again Cannot add the file s to the project because of the wrong extension Do you wish to con tinue to add source files The extension specified a file name that was not applicable to a source file s indicates the specified file name s The project which already supports other devices is registered into this project group Please change the device of a project or change the project group of a registration place An attempt was made to add a project supporting a device that was different from the one supported by the registered project to the project group s indicates the project file name Open another project and acquire a device of the same type or register the project in another project group s A project cannot be registered into this project group any more Please register with other project groups An attempt was made to register more than the maximum number of projects 20 in a project group s indicates the project file name Delete the projects in the project group and register them again or register them in another project group s This file has already specified as the startup file An attempt was made to add a file specified at startup as a linker option s indicates the name of the fi
273. he history contains the names of search files numbers of the lines for which the replacement was performed and the information of the lines before the replace ment While a file is being searched replaced the name of the file currently being searched is displayed in the lower part of the dialog box Figure 6 61 Replace in Files Dialog Box Replace in Files Find What main Eind Mest Replace With jsub Y Replace Ot Type k c bi i dregs ee Folder CAPM test my place 4 M Look in Subfolders W Match Gaze Glose Match Whole Word Only Regular Expression Help Display Message every source File In the case of IDL file m This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Search replacement result Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Find menu gt Replace in Files Explanation of each area 1 Character strings specification area a Find What This area specifies the character string to be replaced A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab User s
274. he name of the project group to be displayed on the Project window Up to 127 characters can be speci fied If the specification of this area is omitted the name of the project group displayed on the Project window is the same as the name of the workspace file In addition the project title of the project newly created by this wizard is assigned the name of the project group specified with this area If you wish to change a project title select the Edit Project Title menu by clicking the mouse right button on the target project title in the Project window User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 4 5 6 7 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Microcontrollers Name and Device Name Select the item to be created and the device file to be used from the drop down list Clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons This button is always disabled Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New
275. he tag jump was performed cannot be found a jump is performed to the top line of the window from which the tag jump was per formed 5 3 26 Continuing a tag jump downward Once a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt Next Tag Jump continues the search for the line in tag jump format in the window from which the tag jump has been performed in the downward direction and performs a tag jump to the next occurrence On the display it is not possible to return to the window from which a tag jump is per formed 5 3 27 Continuing a tag jump upward Once a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt Next Tag Jump Upward continues the search for the line in a tag jump format in the window from which the tag jump has been performed in the upward direction and per forms a tag jump to the next occurrence On the display it is not possible to return to the window from which a tag jump is performed Note that Next Tag Jump Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 54 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 28 Moving the caret one word to the right Selecting the Find menu gt One Word Right moves the caret one word to the right If the caret is positioned to the right end of a line the caret dose not move The definitions of words are as foll
276. hen a debugger is selected from this list the file name of the debugger is displayed in the File Name text box and the selected debugger will start up automatically when a debug operation is executed If you wish to change the debugger to be used after exiting the wizard select the Tool menu gt Debugger Set ting File name The file name of the debugger to be used for debugging is displayed When the debugger is selected by the Debugger drop down list that file name is displayed with the path automatically This text box cannot be edited Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger If this specification is omitted no option is specified for starting up the debugger Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Opens the last step dialog box Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 139
277. highlight arbitrary character strings The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set The keywords set in this dialog box can be saved as a keyword file A keyword file is a text file and can be edited easily with an arbitrary editor Figure 6 132 Edit User keyword Dialog Box Edit User keyword Keywords keyword File Tnitialize i Open lt etPo Pace 1 72 gt Pts Save ees ee ee a es ee a C es as es A as a es ee Cancel ne es ee S Hel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the User Keywords button on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab 326 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Keywords Specify keywords directly Up to 64 keywords with 32 or fewer one byte characters can be set If the keyword file kwd is read by clicking the Open button the name of the file read is displayed following after Keyword File Function Displays the previous page Displays the next page Function buttons Initialize Deletes all the set keywords If there were any keyword file being read that file name is cleared from Keyword File area Open Opens the Open Keyword File dialog box and reads the keyword file kwd At this time the previous keyword is deleted If there are over 65 keywords in the set
278. his dialog box 5 8 5 Registering external tools Selecting the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool opens the Register External Tool dialog box in which the external tools to be used can be registered Up to 10 external tools can be registered The icons of the tools set as external tools are displayed as buttons on the external toolbar 5 8 6 Starting up external tools The Tool menu includes items for starting up the external tools registered with the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool The arguments at startup and the current folder are based on those set in the Register External Tool dialog box 5 8 7 Comparing files Selecting the Tool menu gt File Compare opens the File Compare dialog box in which the contents of the selected Edit window can be compared 5 8 8 Inserting device file Selecting the Tool menu gt Device File Installer starts up the device file installer DFINST If there is no corresponding device file download the applicable file from the following web site http www necel com micro ods eng index html This download site can also be accessed by selecting the Help menu gt NEC Electronics Microcontrollers Web 5 8 9 Setting environment Selecting the Tool menu gt PM Settings opens PM Settings dialog box in which the environment of PM can be set The following environment settings are available Options related to workspace External editors File re
279. hown below Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Step 1 9 Workspace Information heck to Create Blank Workspace option ues No Step 2 9 Select Tools Create a library project Yes No No s a real time OS specified as the tool used Yes Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS No reate a project for V850 Microcontrollers Step 4 9 Startup File Check to Use the Sample file option Step 5 9 Register Mode Step 6 9 Link Directive File Step 7 9 Setup Source Files Step 8 9 Select Debugger Yes Create a library project Step 8 9 Select Debugger Step 9 9 Confirmation Explanation of each dialog box The following explains each dialog box displayed in this wizard User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 123 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box Specify a workspace file name a folder position a project group name and the device microcontrollers name of the tar get device to be used The specification of the item marked with in this dialog box can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected 1 2 3 124 Figure 6 13 New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information Workspace File Name sample 22 liorkspace Information Create Blank Work select Tools eee eal Select Real Time OS startup File Ge Register Mode
280. ialog This dialog box is used to automatically generate the prototype box declaration of a function Find String dialog box This dialog box is used to find a character string Replace String dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destina tion line number in the current file Jump to Specified Line dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destina tion line number in a specified source file Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box Mark Jump dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the current caret position as a mark or to make a jump to a marked line Find in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to search through multiple files in a specified folder for a character string Expand to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to expand specified layers Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to collapse specified layers This dialog box is used to apply a layer rule to the current con tents of the Edit window or set the layer rule to be applied when files are read Replace in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string in multiple files in a specified folder Set Layer Rule dialog box This dialog box is used to lists the functions of the file dis played in the active Edit window Save the Function List dialog
281. ialog box 282 Add Command dialog box 286 Edit Command dialog box 287 Select RTOS dialog box 288 dump850 dialog box 289 Debugger Settings dialog box 291 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 15 Register External Tool dialog box 293 Select External Tool dialog box 295 File Compare dialog box 297 PM Settings dialog box 299 User Setting dialog box 316 Font dialog box 318 Customize dialog box 320 Edit User keyword dialog box 326 Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box 328 Save the Key Operation dialog box 330 Load the Macro File dialog box 332 Play back the Macro File dialog box 334 Entry Macro Files dialog box 336 Add the Macro file dialog box 338 Change the Macro file dialog box 340 Window List dialog box 342 Shortcut List dialog box 343 About PM dialog box 344 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 346 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 1 95 Display Format 346 Fatal Error 347 Operation Error 354 Question 365 Information 371 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE 373 APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS 376 APPENDIX C SHORTCUT KEYS 386 APPENDIX D QUANTITATIVE LIMIT LIST 388 INDEX 389 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Figure No Title and Page 1 1 Main Window of PM 22 1 2 Relationship between Software for Program Development and PM 24 3 1
282. ics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics User s Manual sCENESAS PM Ver 6 30 Project Manager Target Devices 78KOR Microcontrollers V850 Microcontrollers Document No U18416EJ1VOUMOO 1st edition Date Published January 2007 CP K NEC Electronics Corporation 2007 Printed in Japan MEMO 2 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Applilet is a registered trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation in Japan Windows Windows XP and Microsoft are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 3 e The information in this document is current as of January 2007 The information is subject to change without notice For actual design in refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc for the most up to date specifications of NEC Electronics products Not all products and or types are available in every country Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information e No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by
283. ied the lines of the first and second layers are not replaced with Tab codes but the lines of the third and subsequent layers are replaced with Tab codes User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 177 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File If this check box is selected Tab codes are replaced with the number of space codes specified with Indent Tab Characters on the View tab in the PM Settings dialog box A two byte space is replaced with two one byte space codes Function buttons Saves the file with the specified options Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 178 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to change the name of the source file to be created from an IDL file being edited to a specified file name Figure 6 42 Change Source File Names Dialog Box lis Change Source File Names 5 File H a source File Title CONPM test VO50 tes JH WO0 test Testidl Cancel Help Change File Names select All 2 W Not Divide the Source File 3 Remove the Source File before renamed This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Change Source File Name Select the File menu gt Save As and click the C
284. ied file was skipped because it was under editing When the message whether the search will be performed in a file under editing is displayed the above message is displayed after selecting the No button The search character string was not detected in the specified file under edit ing Search of the specified file currently being edited was stopped xxx the number of the detected search character strings The replacement was performed in the specified file under editing xxx the number of the replacement yyy the number of the detection The searching was performed in the specified file under editing When the searching was performed to the end of the file under editing this message is displayed after selecting the Find Next button xxx the number of the detected search character strings Function Find Next Performs a search until a match for the search key is found During the search this button is grayed Replaces the found character string and continues the search During the search this button is grayed Replace This File Replaces all matches for the search key following that in the range selection No confirmation message is displayed After the replacement in the current file ends the next file is searched Replace All A message notifying the risk of the replacement in files is displayed first If the Yes button is selected replaces all matches for the search key following that in the range selection Closes t
285. iew menu gt Display All Object as Content displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as contents 5 5 12 Displaying all objects as icons selecting the View menu gt Display All Object as Icons displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as icons User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 63 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 Project Management Operations related to projects in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the File menu or Project menu in the Main window or the right click menus on the Project window Creating a project file Selecting active project Adding a new project to a workspace Inserting a project into a workspace CVS update CVS commit CVS log CVS status CVS comparison Exporting a make file Setting project information Adding a source file Adding a project related file Adding other files Making the active project selection combo box active Changing a project group name Changing a project title Changing the tools used Moving a project 5 6 1 Creating a project file Up to 128 source projects can be registered per workspace When registering a project to a new workspace A project file can be created using one of the following three methods Refer to the appropriate method when creating the workspace Creating a new project file A new workspace can be created by specify
286. ified Layer dialog box 58 91 Explanation of windows dialog boxes Expand Collapse Export Makefile 66 92 External toolbar 98 Ex tool Bar 62 92 F Features 23 File 36 87 Change Source File Name 39 88 Close 37 87 Close All 39 88 Close Workspace 38 87 Destroy All 39 88 Exit PM 40 88 History of files 40 History of the workspaces 40 Insert file 36 87 New 36 87 New Workspace 87 36 87 Open Workspace Print 40 88 Print Direct 40 88 Print Preview 40 88 Recent File 88 Recent Workspace 88 Save 38 87 Save All 39 88 Save All Source Files Open 37 87 39 88 Save and Close All 39 88 38 87 Save Workspace 73 94 File Compare dialog box 297 Save As 38 87 File Compare File Management 36 File menu 87 Find 47 89 Back Jump 50 90 Direct Search 56 90 Find 47 89 Find Downward 48 89 Find in Files 52 90 Find in Project 53 90 Find the Word Downward 48 89 Find the Word Upward 48 89 Find Upward 48 89 Mark Jump 49 90 392 INDEX 223 Next Tag Jump 54 90 Next Tag Jump Upward 54 90 One Character Left 56 90 One Character Right 56 90 One Line Down 55 90 One Line Up 55 90 One Word Left 55 90 One Word Right 55 90 Replace 48 89 Replace in Files 52 90 Same Layer Line Down 50 90 Some Layer Line Up 50 90 Tag Jump 53 90 To a Specific Line 49 To the End of File 49 90 To the End of Line 49 90 To the Function
287. ify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 5 Searching for a word downward Selecting the Find menu gt Find the Word Downward searches for the word at the caret position in the downward direction If Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab the word at the caret position will be stored as a search string and included in the search string his tory in the Find String dialog box If this check box is not selected the word will not be stored as a search string Note that Find the Word Downward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 6 Replacing a character string Selecting the Find menu gt Replace opens Replace String dialog box to replace a character string 48 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 7 Jumping to a specified line Selecting the Find menu gt To a Specific Line opens Jump to Specified Line dialog box to jump to a specified des tination line number 5 3 8 Jumping to a specified line in a specified source file Selecting the Find menu gt To the Specific Line in the Source file opens Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box to jump to a specified destination line number in a specified sourc
288. ild 5 7 2 Rebuilding and debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Rebuild and Debug executes batch processing from rebuild to debug for the active project With Build and Debug menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their dependent files have been scanned whereas with Rebuild and Debug menu item all the source files are built unconditionally If rebuild ends correctly the debugger starts up automatically and loads the load module file created by rebuild process ing However if a program is under execution on the debugger an error will occur When an error occurs during rebuild the processing stops and the debugger does not start up The messages output from the language processing tools during build are output to a log file The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop rebuild select the Build menu gt Stop Build 68 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 3 Compiling Selecting the Build menu gt Compile executes a language tool assembler compiler for the selected file on the Project window Compile is a part of Build except that object file linking is not executed within Compile Execution of Compile will also start up the assembler for the assembler source code The messages output form the language processing tools during compilation are output to a log file and disp
289. ild Mode Dialog Box Add Build Mode Build Mode OK l Cancel Copy Build Mode from Help 2 Debug Build This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Build menu gt Select Build Mode and click the Add button in the Build Mode dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Build Mode The name of the build mode to be added newly is entered in this area Up to 128 characters can be entered 2 Copy Build Mode from The currently set build mode is displayed by default Select the build mode using this combo box as required Function buttons OK Selects the added build mode and returns to the Build Mode dialog box If nothing is entered under Build Mode this button cannot be selected Does not enable the settings and returns to the Build Mode dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 281 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set options related to build This settings in this dialog box are saved in the registry and become valid at the next time the project is opened The following items can be set Options during build Build tab Processing to be executed before build Pre Build Process tab Processing to be executed after build After Build Process tab Note that the settings in the Build tab are
290. ile on the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Click the Browse button after selecting the Copy and Use the Existing file on the Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to be the copy source from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file to be the copy source User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 2 3 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Sets the specified file as a link directive file to be the copy source Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 214 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Figure 6 93 Link Directive File to register Dialog Box Link Directive File to register Look ir B PM test EF EE fm Files_test Macro Sjother products IE Buttonsys dir j sample dir Files of type Link Directive Filett dir x Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the File Name button on the New WorkSpace Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box
291. iles registered as the same project group to the debugger Refer to 5 7 13 Downloading multiple load module files Select Build Mode Specifies the build mode Opens the Build Mode dialog box Build Settings Performs the setting for the build processing Opens the Build Settings dialog box Batch Build Settings Selects the project for batch build or rebuild and sets the build sequence Opens the Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box Direct Build Mode Selection Make the Build Mode Selection combo box of the toolbar active Build mode can be selected Note Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings for the Build menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Caution If the project file to which no source file is registered is opened some build related menu items may be invalid User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 93 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 8 Tool menu Tool s name Specifies the tool options executed on PM Each name of the menu items depends on the tool Select the real time OS used Opens the Select RTOS dialog box Refer to 5 8 2 Selecting the real time OS to be used Select RTOS dump8sg50 Executes a dump command executes dump850 Opens the dump850 dialog box Refer to 5 8 3 Dumping the load module file or the object file Debugger Settings Sets up the debugger to be
292. ing the help of a current window 78 5 10 4 Displaying a list of shortcut keys 78 5 10 5 Accessing to NEC Electronics microcontrollers web site 78 5 10 6 Starting up a external help 1 78 5 10 7 Starting up a external help 2 78 5 10 8 Starting up a external help 3 79 5 10 9 Displaying the version information about PM 79 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 80 6 1 Window Composition 80 6 2 Input Rules 85 6 3 Explanation of Windows Wizards Dialog boxes 85 Main window 86 Project window 101 Edit window 112 search result display window 118 OutPut window 120 New WorkSpace wizard 122 Add New Project wizard 141 Project Settings wizard 160 Open dialog box 167 Insert File dialog box 170 Open Workspace dialog box 173 Save As dialog box 175 Save Source Files Options dialog box 177 Change Source File Names dialog box 179 Change Selected Source File Name dialog box 181 Change Selected Source File Names dialog box 183 Set Comment Mark dialog box 185 Print dialog box 186 Font dialog box Print 189 Set Header Footer dialog box 191 Grouping by Keyword dialog box 194 Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box 197 Find String dialog box 200 Replace String dialog box 204 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Jump to Specified Line dialog box 208
293. ing the necessary project information in order in a wizard format Refer to 5 1 6 Creating a new workspace Creating a workspace using a project file created by the PM V3 xx In PM a workspace can be created by reading a project file created by the PM V3 xx Refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Creating a workspace using a project file created by an NEC Electronics debugger simulator A workspace can be created by using a project file that has been updated the project information for PM in a wizard format Refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace When registering a project to an existing workspace Creating a new project file Refer to 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace 64 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 2 Selecting active project Selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project displays the Select Active Project dialog box in which the active project can be selected The active project means the project to be built or debugged 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace Selecting the Project menu gt Add New Project can be added a new project to a workspace A new project can also be added by selecting a project group on the Project window clicking the right mouse button and selecting Add New Project In order to add a new project to the workspace currently open the Add New Project wizard is displayed
294. ion by User OK Opens the file as Read Only Cancel Cancels reading Q2003 Message s is already using Do you wish to open it as read only Revert to the original file if you select No Cause An attempt was made to read a file that is already open and being edited s indicates the specified file name Action by User Yes Opens the file as Read Only No Discards the edited contents and opens the specified file Cancel Cancels reading Q2004 Message s was not be found Do you wish to close this window Cause A file on the currently open window has been deleted from the disk s indicates the deleted file name Action by User Yes Closes the Edit window No Dose not close the Edit window Q2005 Message s was not found Do you wish to save this file Cause The file was deleted from the disk when an attempt was made to close the window being edited s indicates the caption of the window Action by User Yes Displays the Save As dialog box No Closes the window without saving Q2006 Message Cause Action by User Cancel Returns to the window without doing anything The file s already exists Do you wish to rename to this file name The file already exists s indicates the source file name Yes Renames the source file The existing file will be deleted The existing file will be deleted No Does not change the name of the file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 365
295. ion by User Set 5120 or fewer characters per line description F0601 Message s The object file was required in order to execute the dump850 command Please exe cute build to generate the object file The object file could not be found when the dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the object file name Action by User Execute build generate an object file and try again F0602 Failed to remove the file Make sure that this file is read only or the other process using this file The displayed file could not be deleted when dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be deleted Action by User Check if the displayed file is read only or if it is being used by another application If it is read only clear it and try again If it is being used by another application close the application and try again FO603 S Failed to rename the filename Make sure that other process using this file The displayed file could not be renamed when the dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be renamed Action by User Check if the displayed file is being used by another application If it is being used by another application close the application and try again FO604 Message s The load module file was required in order to execute the dump850 command Please execute build to generate it
296. ion name differs according to the value of ifdef void ifdef ENGLISH FncEng else FncJapan endif int Cnt int Mode When function name extends over 2 lines with void Function Name int Cnt int Mode 198 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When variable declaration is performed between function name and ifdef ENGLISH int main argc argv int argr char argv In the case of a function name without a return value such as shown below the character on the preceding line are judged to be the return value In such a case declare the function type User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 199 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Find String dialog box This dialog box is used to find a character string The search is performed also to the lines in lower layers which are not expanded and if a search key is found in the lower layer the layer is expanded to show the character string Figure 6 51 Find String Dialog Box Find String 1 Find What main 2 Direction Match Whole Word Only Cancel Iv Match Case help Regular Expression Find from Top End of Line f This Source File Only i Display Mini Dialog This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Find menu gt Find Select the Find button on the tool bar Explana
297. is Registered ProjectWindow Files Memo ButtonSys 2 Project s man 1 a Source Files E testle test2 c testG c crths Include Files Ea Project Related Files C Other Files Library Source Files 9 Include Files Project Related Files C Other Files ServoSys 1 Projectie Servosys 2 J Source Files 9 Include Files J Project Related Files Other Files When dropping a workspace file prw extension The operation is the same regardless of where the file is dropped Closes the workspace and then opens the work space that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension The operation differs depending on where the file was dropped If the project file is dropped at 1 or 2 a project is added to the project group at the drop location If the project file is dropped at 3 a newly project group is created and the file is added The newly created project group name is the device microcontrollers name used in the added project file Multiple files can be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Operation is performed considering that a source file was added The operation differs depending on where the file
298. is also scrolled when the screen is scrolled default If it is not selected the caret does not move when the screen is scrolled Scroll Half Page as Page UP Down If this check box is selected the screen is scrolled by half a screen by pressing the Page Up Page Down keys If it is not selected the Page Up Page Down keys perform their normal operation b Mouse Wheel This area sets the number of lines to be scrolled when using the wheel button of Microsoft s IntelliMouse User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 313 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 12 Find Replace tab This tab is used to make settings related to a search and replacement Figure 6 123 PM Settings Dialog Box Find Replace Tab Find Replace Memorize Find What in idl File W Show String You Selected or Word of Garet Position to Find What a Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With Delete the Top of Underscore Character when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With From Top of Structure Member to Member of Caret Position when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With iw Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding Warning for Find Replace o gt Beep Sound Display Messages a Way of search replacement setting area Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line If this check box is selected a message is displayed when the downward search fin
299. is not possible If after a source file is added the microcontrollers name is changed by returning to the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box files among the previously added file other than those with extensions corresponding to the microcontrollers after the change are also displayed in the source file list box In this case delete these source files 136 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE It is possible to proceed to the next step by clicking the Next gt button even if no source files are specified in this dialog box In this case source files can be registered into the project by specifying with the Project Set tings dialog box or dragging and dropping the source files to be registered onto the Project window 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 4 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and retu
300. is updated when the project is closed It is newly created if the file does not exist Make file mak File automatically created at build This file is updated during the build after settings such as options have been changed refer to 5 6 10 Exporting a make file Log file plg File in which the contents of the OutPut window are saved This file is updated during a build It is newly created if the file does not exist User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 Installing PM PM is included with an assembler package RA78Kx or a compiler package CA850 When RA78Kx or CA850 are installed PM can be also installed if necessary as it is supplied in the same package For the details on how to install the assembler package or the compiler package refer to the user s manual of each tool 2 2 Uninstalling PM To uninstall PM start Add or Remove Programs Add Remove Programs in Windows other than Windows XP on the Control Panel of Windows and select the following items NEC EL PM V6 30 NEC EL PM V6 30 Documents User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 27 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING 3 1 Starting 28 PM can be started by either of the following methods When starting PM without using parameters Select Windows Start menu gt Program gt NEC Electronics Tools gt PM V6 30 Double click the existing workspace file prw The selected workspace file automatically op
301. ishes at the final line or the upward search finishes at the first line default If the Enter key or the key displayed on the message is clicked the search goes on If it is not selected the search finishes at the final or the first line Memorize Find What in idl File If this box is selected the character strings last 10 or file names last 10 searched in the Find String dia log box Replace String dialog box or Find in Files dialog box are saved in an IDL file and are valid the next time the IDL file is opened If it is not selected the information is saved in the registry Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What If this check box is selected the character string with range selection for searching is displayed when the Find String dialog box is opened If it is not selected the previously searched character string is displayed Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With If this check box is selected the character string with range selection for replacement is displayed when the Replace String dialog box is opened If it is not selected the previously replaced character string is dis played Delete the Top of Underscore _ Character when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With If this check box is selected the character string to be searched is displayed ignoring the underscore charac ter _ at the head of a word From Top of Struct
302. ister The device file could not found or the device file could not be opened because it is damaged Action by User Check the path for the device file or verify that the device file is not damaged F0107 Message Failed to read the device file Make sure that this file has broken Cause A reading error occurred for the device file Action by User Verify that the device file is not damaged Message Failed to open object Make sure that this IDL file has broken Cause An object could not be read when the file was read Action by User Verify that the IDL file is not damaged F0109 Cannot save object Memory may be not enough An object could not be saved when the file was stored Action by User The disk for storing is full so free up disk space F0108 F0110 Message Failed to read the macro file s Make sure that the correct path and filename given Cause The macro file could not be read s indicates the file name Action by User Check that the specified file exists F0111 Message The macro file s cannot be created Make sure that the correct path and filename given or disk space Cause The macro file could not be saved s indicates the file name Action by User Check whether the characters used in the specified file name are legal and specify legal characters If the disk is full free up memory Message Cannot load the IDL file of Ver3 X format Make sure that this IDL file has broken Cause The forma
303. istory up within the list When the history at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected his tory moves to the bottom of the list When no history is selected or when multiple histories are selected this button is disabled Moves the selected history down within the list When the history at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected his tory moves to the bottom of the list When no history is selected or when multiple histories are selected this button is disabled Delete Deletes the selected history When no history is selected this button is disabled c Fixed Recent List Specifies the number of histories that are not to be changed during file workspace history updating when file workspace is opened or saved with drop down list The number of histories that are not to be changed can be set from 1 to 5 The default number is 2 When this check box is selected the specified number of histories from the top history in Recent List is not changed By default this check box is not selected The background color of unchanged histories in the Recent List is displayed in light blue 304 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Source File by idl File tab This tab is used to make settings related to the source files generated by IDL files Figure 6 116 PM Settings Dialog Box Source File by idl File Tab Source File by idl File f
304. ject When the mouse cursor is placed on the other file folder Other Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the other file name the other file name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up Clicking the right mouse button on the other file folder or the other file name displays the following menus When an Other Files folder is selected Add Other Files Opens the Add Other Files dialog box Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box When an other file name is selected Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 107 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Memo tab The Memo tab displays the memo information specified for a workspace Memo information is managed in workspace units Figure 6 6 Project Window Memo Tab ProjectWindow EBS The contents of the memo can be added with the right mouse button Add Memo Opens the Add New Memo dialog box Records the contents of the memo with the date and time onto the Memo tab Delete Memo Deletes a selected memo 108 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Drag and drop function The following op
305. ject related files to be added Up to 259 characters can be specified A list of the file types that can be added are displayed in the drop down list The contents of Open as change according to this selection 3 Open As Select the application of the file to be added from the drop down list The contents of Files of type change accord ing to this selection User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 253 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Adds the specified files to the Project Related Files folder Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 254 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Other Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add any files to a project as other files Figure 6 81 Add Other Files Dialog Box Add Other Files main Look in E PM test c EE S Files test E Macro jother_products m spec doc Files of type Document Filet docc x ls x Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Add Other Files Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Other Files with the Other Files folder any file selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes any files to be added from the drop down list Multiple files can
306. l be the same as the folder when PM was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be loaded Only a file name with extension imc can be specified User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 333 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Play back the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read the key operation from a saved macro file and execute the macro Figure 6 136 Play back the Macro File Dialog Box Play back the Macro File G PM_test Macro Look irr B Macro c Ez E initime Files of type Macro Filet imc Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Play back the Macro File Explanation of each area 1 Look in This area displays the folder containing the macro file to be executed The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will
307. l s CABBONV2 O0 bin as880 exe Build Total errors 3 Total warnings 0 EOF This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Tag jump function Operations performed with the right mouse button Drag and drop function Opening Select the menu item that perform build or compile processing from the Build menu Select the View menu gt Output Window Explanation of each area 1 Execution status display area This area displays the execution status of the make file during build processing Tag jump function When a caret is placed on an error or warning line in the OutPut window double clicking the left mouse button will make tag jump from the line at the caret position to the corresponding error or warning line When a caret is placed on an error or warning number pressing the F1 key will display the help topic for the corre sponding error or warning 120 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Operations performed with the right mouse button When you click the right mouse button in the OutPut window the following menu items are displayed These menu items can be modified with Tool menu gt Customize Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Clears the contents of the OutPut window Searches for the specified character string Find in Project Searches for the specified character st
308. lable when the Enable All Layer Rule s Options check box is selected on the File tab in the PM Settings dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 169 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Insert File dialog box This dialog box is used to insert the contents of a specified file to the active Edit window The contents of the file will be inserted in the line immediately above the line where the caret is placed The caret position does not change after the file insertion If the caret is placed in the middle of a line however the caret will move to the beginning of the line The files that can be inserted are as follows IDL file Text file Figure 6 38 Insert File Dialog Box Insert File Look in PM test ci Ez Files test c test2c G Macro testd c 1 pother_products E crth2 s BjertNs c test 5 2 Files of type Source Files tk ck cosg Cancel Help 3 Apply Layer Rule rrue This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Insert file Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below 170 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name and Files of type a File name Specify the name of the file
309. lated items Source files generated by IDL files Window size and position Path related items Editing related items Window display Layer related items Edit window related items Search replace related items User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 13 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 10 Setting font Selecting the Tool menu gt Font opens the Font dialog box in which the type and size of the font on the Edit win dow can be selected 5 8 11 Customizing settings Selecting the Tool menu gt Customize opens Customize dialog box in which each setting can be customized The following settings are available Shortcut keys assigned to each menu Menu items to be displayed Toolbar items to be displayed Right mouse button menu items and shortcut menu items Highlight display and color for keywords 5 8 12 Recording key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Operations starts and stops record ing of the key operations While key operations are not being recorded this menu item is Record the Key Operations and selecting this menu item starts recording of the key operations While key operations are not being recorded this menu item is Record the Key Operations and selecting this menu item starts recording of the key operations While key operations are being recorded Recording is displayed on the window title 5 8 13 Playing
310. layed on the OutPut window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg 5 7 4 Building Selecting the Build menu gt Build starts up a set of language tools assembler compiler and link commands for the active project With Build menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their dependent files have been scanned The make file is created during build in default condition under the name project file name mak This make file is updated during build by default if options and other settings are changed The messages output form the language processing tools during build are output to a log file and displayed on the Out Put window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop build select the Build menu gt Stop Build Caution In PM Ver 3 xx if the Build menu item is executed while the debugger is activated a load module file is downloaded automatically but in PM a load module file is not downloaded To perform batch processing from build to download use the Build and Debug menu item 5 7 5 Stopping build If Build menu gt Stop Build is selected during build execution build processing is stopped If Build menu gt Stop Build is selected during batch build or batch rebuild execution a question message is displayed and build processing is paused 5 7 6 Re
311. le Contains NULL File with an inhibited extension refer to a Of Type File that cannot be opened in the write mode The following folders are not searched Windows folder and its subfolders 222 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Expand to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to expand specified layers Figure 6 63 Expand to Specified Layer Dialog Box Expand to Specified Layer 1 Specify The Layer Expand Layer fe ea ret Valid 1 12 ri Hel 2 Expand Caret Line Only Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Layer menu gt Expand the Specific Layer Explanation of each area 1 Specify The Layer Specify the number of layers to be expanded A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified The last set ting is displayed by default When this value is specified for the first time 127 is displayed 2 Expand Caret Line Only When this check box is selected only the layers lower than the line at the caret position are expanded When this check box is not selected all of the specified lower layers are expanded default Function buttons Expands the specified number of layers Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 223 CHAPTER 6 WIN
312. le attempted to be added Check the linker option Cannot register the file any more When adding source file or other files an attempt was made to register more than the maxi mum number of files Source files 2048 other files 100 Register the file after deleting the unnecessary file s The file except extension has already set The specified file name without extension has already been set as a source file s indicates the specified file name Rename the file using a different file name and add the source file again The file except extension has already set Do you wish to continue to add source files The specified file name without extension has already been set as a source file s indicates the specified file name Rename the file using a different file name and add the source file again User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 359 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description 360 E1424 Message The project s already entered Cause When adding a new project or inserting a project a project file name that has already been registered was specified s indicates the project file name Action by User Set another file name and register it E1425 Message A project group cannot be registered into this workspace any more Please register the project into the existing project group Cause When adding a new project or inserting a project an attempt was made to add more than the maximum nu
313. le is a source file generated from an IDL file the IDL file name is displayed with the relative path starting from the source file Function buttons Closes this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 263 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Memo dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new memo Figure 6 87 Add New Memo Dialog Box Add New Memo Memo OK 1 modified xxx Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Add New Memo on the Memo tab in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Memo Enter a new memo directly The date and time of addition is also displayed on the Project window Function buttons Adds the memo newly Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 264 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Startup File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file when an existing file is used as a startup file Figure 6 88 Startup File Dialog Box otartup File Look in PM test ct E io Files _test crth s IE Macro Bother Products E crtNz o val crt N s IE crtho Files of type Start up files Gok Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function butto
314. le specification is illegal Delete the startup file registered to the source file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 131 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 5 9 Register Mode dialog box Specify the register mode option for the compiler The sample file of the startup file corresponding to the register mode which is selected in this dialog box is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box and Copy and Use the Sample file has been selected in the previous wizard step New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Figure 6 17 New WorkSpace Step 5 9 Register Mode Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 5 9 Register Mode Please select the Register Mode 1 Workspace Information 99 Register Mode 2 Select Tools 3 Select Real Time O s 4 Startup Filet 26 Register Mode gt 05 Register Mode 6 Link Directive Files T Setup Source Files MDT eee iter acta ea ena o Select Debugger g9 Confirmation GH VO50 Microcontrollers Only 4 6 According as the selected CASB Register Mode the sample Startup File will be copied and used The Register Mode sets the number of registers internally used by the CASSO As a result of unused registers the registers not used by the GAS5O
315. lected Format of tag jump Specify the tag jump format when an external editor is used A tag jump format specific to the external editor is specified using the file name specification macro F and line number specification macro L Refer to the manual of each editor for details If the format is blank it is considered as F Examples of typical editors are shown below MIFES F L User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 301 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File tab This tab is used to make settings related to files Figure 6 114 PM Settings Dialog Box File Tab File Watch f Update The File Sutomatically If Changed by Other Process a gt gt C Dont Update The File If Changed by Other Process Apply Laver Rule in Opening Filets Enable All Layer Rule s Options b Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The End of Line in Saving a File W Make a Backup File Glear The Undo Butter in Saving a File Extension of Backup File IDL File bk Extension User Specity Extension Ex cpp h c p User Extension List TEAT File bak utomatic Backup f Dont Save f Save The File e ma add orana Delete l Eon a Watch This area specifies the operation when the file being edited is updated by another application Update The File Automatically If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM is changed by another process such as an editor the file is read agai
316. lected the search starts from the first line Display Mini Dialog If this check box is selected the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box when the Find Next button is next selected default Figure 6 52 shows an image of the Find String dialog box mini Figure 6 52 Find String Dialog Box Mini Find String x J Up Details i Cancel Help Continues a downward search for a character string matching the specified search key Continues an upward search for a character string matching the specified search key Displays the normal Find String dialog box in which the search conditions can be changed Close this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Match Whole Word Only If this box is selected a whole word match for the search key is searched for Match Case If this box is selected a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default Regular Expression If this box is selected regular expressions are supported in global searching The following regular expressions are supported Expression Description Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation X or Y appears selection Same as X X appears one or more times X appears zero or more times User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 201 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Meta characters and have special me
317. lected with range selection by one as well as the layers of its lower layer lines if any Figure 5 2 Promoting Layers include Test3 h int monIndex BOOL m_bFle 4 finclude Test3 h void Funcdtvoid T int m olndex BOOL m_bF le LUNG I Temp Temp 1034 Func im bFle m nlndex Funcdt Tempj LONG ITemp ITemp 10 Func tm bFleJ Select the Layer menu gt Promote m nIindex Func Tempj If a line without lower layers the layer mark at the top of the line is changed to the Line with Lower Layer mark The layer mark can be specified with the Layer Mark at Top of Line area on the Tool menu gt PM Setting Layer tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 57 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 2 Demoting layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Demote demotes the layer of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection by one as well as the layers of its lower layer lines if any Figure 5 3 Demoting Layers include Test3 h int monIndex m_bFlg include Test3 h void Funcdt voids t i int m_nIndex EDOL m bFle t void Funedivoid LUNG I Temp ITemp 10 Func tm bFleJ LONG IT s nindex Func ilTemp une lTemp 10 4 Func tm bFleJ Select the Layer menu gt Demote monIndex Funcet Te
318. lected with range selection to the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed 5 2 5 Cutting off character strings Cut for Append Selecting the Edit menu gt Cut for Append adds the contents of the character strings or the lines selected with range selection to the end of the clipboard and deletes them from the Edit window This menu item dose not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the copy portion to the end of the contents of the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed When a character string is cut the caret position will not be changed When lines are cut the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line following the cut position When the last line of a document is cut the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line Note that Cut for Append menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 6 Copying character strings Copy for Append Selecting the Edit menu gt Copy for Append adds the contents of the character string or the lines sel
319. led are dimmed b Version The tool versions specified in the selected tool set are displayed in this area However tools that have not been installed are dimmed and Unused is displayed for a tool whose version is not specified in the tool set c Select only Installed Tools If this check box is selected tools that have not been installed are excluded from the Tool Versions which corre sponds to the tool set selected in the Tool Set Selected01 is appended to the top of the name of the tool set with which this check box is selected if the tool set name actually exists Selected nn is appended This check box cannot be selected grayed if there are no dimmed tools all the listed tools have been installed This check box is not selected in the default condition 3 Brief description area A message is displayed when a dimmed item is displayed in the Tool Versions area User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 259 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the tools to be used by a project included in the selected project group at once Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 260 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to select the tools to be used and their versions Figure 6 85 Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box Tool Version Detail Setting e caa
320. ll Files 3 Create the Source Files This check box is available only when the file to be saved is an IDL file If this check box is selected a source file is also created In this case the Change Source File Name and Source File Name Option buttons become valid If this check box is not selected only the IDL file is saved and no source file is created In this case the Change Source File Name and Source File Name Option buttons become invalid Note that if the Search result display window is active this check box is always invalid 4 CR Code This setting is valid when a file is saved in text file format If a text file that has already been read is specified the linefeed code when the file was read is displayed The linefeed code that can be saved are as follows MS Windows CR LF Linefeed code has 2 bytes CR code and LF code UNIX OS LF Linefeed code LF code Mac OS CR Linefeed code CR code Function buttons Save Saves the file with the specified name Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Hep Opens the help for this dialog box the help for this dialog box Cs Source File Name eee pe ee the Change Source File Names dialog box in which the source file name and the comment mark can be changed Source File Name Option Opens the Save Source Files Options dialog box in which the options for the source file to be created can be set 176 User s Man
321. lp topic of the current active window 5 10 4 Displaying a list of shortcut keys Selecting the Help menu gt Shortcut List opens Shortcut List dialog box to list the shortcut keys specified for the PM menu items 5 10 5 Accessing to NEC Electronics microcontrollers web site Selecting the Help menu gt NEC Electronics Microcontrollers Web accesses the NEC Electronics microcontrollers web site http www necel com micro index_e html 5 10 6 Starting up a external help 1 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 1 starts up the help specified with External HELP 1 Shift F1 area on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 5 10 7 Starting up a external help 2 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 2 starts up the help specified with External HELP 2 Ctrl F1 area on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 78 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 10 8 Starting up a external help 3 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 3 starts up the help specified with External HELP 3 Shift Ctrl F 1 area on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 5 10 9 Displaying the version information about PM Selecting the Help menu gt About PM displays the version information about PM When a project file is opened the version information about NEC Electronics tools and device files that are correspond ing to
322. lts in the format of file name number of the line on which the character string is found contents of the line on which character string is found Note that 5120 or more char acter cannot be displayed The search can be interrupted by pressing the Esc key The search conditions are as specified in the Find in Files dialog box Of the conditions that can be set in the Find in Files dialog box only the following items are effective for Find in Project Match Case Match Whole Word Only Show File Names 5 3 24 Jumping to a desired line tag jump If a file name and a line number are displayed on the line to which the caret is positioned selecting the Find menu gt Tag Jump opens the file and jumps to the desired line This makes it possible to jump from an error message displayed during a build to the corresponding error line in the source file A tag jump can be performed only in the format of file name delimiter line number The following four characters are handled as delimiters Single byte space character Tab character User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 53 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Parentheses and If the file name exceeds 260 single byte characters this is regarded as a tag jump format error and a jump cannot be performed A file name containing any of the following symbols is not regarded as being a file name and jump cannot be per formed l i 2 g lt gt
323. ly 4 62 6 vesn Microcontrollers ha uP D703003 ka Device Install This will set up the basic information about the project 7 Required field Cancel Help 1 Workspace File Name 2 3 4 The file name of the workspace currently open is displayed with an absolute path Project Group Name Specify the name of the project group to be displayed on the Project window Up to 127 characters can be speci fied To insert a project in an existing group select the relevant group name from the drop down list If this specification is omitted the name of the project group displayed on the Project window will be set as Workspace File Name without the path and extension Project File Name Specify the name of the file to save the project information of the newly added project Up to 255 characters can be specified The extension of the file is prj which is appended automatically when the extension is omitted In addition if an existing project file name is specified the existing project file will be renamed as backup file e g test prj gt test prj bak after the Next gt button is clicked Then the message dialog box whether to create a new project file will be displayed Project Folder Specify the folder to save the project file of the newly added project Selecting the Browse button opens the Browse for Folder dialog box in which to specify the project folder posi tion User s Manual U18416EJ1
324. manual of each tool for files created by other tools linked with PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Workspace file prw File in which workspace information is saved It is created by selecting the File menu gt New Workspace or when an existing project file prj is opened Information such as the project file name registered in the workspace and batch build information is stored in this file Project file prj File in which project information is saved It is created when a project is created refer to 5 6 1 Creating a project file Various kinds of information set to the project and information such as options set to tools linked with PM are saved in this file User environment setting file prk File in which information specific to the user such as window locations and toolbar display information is saved This file is always updated when PMt is terminated so this file does not need source management If this file is deleted user dependant environment settings are cleared Dependency data file sdb File in which the dependency with the source file is registered Aiming to accelerate the opening of a project this file is updated when the project is closed It is newly created if the file does not exist Function information file fni File in which information on the functions included in the source file is registered Aiming to accelerate the opening of a project this file
325. mation 2 5elect Tools 20 Select Real Time 05 4 Startup Filet 5 Register Mode GH 6 Link Directive File Ge T Setup Source Files o Select Debugger 9 Confirmation GH S50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 Please select the Real Time OS RTOS from NEG Electronics to be used Only the installed RTOS from NEC Electronics can be selected lt Back Cancel Help 1 RTOS When using the NEC Electronics real time OS select the name of real time OS when not using that select Not use from the drop down list Not use and all the names of the real time OSs for the NEC Electronics V850 Microcontrollers that have been specified in the New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box are displayed on the drop down list If the name of the real time OS to be used is selected the RTOS Settings button becomes valid and clicking this button opens the dialog box for setting the selected real time OS in detail Refer to the user s manual of the real time OS for details on the setting 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 128 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Function butto
326. mber of project groups 128 when a new project group was specified Action by User Register the project in an existing project group E1426 Message s This file has already specified as the startup file Do you wish to continue to add source files Cause An attempt was made to add a file specified at startup as a linker option s indicates the name of the file attempted to be added Action by User This message is displayed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project E1427 Message A project cannot be registered into this workspace any more Please delete an unnecessary project or register the project into the other workspace Cause Registration of a number of projects exceeding the maximum number 128 of projects that can be registered to a workspace was attempted Action by User Add the projects after deleting the unnecessary ones Or add the projects to a different work space E1428 Message s The specific some tools cannot be found Please select tools Cause Action by User The tool specified in the project file has not been installed in the PC currently operating Select the tool to be used from the installed tools E1429 Message The tool set name was not set Please enter it Cause An attempt was made to move to another page leaving the tool set name unspecified on the Tool Version Settings tab in the Project Settings dialog box Select a tool set name Action by User
327. mbler Build mode was added in a language product that does not support build mode Verify that the compiler assembler used is the latest version Cannot remove the build mode Please conform using the latest version compiler assembler Build mode was added in a language product that does not support build mode Verify that the compiler assembler used is the latest version Cannot execute this command while the debugger downloading Please execute it after the debugger downloading An attempt was made to execute download again during downloading of the debugger Try again after finishing the download Cannot execute this command without the debugger start up Please start up the debugger Multiple load module files were downloaded while the debugger was not started up Start up the debugger and try again The batch build settings is not set up Please set up the batch build settings by Batch Build Settings After workspace creation Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item was executed before the batch build setting was performed After opening the Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box from the Batch Build Settings menu item and performing the batch build setting execute Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item again User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 361 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description E1513 Message The build or rebuild project is not specified Please set up the batch build settings by Batch Buil
328. mmand Format for Keyboard Macro jump related Contents Command Format To the Top of Line topofline To the End of Line endofline Mark Jump Adding the current addmark caret position as a marked line Mark Jump Jumping to a marked markjump lt mark number gt lt mark number gt Specifies number of mark beginning with 1 in display order of Mark Jump dialog box To the Specific Line jump lt line number gt lt line number gt Specify line number appearing on top of file as first line excluding collapsed layers To the Index Line indexline To the End of File bottomline Tag Jump tagjump Next Tag Jump nexttagjump Next Tag Jump Upward upwardnexttag One Word Right rightword One Word Left leftword 380 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS One Line Up up line count line count Specify the number of lines to be jumped default is 1 One Line Down down line count line count Specify the number of lines to be jumped default is 1 One Character Left up character count character count Specify the number of characters to be jumped default is 1 One Character Right right character count character count Specify the number of characters to be jumped default is 1 Back Jump backjump Help Menu Table B 6 Command Format for Keyboard Macro Help menu External HELP 1 externalhelp1 External HELP 2 externalhelp2 External HELP 3 externalhelp3 User s Manual
329. mp If a line with lower layers the layer mark at the top of the line is changed to the Line with Lower Layer mark The layer mark can be specified with the Layer Mark at Top of Line area on the Tool menu gt PM Setting Layer tab 5 4 3 Expanding or collapsing one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand Collapse expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is posi tioned or the line selected with range selection if it is collapsed and collapses it if expanded When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the caret line is positioned to the top of the screen 5 4 4 Expanding one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the caret line is positioned to the top of the screen Note that Expand menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Figure 5 4 Expanding One of the Lower Layers include Test3 h int m_nIndex t BOOL m_bFle int m_nIndex void Funedivaidi
330. n automatically Don t Update The File If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM is changed by another process such as an editor the file is not read again Display Message If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM is changed by another process such as an editor a message is dis played to verify whether the file is read again or not default b File setting area Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s If this check box is selected files are always read with layer when they are opened including all the drag and drop operations and file histories Enable All Layer Rule s Options If this check box is selected all the options of the layer rule used when opening a files are valid If it is not selected the options accord with the status of the Set Layer Rule dialog box Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The End of Line in Saving a File If this check box is selected null characters at the end of a line are deleted when a file is stored If it not selected the file is saved with null characters remaining at the end of a line Make a Backup File If this check box is selected a backup file is created when a file is stored default The extension of the backup file can be specified freely in the Extension of Backup File area 302 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM d CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clear The Undo Buffer in Saving a File If this check box is selected the undo
331. n Note Delete to the End of Word Deletes the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the right of the caret position Note Delete the Line Deletes a single line at the caret position Deleting to the Top of Line Deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the beginning of the line Note Delete to the End of Line Deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line Note Select to the Word Selects the word at the caret position with the range selection Note Select to the Top of Word Selects the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the left of the caret position with range selection Note Select to the End of Word Selects the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the right of the caret position with range selection Note Select to the Top of Line Selects the portion of the line from the caret position to the beginning of the line with range selection Note Select to the End of Line Selects the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line with range selection Note Select All Selects the entire contents of the Edit window Grouping by Keyword Collects the lines containing a specified character string Opens the Grouping by Keyword dialog box Restore Color of Grouping Lines Restores the color assigned to the lines collected with the Grouping by Keyword Make Function Prototypes Makes the function protot
332. n The kind of tool bar is as follows 1 Standard bar 2 Build bar 3 Option bar 4 N NAN External tool bar The standard bar and the build bar can be customized with the Tool menu gt Customize Toolbar tab 1 Standard bar The standard bar consists of the buttons and combo box that are related to the operation or the modification of files Table 6 2 shows the list of items on the standard bar in the default condition Table 6 2 Standard Bar a ee Lists the names of the files opened Opens a Edit window newly Up to 64 Edit windows can be opened including the Search result display windows and the OutPut windows Loads a existing file and opens the Edit window The name of the file loaded is displayed on the title of the Edit window Opens the Open dialog box D Overwrites the file currently being edited Bo Prints the contents of the window currently being edited D Displays the printing status of the window currently being edited Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes l them Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard 3 B Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the caret position O Wo Searches for the specified character string within multiple files Specifies a character string to be searched for Searches for the specified character string in ayn i A the currently active Edit window
333. n the active Edit window If multiple Edit windows are open the function list is updated when any position in the Function List dialog box is clicked after updating the active win dow Figure 6 66 Function List Dialog Box lis FunctionList 1 gt E at al E 2 Function This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Cautions Opening Select the View menu gt Function List User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 229 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Buttons e a T Jumps to the function definition line in the Edit window when a function is selected in Func tion area This is the same as double clicking a function name This button is invalid if a function name is not selected in Function area Displays in the ascending order the functions of each source file displayed in the order in which they have been searched from the beginning of the Edit window If the functions are displayed in the ascending order they are displayed in the order in which they have been searched By default they are displayed in the order in which they have been searched Closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box This area displays a list of the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window If this dialog box is opened or made active with a range selection placed on the character string of a function name in the Edit window the
334. name with extension imc can be specified Only Macro File imc is available as Save as type 330 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Saves the file with the specified name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The command corresponding to each key operation is described in a macro file imc The macro file is text file and can therefore be referenced or modified Addition is also possible in accordance with the prescribed format Refer to APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS for details User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 331 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Load the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read a saved macro file Figure 6 135 Load the Macro File Dialog Box Load the Macro File G PM test Macro Files of type Macro FileGt ime Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File Explanation of each area 1 2 332 Look in This area displays the folder that includes the macro file to be read The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder wil
335. nd Path Footer Eooter al fal ej j S Footer Font Font Arial Position LEFT cees TE aor Draw a Line Below Footer Draw a Filename and Path Change Footer Font E Draw a Source Filename and Path This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Header Footer button in the Print dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 191 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Header a Header Specify the contents to be printed as headers by clicking any of the following buttons When a button is clicked the corresponding characters are entered in the text box Page number p Date d Time t Source file name s b Position Specify the position at which the contents of the header c Draw a Line Below Header Draws a line below the contents of headers d Draw a Filename and Path Prints a file name with the path name if the file name is printed in the header e Draw a Source Filename and Path Prints a source file name with the path name if the source file name is printed in the header f Header Font Displays the font type and font size under currently set in the header Clicking the Change Header Font button opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be specified 2 Footer a Footer Specify the contents to be printed as footers by clicking any of
336. ndition however if Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s is selected on the File tab in the PM Settings dialog box this check box is selected automatically and dimmed The Layer Rule button can only be valid when Apply Layer Rule check box is selected Refer to the Set Layer Rule dialog box for details on the layer rule Example Opening a file without checking the check box a CAPM test testi c Changed m_ptNo Func im_lpTop nNoj bTemp Fune2 td iff bTlemps i m Char Funebe js telse t m Char 2 34 J I f TestDatal 7A pkr tt 168 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening a file with checking the check box BF CAPM _test test _c Changed m ptNo Funchtm_lptop nNo bTemp Funcetyi iff 0 bTemp m Char Funecbe is lelsett m Char Zi tt oe A mst t 5 Gather Files into an Edit Window Multiple specified files are read into one Edit window When this check box is selected Open as read only check box becomes invalid Function buttons Open Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Layer Rule Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box to set the layer rule to be applied when reading a file This button is available only when the Apply Layer Rule check box is selected This button is unavai
337. ne in the specified source file Opens the Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box Note Mark Jump Registers the current caret position as a mark or moves the caret position to the marked line Opens the Mark Jump dialog box To the Top of Line Moves the caret position to the top of the line To the End of Line Moves the caret position to the end of the line To the Top of File Moves the caret position to the top of the top line of the file To the End of File Moves the caret position to the end of the last line of the file To the Index Line Moves the caret position to the top of the index line at the current caret position To the Top Layer at caret Moves the caret position to the top layer line at the current caret position Same Layer Line Up Moves the caret position to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line above the current caret Note Same Layer Line Down Moves the caret position to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line below the current caret Note Moves the caret position to the position before the previous jump Note Refer to 5 3 18 Moving the caret to the position before a jump To the Function Definition Moves the caret position to the definition line for the function To the Matching Brace Back Jump Searches for the matching brace that at the current caret position and moves the caret to that brace Refer to 5 3 20 Searching for matchi
338. ng braces Find in Files Searches for the specified character string within multiple files Opens the Find in Files dialog box Replace in Files Replaces the specified character string within multiple files Opens the Replace in Files dialog box Find in Project Searches for the specified character string within multiple files registered in the project Refer to 5 3 23 Searching for a character string within a project Tag Jump Performs a tag jump Refer to 5 3 24 Jumping to a desired line tag jump To the Tag File Returns from the tag jump destination to the window from which the tag jump was made Next Tag Jump Continues the search for the line in tag jump format jump that has been made Note Direct Search Make the Search Character String Specification combo box of the toolbar active Searches for the specified character string in the currently active Edit window by pressing Enter key Note Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings for the Find menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Layer menu Promote Promotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Refer to 5 4 1 Promoting layers Demote Demotes the layer of line to which the current caret
339. ng or line is pasted If is not selected the caret position is moved to the paste location Use Auto Indent If this check box is selected the caret is moved to the previous indent line when a linefeed occurs default If it is not selected the caret is displayed on the first line when a linefeed occurs Release Range Selected Before Jump If this check box is selected the range selection is cleared before the caret is moved when a menu related to jump is executed If it is not selected the caret is moved from the starting position to the destination of the caret or the closest position to it while range selection is being executed Beep Warning Sound If this check box is selected an alarm sound is output when warning message is displayed b Double Click This area is used to select the double click operation Layer Expand Collapse Expands or collapses the lower layers Select a Word Selects a word including the caret with range selection when the mouse is double clicked on the Edit window 308 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Image Copy This area is used to select whether a layer is replaced by a space or a Tab when an image is copied Convert Indent to Tab The layer is replaced be a Tab Convert Indent to Space The layer is replaced be a space default Object Disable object resize If this check box is selected the size of an object pasted in a document cannot be changed defa
340. ng that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of at To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear f This Source File Onl
341. ng the Find menu gt Direct Search makes the Search Character String Specification combo box of the toolbar active After directly inputting the character string to be searched press the Enter key to search the specified character string in the currently active Edit window Note that Direct Search menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 56 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 Layer Management Operations related to layers in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Layer menu in the Main window Promoting layers Demoting layers Expanding or collapsing one of the lower layers Expanding one of the lower layers Collapsing one of the lower layers Expanding all of the lower layers Expanding all of the layers Collapsing all of the layers Expanding a specified number of layers Collapsing a specified number of layers Displaying the top layer only Displaying the first and second layers Displaying the first to third layers Displaying the first to fourth layers Displaying the first to fifth layers Collapsing a layer at the caret Applying a layer rule 5 4 1 Promoting layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Promote promotes the layer of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line se
342. not be selected c Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is copied and used select this option button Specify the startup file name to be the copy source and the startup file name to be the copy destination If Browse button is clicked the Copy Startup File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be the copy source is displayed in Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a 130 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE relative path using the keyboard The startup file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in The Startup File Name to register edit box using the keyboard d Do Not specify now 2 3 4 5 When no startup file is specified now select this option button In this case a startup file can be specified by selecting the project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options The Startup File Name to register Specify the name of the startup file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternati
343. not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 55 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 32 Moving the caret one character to the right Selecting the Find menu gt One Character Right moves the caret one character to the right If range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves regard less of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that One Character Right menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 33 Moving the caret one character to the left Selecting the Find menu gt One Character Left moves the caret one character to the left If range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves regard less of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that One Character Left menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 34 Making the search character string specification combo box active selecti
344. ns Opening Click the Browse button on the New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Click the Browse button on the Add New Project Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the startup file to be specified from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the startup file The extension of startup file is o or s by default User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 265 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a startup file The specified startup file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 266 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Copy Startup File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Figure 6 89 Copy Startup File from Dialog Box Copy Startup File trom Look in E PMtest amp fi E IB Files test E crtN s Macro 1 other products E crtN2 o E crth2 s IE crthoa Files of type Start up files Gots Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Browse button after selecting Copy and Use the
345. ns Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 129 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File dialog box Specify a startup file This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box Figure 6 16 New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 4 9 Startup File Please specify the Startup File 1 Workspace Information 2 Select Tools i ee 3 Select Real Time Os 1 e TE gt gt 4 Startup File C Copy and Use the Existing file 5 Register Mode GH 6 Link Directive File G T Setup Source Files AE eA EE A Select Debugger J Gontir mation GH VO50 Microcontrollers Only 4 61 2 GAP M_testhcrths File Name The Startup File Hame to register The otartup File includes codes to be executed on Startup or Reset 3 The sample file initializes RAM and stack then calls the main function Ih case of using the sample file 3 pl
346. nt 0 while cnt lt 10 if cnt 0 insert 0 insertreturn ten loops insert 1 return go back to top of while add cnt ten loops insert O return elseif cnt 1 insert 1 insertreturn else continue cnt return go back to top of while add cnt msgbox lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string to be displayed with Caution If the OK button is selected the message box closes x getchar x Character string type variable Return values One character or character string returned at the caret x istitle x Integer type variable Return values 1 Title line 0 Not title line User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD MACROS Checking the title line at the caret x istitleopen expand collapse x Integer type variable Return values 1 The layer of the title line is expanded 0 The layer of the title line is collapsed x istop x Integer type variable Return values 1 Top line 0 Not top line Checking the first line at the caret x isbottom x Integer type variable Return values 1 Bottom line 0 Not bottom line Caution Even if the caret line appears to be a bottom line lower layers collapsed 1 is returned Checking the last line at the caret x isendofline x Integer type variable Return values 1 The
347. ntents of the OutPut window are updated after a mark has been set in the OutPut window When the OutPut window is closed The way to release the range selection when a jump is made differs depending on the status of Release Range Selected Before Jump on the Edit tab in the PM Settings dialog box 212 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Find in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to search through multiple files in a specified folder for a character string Figure 6 58 Find in Files Dialog Box Find in Files Find What E00 0 Of Type eee Cancel Folder O PMtest Details gt gt Search Active Window Only Iw Match Gase Help Look in Subtolders Match Whole Word Only Figure 6 59 Find in Files Dialog Box Details Find in Files Find what BOOL Find Of Type kc Cancel Folder CAPM test 2 Ee Search Active Window Orly lf Match Case o Hep Look in Subfolders Match Whole Word Only Regular Expression Display the Source File Names in the case of IDL file show File Names f Show All File Names with Layer f Show File Name was found string with Layer Co Show File Name was found tring without Layer This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Find menu gt Find in Files Select the Find in Files button on the to
348. nu List This area lists menu items included in the menu selected in Menu Select a menu item to be added c Customize Menu This area is used to select the menu to be customized d View Menu This area displays the menu items currently specified for the menu selected in Customize Menu Inserts the menu item selected in Menu List at the position selected in View Menu Deletes the menu item selected in View Menu 324 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Keyword tab This tab is used to set the keywords to be highlighted with a color Figure 6 131 Customize Dialog Box Keyword Tab keyword A throu een on peroeen ee Vv Accentuate Le i oan C Languages Reserved Words A Reserve Words d in Color Set Color b w Accentuate Peripheral Register W Accentuate Comment Lines Color SN Set Color Color Set Color E o MS ct Color a Accentuate User Keywords If this check box is selected the keywords defined by the user are displayed in the set color You can define the keywords with the Edit User keyword dialog box opened by clicking the User Keywords button and select the color with the Color dialog box opened by clicking the Set Color button b Accentuate Peripheral Register If this check box is selected the peripheral register names of the device used in the project are displayed in the set color default You can select the color with the Col
349. nual U18416EJ1VOUM 155 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Cautions If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible If after a source file is added the microcontrollers name is changed by returning to the Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box files among the previously added file other than those with exten sions corresponding to the microcontrollers after the change are also displayed in the source file list box In this case delete these source files It is possible to proceed to the next step by clicking the Next gt button even if no source files are specified in this dialog box In this case source files can be registered into the project by specifying with the Project Set tings dialog box or dragging and dropping the source files to be registered onto the Project window 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 4 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Canc
350. nused registers the registers not used by the GASSO can be used for the application programin assembly language and the overhead required for saving and restoring registers can be reduced Though the variables allocated to registers Back Cancel Help 1 Register mode specification area a 22 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 22 register mode b 26 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 26 register mode c 32 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 32 register mode 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 151 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If the register mode of the compiler option is changed after a new workspace is created the q
351. o Replace With check box on the same tab 2 Replacement options area a Match Whole Word Only If this box is selected a whole word match for the search key is searched for b Match Case If this box is selected a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default c Regular Expression If this box is selected regular expressions are supported in the replacement The following regular expressions are supported Character Represents the character itself l Represents the character itself 2 282 8 aaa i oc px Kevaninon pops X appears zero or more times X appears one or more times Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is
352. o set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the drop down list Function buttons Button Function OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the OutPut window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 241 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Log dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS log command for the selected file and display the file s log contents in the OutPut window Figure 6 73 CVS Log Dialog Box Co Log F ile 1 CAFM test test1 oc Cancel Command i Xf Filenames Hel 2 cveexe log MP ae Pd This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Log Explanation of each area 1 File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name incl
353. o the same folder of IDL file Cause The drive of the source file specified when saving the IDL file could not be found Action by User Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file Message The IDL source file s path cannot be found Do you wish to change the path Cause The source files save to the same folder of IDL file if you select No The path specified by the source file when saving an IDL file could not be found Action by User Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file E1015 E1016 E1017 E1018 E1019 Message The path of IDL source file has not be found This file will be save to the same IDL file s folder Cause The path specified by the source file when saving an IDL file or changing the source file name could not be found Action by User Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 355 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description E1020 Message Cannot convert to new path Make sure that the path is correct Cause Action by User The path could not be changed when opening a project file copied from a different folder Open the project file with an editor and verify the path E1021 Message The fil
354. ocess tab Double click each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Settings After Build Process tab Explanation of each area 1 Command Describe the DOS command to be executed before or after build Up to 127 characters can be specified as a com mand Function buttons Edits the command with the specified contents Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 287 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select RTOS dialog box This dialog box is used to select the real time OS used by the current active project Figure 6 104 Select RTOS Dialog Box Select RTOS Select RTOS 1 Een owsa o ma Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Select RTOS Explanation of each area 1 Select RTOS The real time OS used by the current active project can be selected in this area The real time OS name specified on the Tool Version Settings tab in the Project Settings dialog box is displayed on the drop down list The real time OS name set by the current active project is displayed by default Function buttons OK Opens the dialog box for setting the real time OS that has been selected in this dialog box Refer to the user s manual of the real time OS for setting details Does not en
355. of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 239 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Commit dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflect the file in the repository The result is displayed on the OutPut window Figure 6 72 CVS Commit Dialog Box CVS Commit Commit File 1 GAP Ml test test ic Log Message Command Sf File name Sm Log message 3 levsexe commit m Mim BR This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Commit Explanation of each area 1 Commit File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file 2 Log Message Enter the log message to be added when commit is executed 240 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here t
356. og box This dialog box is used to save the current active file into a specified file Figure 6 40 Save As Dialog Box Save As Save ih gt PM _test Files_test test2 c IB Macro iC testa c 2 jother_products E crt s crths G test1 c Save as type Source Files ct c2s 9 ki Cancel Help CA Cod f MS Windows CR LF RSI ee a ELA f UNIS OS LF C Mac 05 CR This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Save As Explanation of each area 1 Save in Select the drive or folder in which the file is to be saved from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below 2 File name and Save as type a File name Specify the name of the file to be saved If the file has no name a file name created based on the contents of the first line is displayed If the first line has no characters the file name is displayed as Untitled The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 175 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Save as type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are displayed in the default con dition Source Files c c2s s Include Files h inc idl Files idl Text Files txt A
357. oject window However if the active Edit window is an IDL file the object file generated from the source file at the caret position is the analysis target file The object file name is displayed in the edit box If no source file is specified nothing will be displayed User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 289 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Activates the dump command dump850 The analysis results are saved under project file name dmp and displayed in the Edit win dow Ifa dmp file already exists the file is renamed as a bak file under project file name dmp bak Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 290 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Debugger Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the details of the debugger to be used Figure 6 106 Debugger Settings Dialog Box Debugger Settings select Debugger foM for wa50 W300 System Simulator Debugger File Name C Program Files NEG Electronics Tools SM for VE50V2 ption Debue Target Debug Target File GAF M_test aout Execute Symbol Reset after Download Iw Execute GPU Reset after Download Debug Options Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Debug Target File List JG SPM test aout cancel te This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area F
358. oject group name the device name used in the projects affiliated with that project group is displayed as a pop up Clicking the right mouse button on the project group name displays the following menus Edit Project Group Name Opens the Project Group Name dialog box Add New Project Opens a wizard to add a new project into the project Insert Project Opens the Insert Project dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM b c CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project title name The project title is displayed If a title is not set the file name without the path and extension is displayed The project title name can be set by the user freely and up to 127 characters can be set When the mouse cursor is placed on the project title name the device name used in the projects is displayed as a pop up Meaning of icons E Project set as the active project by selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project or right mouse button gt Set as Active Project Project not set as active project Clicking the right mouse button on the project title name displays the following menus Source Files folder Source files and assembler files registered in the project are grouped here The names of the source files regis tered to the project are displayed under the Source File folder Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor refer to
359. oject group to which the project is to be moved click the right mouse button and insert the deleted project using the Insert Project menu User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 67 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 Build Functions Operations related to build in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Build menu in the Main window Building and debugging Rebuilding and debugging Compiling Building Stopping build Rebuilding Batch building Batch rebuilding Updating dependency relationship of files Cleaning Editing Debugging Downloading multiple load module files Selecting build mode Setting build options Setting batch build Making the build mode selection combo box active 5 7 1 Building and debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug executes batch processing from build to debug for the active project If build ends correctly the debugger starts up automatically and loads the load module file created by build processing However if a program is under execution on the debugger an error will occur When an error occurs during build the pro cessing stops and the debugger does not start up The messages output from the language processing tools during build are output to a log file The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop build select the Build menu gt Stop Bu
360. oject is added to the project group at the drop location Other dropped file is considered that was added as a source file and the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added If the project file is dropped at 3 a newly project group is created and the file is added The newly created project group name is the device microcontrollers name used in the added project file Other dropped file is considered that was added as a source file and the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are all projects registered to the workspace Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 111 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Edit window is used to edit source programs Figure 6 8 Edit Window BF GPM _test testic EE void maintyvoid 4 int nEnt t Funcitatu my4 fm olplop NULL for n nt 0 nnt lt 10 nEnt fF char mit m chardnOnt t Funelimi tt f TestData BE ray This section describes the following items Opening Character input Definitions of words Range selection Moving lines layers Copying lines layers Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button Operations perf
361. ol Set This button is not available appears dimmed if the tool set file is read only selected tool set or the tool set file is read only Delete Deletes the tool set name selected in Tool Set from the list also deletes the corresponding tool set file This button is not available appears dimmed if there are no tool set files corresponding to the Remark A file is saved as tool set name extension The extension varies depending on the product used as shown below 78KOR Microcontrollers including libraries tOr 78KO Microcontrollers including libraries tkO 78KOS Microcontrollers including libraries t0s V850 Microcontrollers including libraries t85 The file is saved under NEC Electronics PM in the Application Data folder which is accessible by all users If this folder does not exist it is automatically created when PM is started up for example C Docu ments and Settings All Users Application Data NEC Electronics PM in the case of Windows XP User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 249 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Tool Versions Combinations of tools to be used and their versions are displayed in this area When a tool set name is selected on the Tool Set drop down list the tools included in the tool set and their ver sions are displayed If you wish to change tools to be used and their versions click the Detail Setting button to open the Tool Ver sion Detail Setting dialog box The tools us
362. ol bar User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 213 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area 1 Find What This area specifies the character string to be searched for A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the char acter string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored If there are over ten character strings the oldest one will be deleted The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Posi tion to Find What on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab 2 Of Type This area specifies the name of the file to be searched The wild card can also be used for file names Multiple file names can be specified by separating them with a semi colon Up to 10 file names can be stored 3 Folder This area specifies the folder to be searched A desired folder can be directly input or can be changed by clicking the button to open the Select Folder dialog box Figure 6 60 shows an image of the Select Folder dialog box Figure 6 60 Select Folder Dialog Box Select Folder Folder H Documents and Settings 49 DRIVERS 1386 KPOMS Local test ly NECToolsd H Outlook Express Perl ch Files test is harra ae After selecting a folder in this dialog
363. ombinations of tools to be used and their versions are displayed in this area When a tool set name is selected in the Tool Set drop down list the tools included in the tool set and their ver sions are displayed The tools specified in the Tool Set drop down list and their versions are displayed by default The Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box is opened by double clicking this area or by clicking the Detail Set ting button Tools to be used and their versions can be selected in this dialog box a Tool All the installed tools and tools included in the selected tool set are displayed in this area tools that have not been installed are displayed in gray b Version The tool versions specified in the selected tool set are displayed in this area However Unused is displayed for a tool whose version is not specified in the tool set c Select only Installed Tools If this check box is selected tools that have not been installed are excluded from the Tool Versions list box which corresponds to the tool set selected in the Tool Set default Selected01 is appended to the top of the name of the tool set with which this check box is selected if the tool set name actually exists SelectedOn is appended This check box cannot be selected grayed if there are no dimmed tools all the listed tools have been installed 3 Function buttons lt Back l Returns to the previous wizard step S to the previous
364. ombo box active selecting the Project menu gt Direct Select Active Project makes the Active Project Selection combo box of the toolbar active Active projects can be switched by selecting a project 5 6 16 Changing a project group name To change the project group name select the project group name on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Edit Project Group Name menu that is displayed 5 6 17 Changing a project title To change the project title select the project title on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Edit Project Title menu that is displayed The project title can also be changed with the Project menu gt Project Settings 5 6 18 Changing the tools used To change the tools specified for use in a project included in a project group at once select the project group name on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Select Tools menu that is displayed To change the tools used by an active project select the project title name on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Project Settings menu that is displayed 5 6 19 Moving a project To move the project to another project group follow the procedure shown below on the Project window 1 Select the name of the project title to be moved click the right mouse button and delete the project using the Delete Project menu 2 Select the name of the pr
365. on If Browse button is clicked the Copy Link Directive File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be the copy source is displayed in Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an abso lute path or a relative path using the keyboard The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard d Do Not specify now 2 3 4 5 When no link directive file is specified select this option button A link directive file can be specified by selecting a project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options after exiting the wizard The Link Directive File Name to register Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in this edit box either as an absolute path or a rel ative path using the keyboard Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this
366. on has been selected in this project s was found It is newer than the ver sion that had been selected Is a compiler or assembler used changed The Tools Version Setting dialog opens when YES button is pushed The PM found the compiler of the later version than the using compiler The first s indi cates the project file name and the second s indicates the tool name and its version Yes Opens the Tool Version Settings dialog box No Does nothing and closes the message Do you wish to stop building all projects No will stop building project only The Stop Build command was selected while batch build was being executed Yes Stops all building and return to the active window No Stops only the build currently being executed and execute build for the next project Cancel Cancels stopping build and continues the build s The file was not found Do you wish to build it The load module file downloaded to the debugger could not be found s indicates the load module file name Download it after executing build Yes Downloads after build No Starts the debugger without executing build Cancel Returns to the active window without doing anything This file already exists Do you wish to replace it The file specified to be overwritten and saved by the macro already exists Yes Overwrites the file No Does not overwrite the file User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 369 CHAPTE
367. on of the line from the caret position to the begin ning of the line The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard After the portion is deleted the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line Note that Delete to the Top of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 15 Deleting character strings to the end of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to the End of Line deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard After the portion is deleted the caret position will not be changed Note that Delete to the End of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 16 Selecting a word at the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Word selects a word at the caret position Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 17 Selecting a word to the left of the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Top of Word selects the portion of the wo
368. ong New Area Shanghai P R China P C 200120 Tel 021 5888 5400 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd 12 F Cityplaza 4 12 Taikoo Wan Road Hong Kong Tel 2886 9318 http www hk necel com NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 8175 9600 http www tw necel com NEC Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 238A Thomson Road 12 08 Novena Square Singapore 307684 Tel 6253 8311 http www sg necel com NEC Electronics Korea Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 02 558 3737 http www kr necel com G06 11A
369. only when a real time OS for the microcontrollers used is installed 5 8 3 Dumping the load module file or the object file Selecting the Tool menu gt dump850 opens the dump850 dialog box and starts up the dump command dump850 The results are displayed on the Edit window The object to be analyzed are the load module file of the active project specified with the dump850 dialog box or the object file generated from the source files selected on the active Edit window Project window If the active Edit window is an IDL file the object file generated from the source file indicated by the caret is analyzed The analyzed results are saved under the file name project file name dmp If the same file name already exists the previous file is renamed project file name dmp bak The execution of dump850 can be stopped by using the Esc key In this case the results are not displayed Refer to the CA850 compiler package user s manual for details on dump850 12 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Caution This menu item is available only when a project that uses a V850 microcontroller is active and the CA850 Ver 3 10 or earlier is selected as the tool to be used 5 8 4 Selecting and setting the debugger to be used Selecting the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings opens the Debugger Seitings dialog box The debugger to be used the load module files to be downloaded and other options can be set in t
370. or dialog box opened by clicking the Set Color button c Accentuate RTOS System Calls If this check box is selected the real time OS keywords system calls are displayed in the set color This check box is valid only when a real time OS of a supported version is installed You can select the color with the Color dialog box opened by clicking the Set Color button d Accentuate C Language s Reserved Words If this check box is selected the C language keywords are displayed in the set color The C language keywords are set by default but they can be customized by the user with the Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box opened by clicking the Reserve Words button You can select the color with the Color dialog box opened by clicking the Set Color button e Accentuate Comment Lines If this check box is selected the comment parts are displayed in the set color In an IDL file the comments are highlighted by the comment mark set in Change Source File Name on the File menu You can select the color with the Color dialog box opened by clicking the Set Color button Function buttons Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 325 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit User keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords defined by the user to
371. order can be changed on the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Source files can also be added by directly dragging the source file into the Project window If after a function name has been changed in the Edit window and the function name is updated in the Project window the Edit window change status is undone using the Undo Redo menu items the function name is not updated even if the Project window is made active It is updated when build or save is per formed Include Files folder Include files registered in the project are grouped here Source files that have a dependency relationship with include files are also displayed Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor When the mouse cursor is placed on the include file folder Include Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the file name the file name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up Meaning of icons a File format in other than binary Note Only for projects using a real time OS File created by the configurator The name given by the tool DLL of the real time OS is used as the file name Note Only for projects using Applilet2 File created by the configurator The name given by the tool DLL of the real time OS is used as the file name User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 105 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
372. ore Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that Same Layer Line Up menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 17 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth downward Selecting the Find menu gt Same Layer Line Down moves the caret to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line below the caret in the downward direction if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Note that Same Layer Line Down menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 18 Moving the caret to the position before a jump Selecting the Find menu gt Back Jump moves the caret back to the position immediately before the previous jump This menu item becomes valid if the following jump is performed Mark Jump To the Specific Line To the Specific Line in the Source file To the Top of File To the Index Line 50 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION To the Top Layer at caret To the End of File To t
373. ormed in the Edit window the range from the position where range selection started to the index line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where the range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the index line the range up to the line immediately before the index line is re selected because that higher layer cannot be selected by range selection 5 3 15 Moving the caret to the top layer Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top Layer at caret moves the caret to the top layer line at the caret position When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top layer at the caret position If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the top layer at the caret position the range immediately before that higher layer line is re selected 5 3 16 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth upward Selecting the Find menu gt Same Layer Line Up moves the caret to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line above the caret in the upward direction if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Bef
374. ormed with the right mouse button Scrolling Smart lookup function Drag and drop function Restrictions on the Edit window Opening Select the File menu gt New Select the Build menu gt Edit Select the File menu gt Open and specify the file to be open Double click a icon of the file on the Project window 112 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Character input When editing files in the Edit window you must observe the following character input rules If the Enter key is used a new line is inserted following the current line If at this time the current line does not have any lower layer or if the lower layer has been collapsed the new line will have the same layer as the current line If the current line has a lower layer and the layer is expanded the new line will have the lower layer When you are selecting a range or moving lines by dragging character input is ignored Selecting a line range and then pressing the Tab key causes a Tab code to be inserted at the beginning of the selected lines At this time the Tab code is also inserted at the lines of layer which has been collapsed Selecting a line range and then pressing the Shift Tab key combination causes the Tab code at the beginning of the selected lines to be deleted At this time the Tab code at the lines of layer which has been collapsed is also deleted Definitions of words
375. ot enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 234 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select Active Project dialog box This dialog box is used to select the active project Figure 6 69 Select Active Project Dialog Box Select Active Project select Project 1 Buttonsve main 2 Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Select Active Project Explanation of each area 1 Select Project This area displays the currently selected project name To change the active project select from the drop down list in which all the currently registered project name are displayed Function buttons Makes the selected project active Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 235 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Insert Project dialog box This dialog box is used to insert an existing project into a project group The project added here will be the active project Figure 6 70 Insert Project Dialog Box Insert Project Look in B PM test ey Ed Files test I Macro O other products E ButtonSys prj IE Library pr E zample prj Files of type Project File prj Cancel Help Project Group Mame
376. ot yet assigned a file name or when a file is being edited and not yet saved any functions added as a result of editing are reflected in the smart lookup function as data The timing for creating data used by the smart lookup function is as follows When a file is saved When the Smart Look up Function Use is selected When a file is saved automatically before a build only modified files When a workspace is opened Caution A function name cannot be recognized with the compiler control instructions indicated below When the function name differs according to the value of ifdef void ifdef ENGLISH FncEng else FncJapan endif int Cnt int Mode When function name extends over 2 lines with void Function Name int Cnt int Mode When variable declaration is performed between function name and ifdef ENGLISH int main argc argv int argr char argv In the case of a function name without a return value such as shown below the character on the preceding line are judged to be the return value In such a case declare the function type a def main User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Display specifications The function name candidate and function details displayed by the smart lookup function differ depending on whether the workspace is opened or closed When editing source file affiliated with workspace with
377. owever that whether a related document is preliminary is not indicated in this document Documents related to 78KOR Microcontroller development tools User s Manual SGTOKGA Wai 100 6 Gono u RA78KOR Ver 1 00 Assembler Package Operation U17836E PM Ver 6 30 Project Manager This manual ID78KOR QB Ver 3 20 Integrated Debugger U17839E Users Manual U18416EJ1VOUM T Documents related to V850 Microcontroller development tools User s Manual CA850 Ver 3 00 C Compiler Package U17293E ID850 Ver 3 00 Integrated Debugger Operation U17358E SM850 Ver 2 00 or later System Simulator External Part User Open Interface U14873E Specifications AXBED Vor 220 Real Time OS AXG50 Pro Ver 320 Real Time OS Technical U13772E Task Debugger U17422E RD850 Ver 3 01 Task Debugger U13737E AZ850 Ver 3 30 System Performance Analyzer U17423E PG FP4 Flash Memory Programmer U15260E TW850 Ver 2 00 Performance Analysis Tuning Tool U17241E PM Ver 6 30 Project Manager 8 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 22 1 1 Overview 22 1 2 Terminology 22 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 Functions and Features 23 Positioning of PM 24 Operating Environments 25 Files Created Managed by PM 26 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 27 2 1 Installing PM 27 2 2 Uninstalling PM 27 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING 28 3 1 Starting 28 3 2 Exiting 29 CHA
378. ows Consecutive single byte alphanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding spaces and tabs When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves one word to the right When this check box is not selected if range selection has been performed the caret moves one word to the right and the range from the position where range selection started to the new caret position is re selected If lines have been selected with range selection nothing is performed Note that One Word Right menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 29 Moving the caret one word to the left Selecting the Find menu gt One Word Left moves the caret one word to the left If the caret is positioned to the left end of a line the caret dose not move The definitions of words are as follows Consecutive single byte alphanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding spaces and tabs When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves
379. ox cannot be selected grayed if there are no dimmed tools all the listed tools have been installed 3 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 4 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray 5 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 23 Wizard Flow for Add New Project Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 146 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS dialog box Specify whether or not to use NEC Electronics real time OS This dialog box is displayed only when a real time OS has been selected as the combination of tools to be used in the Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Figure 6 26 Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box Add New Project Step 3 9 Select Real Time 0S Please select the Real Time OS RTOS RTOS 1 Project Informa
380. p 8 9 157 Add New Project Step 9 9 159 Add Other Files 255 Add Project Related Files 253 Add Source Files 251 Add the Macro file 338 Edit Batch Build Settings 278 Build Mode 280 Build Settings 282 Change Selected Source FileName 181 390 Change Selected Source File Names 183 Change Source File Names 179 Change the Macro file 340 Collapse to Specified Layer 225 Copy Link Directive File from 273 Copy Startup File from 267 Customize 320 CVS Commit 240 CVS Log 242 CVS Status 244 CVS Update 238 Debugger Settings 291 dump 850 289 Edit C Language s reserve words 328 EditCommand 287 Edit User keyword 326 Entry Macro Files 336 Expand to Specified Layer 223 File Compare 297 Find in Files 213 Find String 200 Font 318 Font Print 189 Function List 229 Grouping by Keyword 194 Insert File 170 Insert Project 236 Jump to Specified Line 208 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file 210 Layer List 234 Link Directive File 271 Link Directive File to register 275 Load the Macro File 332 Mark Jump 211 New WorkSpace Step 1 9 124 New WorkSpace Step 2 9 126 New WorkSpace Step 3 9 128 New WorkSpace Step 4 9 130 New WorkSpace Step 5 9 132 New WorkSpace Step 6 9 134 New WorkSpace Step 7 9 136 New WorkSpace Step 8 9
381. p e ba Sweeo weirs S Unused Unused Unused Unused v 2o VET Mis Vann Series Software Package V4 00 Enelish Version Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Detail Setting button on the Project Settings dialog box Tool Version Settings tab Click the Detail Setting button or double click the Tool Versions area on the Tool Version Settings dialog box Click the Detail Setting button on the New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Click the Detail Setting button on the Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box Explanation of each area 1 Tool name area Displays the names of the installed tools If the tool name is too long to fit in the field the name is displayed left aligned Pointing to the character string with the pointer causes the character string to pop up User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 261 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Version selection area Selects the version of the tool to be used The version specified in the Tool Version Settings dialog box is selected by default The version specified in the Tool Version Settings dialog box is highlighted or Unused is highlighted if the prod uct with that version has not been installed In addition the version of the product included in the recommended tool set is highlighted by a backg
382. parameter file dependent on the language product may be created for the language pro cessing program Therefore the created file will differ depending on the microcontrollers to be used The make file is created under the name Project file name mak If a make file already exists it is overwritten 5 6 11 Setting project information Selecting the Project menu gt Project Settings opens Project Settings dialog box in which the project information can be set Note that the name of project group can not be changed in the Project Settings dialog box To change the name select the project group name on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Edit Project Group Name menu that is displayed 5 6 12 Adding a source file Selecting the Project menu gt Add Source Files displays the Add Source Files dialog box in which the source file can be added to the active project 5 6 13 Adding a project related file Selecting the Project menu gt Add Project Related Files displays the Add Project Related Files dialog box in which the project related file can be added to the active project 5 6 14 Adding other files Selecting the Project menu gt Add Other Files displays the Add Other Files dialog box in which any file can be added to the active project as other file 66 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 15 Making the active project selection c
383. pear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly O times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of at To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 219 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and
384. pecified file Save Source Files Options dialog box This dialog box is used to set options when a source file is saved Change Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to change the name of the source file to be created from an IDL file being edited to a specified file name Change Selected Source File Name dialog box This dialog box is used to rename the source file selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Change Selected Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to rename multiple source files selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Set Comment Mark dialog box This dialog box is used to change a comment mark for a speci fied file Print dialog box This dialog box is used to print the contents of the window being edited Font dialog box Print This dialog box is used to specify the font and size of the char acters to be printed Set Header Footer dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the contents of the header or footer to be printed 80 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Grouping by Keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to collect lines including a specified character string and display the collected results at the top of the Edit window In the collected results the search key is dis played in the first layer and the collected lines are displayed in the second layer Select the way of Function Prototypes d
385. pening Click the Add button in the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files Explanation of each area 1 Look in This area displays the folder that includes the macro file to be registered The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Path tab 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be added Only a file name with extension imc can be specified 3 Title This area specifies the title of the registered macro Up to 32 characters can be set The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu 338 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Adds the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 339 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to change the stored contents of a macro file Figure 6 139 Change the Macro file Dialog Box Change the Macro file C PM_test Macro Look in E
386. perations have been saved and executes the key operations Opens the Play back the Macro File dialog box Register the Macro Files Registers the macro file and adds to the cascade menu of the Play Back the Register Macro Opens the Entry Macro Files dialog box Play Back the Register Macro Executes the macro registered with the Register the Macro Files 94 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Window menu Cascade Overlaps all the currently open windows with one another in such a way that their titles are visible Tile Horizontally Tiles all the currently open windows horizontally Tile Vertically Tiles all the currently open windows vertically Split Splits the currently active Edit window into two Refer to 5 9 4 Splitting a window To the Next Split Window Moves the caret from the split screen to which the caret is positioned to column 1 of the other split screen To the Next Window Activates the window following the currently active one according to Z order win dow superposition order Note To the Previous Window Activates the window preceding the currently active one according to Z order win dow superposition order Note Window List Displays a list of currently open windows Opens the Window List dialog box Open window information Displays the window title of the window currently being edited and makes the selected window the top window Note This menu i
387. positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Refer to 5 4 2 Demoting layers Expand Collapse Expands Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Expand Expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Note Refer to 5 4 4 Expanding one of the lower layers Collapse Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is posi tioned or the line selected with range selection Note Refer to 5 4 5 Collapsing one of the lower layers Expand All Lower Layers Expands all of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Expand All Expands all of the layers in the active Edit window Collapse All Collapses all of the layers in the active Edit window Expand the Specific Layer Expands a specified number of layers Opens the Expand to Specified Layer dialog box Collapse the Specific Layer Collapses a specified number of layers Opens the Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box Show Index 1 Collapses lower layers and displays the top layer only Note Show Index 2 Collapses the third and subsequent layers and displays the first and second lay ers Note Show Index 3 Collapses the fourth and subsequent layers and displays the first to third layers Note Show Inde
388. quipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under ce
389. r dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Select Project dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the project to be added when a source file is dragged to the Project window while a work space file or project file is open Edit Batch Build Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to select the project for batch build or rebuild and set the build sequence Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to select add and delete build modes Add Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new build mode Build Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set options related to build This dialog box is used to specify the commands used to exe cute any processing required before or after build copying of output files to another folder etc Add Command dialog box This dialog box is used to edit commands specified as required processing either during build execution before or after build processing Select RTOS dialog box This dialog box is used to select the real time OS used by the current active project dump850 dialog box This dialog box is used to activate the dump command dump850 Debugger Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the details of the debugger to be used Register External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to register add change and delete external tools to
390. r dialog box to col lapse a specified number of layers A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified in this dialog box The last setting is displayed in the default con dition When this value is specified for the first time 1 is displayed 5 4 11 Displaying the top layer only Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 1 collapses lower layers and displays the top layer only If the caret is positioned to a layer other than the top layer it will be positioned to the top layer Note that Show Index 1 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 12 Displaying the first and second layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 2 collapses the third and subsequent layers and displays the first and sec ond layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the second layer it will be positioned to the second layer Note that Show Index 2 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 13 Displaying the first to third layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 3 collapses the fourth and subsequent layers and displays the first to third layers lf the caret is positioned to a layer below the third layer it will be positioned to the third layer Note that Show In
391. rd that is to the left of the caret posi tion with range selection Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the Top of Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 18 Selecting a word to the right of the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the End of Word selects the portion of the word that is to the right of the caret position with range selection Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the End of Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 19 Selecting a range to the top of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Top of Line selects the range from the caret position to the beginning of the line is selected with range selection Note that Select to the Top of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 45 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 20 Selecting a range to the end of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the End of Line selects the range from the caret position to the end of the line with range selection Note
392. registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by clicking the File Name button or by directly inputting the name in the The Link Directive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard Refer to APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE for the detail of the link directive file to be created Caution The link directive file that is created must be customized in accordance with the target specification or user defined sections 134 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is used select this option button lf Browse button is clicked the Link Directive File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register Jedit box as an absolute path The link directive file name to be registered can be changed by directly inputting the name in the The Link Direc tive File Name to register edit box using the keyboard If this option button is selected the File Name button cannot be selected c Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is copied and used select this option button Specify the link directive file name to be the copy source and the link directive file name to be the copy destinati
393. ring within the source files and the header files regis tered to a project Fixes the location of the OutPut window Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the OutPut window When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window Multiple files can be dropped User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 121 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace wizard This wizard is used to create a new workspace and its project This wizard displays the following dialog boxes Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed New WorkSpace Step 1 9 Workspace Information dialog box New WorkSpace Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box
394. rkspace file and save the existing file with the extension bak fant ee Returns to the window without doing anything Q2011 s This folder cannot be found Do you wish to create it Cause The specified folder does not exist s indicates the specified folder name bana by User Yes Creates the folder No Does not create the folder Q2100 Message Specified to delete in the after grouping Delete the lines and clear the undo buffer if you select Yes Don t delete if you select No Cause When grouping by keyword an operation to delete after grouping was specified Lona Pamir User Yes Deletes the grouped lines from the Edit window of the original search document fant ee Groups the lines without deleting Q2101 Message There were the read only source file s line in the deleting lines Do you wish to delete it A Read Only source file is included in the range to be deleted Action User Yes Deletes the lines that contain a read only source file also No Does not delete Q2102 Message Do you wish to update the function prototypes The previous prototypes will be deleted as update Cause An attempt was made to create a prototype declaration more than once Action by User Yes Creates a new prototype declaration No Returns to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed e
395. rns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 137 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE New WorkSpace Step 8 9 Select Debugger dialog box Select the debugger which debug the project to be created newly The specification of the item marked with in this dialog box can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected The debugger specified with this dialog box can be changed after exiting this wizard Figure 6 20 New WorkSpace Step 8 9 Select Debugger Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 8 9 Select Debugger Please select the Debugger 1 Workspace Information Debugger 2 Select Tools 1 RS hit 360 W200 System Simulator 9 Select Real Time OS 4 Startup File Ge File name l 5 Register Mode Gh 2 C Program Files NEG Electronics Tools SM for V850 V2 OO bini S ME amp Link Directive Filet T Setup Source Files Option eee select Debugger 3 po __________i_ 9 Confirmation GH Vo Microcontrollers Only 4 62 You can change the selected Debugger using Tool gt Select Debugger Back Cancel Help 1 Debugger 2 3 4 5 138 Select the debugger to be used from the drop down list All the NEC Electronics debuggers that have been installed are displayed in the drop down list together with the corresponding microcontrollers name W
396. rograms in ROM and a hex converter Starting editor PM can be used to create or modify the source files to be used for a project by the editor function which PM pro vides Furthermore an external editor can also be registered and started form PM Starting a debugger PM can be used to start NEC Electronics debugger or system simulator When a correction of the source pro gram is issued from the debugger PM displays a specified line of the specified file Registering and executing external tools Other applications the user often uses can be included in the menu of PM and started from this menu Linking with a source management tool Version management of the source program in the software development process can be performed more easily by linking with a source management tool Linking with a source analysis tool Quality management of the source program in the software development process can be performed more easily by linking with a commercial source analysis tool Correspondence of comments with specification PM supports a function that is effective in adjustment of specification at the processes of its review idea proces sor function This makes it possible to reflect the adjusted contents to a source program as comments User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 4 Positioning of PM 24 Figure 1 2 shows the relationship between the software used for program development and PM Figure 1 2
397. round color Multiple versions cannot be selected nor can the version be left unselected 3 Brief description area Indicates which tool set the background color highlighting the version in the version selection area corresponds to Function buttons OK Reflects the modified contents in the Tool Version Settings dialog box if the version setting of a tool to be used has been modified Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 262 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Properties dialog box This dialog box is used to displays the path information and read attribute of the selected file Figure 6 86 Properties Dialog Box Properties File Name test c Path Name CAF M test 1 Last Update 2005 08 30 2341 24 Attribute ReadOnly IDL File SA AWBBO test Test idl This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Propertes with a file function name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Information area a File Name and Path Name Displays the name and the location of the selected file with the full path b Last Update Displays the date and time of the last update c Attribute This is displayed when the selected file has a read attribute d IDL File If the selected fi
398. rtain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electron
399. s Only menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 14 Saving and closing all files Selecting the File menu gt Save and Close All saves all of the files currently open in the Edit window and then closes the windows The Project window and the OutPut window are not closed Note that Save and Close All menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 15 Closing all windows Selecting the File menu gt Close All closes all the Edit window currently open If any of the contents have been changed a message for confirming whether the changes are to be saved is displayed The Project window and the Out Put window are not closed Note that Close All menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 16 Closing all windows without saving Selecting the File menu gt Destroy All closes all the Edit window currently open without saving The OutPut window and the Project window are not closed 5 1 17 Changing a source file name Selecting the File menu gt Change Source File Name opens the Change Source File Names dialog box in which the name of the sour
400. s following a const statement are indented h struct The lines following a struct statement are indented i Function The lines from that following a function definition line to the end of the function are indented j PreProcessor The lines from that following a preprocessor instruction to that preceding the next preprocessor instruction or to that preceding endif are indented However elseif is not hierarchically organized Use elif 2 Preview This area displays samples of how the items currently selected by Apply Layer Rule are subjected to the layer rule 3 Apply Layer Rule only the Range You Selected This check box is displayed only if this dialog box is opened by selection the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule This check box becomes valid when the Apply Layer Rule menu item is performed with a range selection in the Edit window If this check box is selected the layer rule is applied to the specified range only Function buttons Applies the layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 227 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Cautions When the layer rule is applied the undo buffer is cleared This means that the status existing prior to applying the layer rule cannot be restored If Apply Layer Rule only to the Range You Selected check box is sel
401. s the target of the smart lookup function using the keyword file provided by the real time OS 1 2 List of candidate function names The function names that match the specified number of characters are displayed Up to 1998 function name char acters can be recognized The maximum number of user registered function candidates is 64 To use this function select the Function List display check box on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab And also the number of characters is specified with the Display the List at more than xxx character s on the same Edit tab ar CAPM _test test 1 c Chaneed 5 if Funclk l ieia Displays a list of candidate function names m 7 Funcd i a void Funci int nEnt Th Caution If there is only one candidate in the function name list the list is not displayed even by pressing the Up arrow key and Down arrow keys on the keyboard To hide the list press the Esc key Detailed display of functions When a is entered if the character string preceding the matches the name of an existing function the details of the function type return values and arguments are displayed ae CAPM test test c Changed Displays type return values arguments of the function ftTestData Funck User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 115 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Data creation 116 When a new file is created and n
402. se the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Action by User Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS FO215 Message Failed to Repeat commands Cannot repeat over there Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application Cause The redo operation could not be executed successfully because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Action by User Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS FO216 Message This selection is too many characters for copy operation Please select more small range Cause Action by User The characters copied to the clipboard exceeded 16 Mbytes Decrease the selected characters and try again F0217 Message Over the max instructions 64 PM has stopped recording When recording key operations the recorded instructions exceeded 64 which is the maxi Cause mum number of recordable instructions Action by User Record key operations within 64 instructions F0218 Message Over the max instructions 64 PM has stopped loading the macro file Yd s Cause When reading a macro file the recorded instructions exceeded 64 which is the maximum number of recordable instructions d indicates the line with the error and s indicates the character string with the error Action by User Decrease the number of instructions in the macro file and execute again User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 351 CHAPTE
403. ser The specified folder name has a relative path Specified the folder name with an absolute path E1027 Message s Cannot register the filename with space character Please regist the file after rename it When adding source file a file name with one byte spaces was specified s indicates the Cause specified folder name Action by User Rename the file using a file name without one byte spaces and register it again E1028 Message Please specify the same file extension of copy file Cause The extension of the specified file name to be the copy source and the file name to be regis tered differ Action by User Specify the same extension for the file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered E1029 Message The file names of copy file and register file are identical Please specify the different file name to register Cause Copying is not possible because the specified file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered are the same Action by User Specify the same extension for the file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered E1030 Message s Cannot register the file name with space character Please register the file after rename it Do you wish to continue to add source files When adding source file a file name with one byte spaces was specified s indicates the file name This message is displayed when multiple source files are selected and
404. set 5 7 17 Making the build mode selection combo box active selecting the Build menu gt Direct Build Mode Selection makes the Build Mode Selection combo box of the toolbar active The build mode can be selected User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 71 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 Tool Management Operations related to tools in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Tool menu in the Main window Setting options for each tool Selecting the real time OS to be used Dumping the load module file or the object file Selecting and setting the debugger to be used Registering external tools Starting up external tools Comparing files Inserting device file Setting environment Setting font Customizing settings Recording key operations Playing back key operations Saving key operations Commands corresponding to key operations Reading key operations Executing macro Registering macro Executing registered macro 5 8 1 Setting options for each tool The Tool menu displays the menu items for setting the tool options executed on PM Refer to the user s manual of each tool for the operation of the selected menu 5 8 2 Selecting the real time OS to be used Selecting the Tool menu gt Select RTOS opens the Select RTOS dialog box and select the real time OS used by the active project Caution This menu item is available
405. specified function name is selected Double clicking the left mouse button or clicking the jump button after selecting a function name in Function area jumps to the function definition line in the Edit window Note that because this area lists the functions in the active Edit window when multiple Edit windows are open the contents of the function list will be update each time the window focus is moved 2 Function Cautions The function name is not recognized because the function name differs according to the value of ifdef void ifdef ENGLISH FncEng else FncJapan endif int Cnt int Mode The function name is not recognized because the function name covers two lines due to void Function Name int Cnt int Mode 230 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function name is not recognized because variable declaration is performed between function name and ifdef ENGLISH int main argc argv int argr char argv User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 231 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save the Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to save the functions displayed in the Function List dialog box to a file Figure 6 67 Save the Function List Dialog Box Saye the Function List Save ini B PM test fi EEF iS Files test 9 Macro Syother_products File name test txt Save as type Function List Tae Fileth txts Cancel
406. splaying the build bar Selecting the View menu gt Build Bar toggles the build bar between on and off 5 5 5 Displaying the option bar Selecting the View menu gt Option Bar toggles the option bar between on and off 5 5 6 Displaying the external tool bar Selecting the View menu gt Ex tool Bar toggles the external tool bar between on and off 62 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 5 7 Displaying the status bar Selecting the View menu gt Status Bar toggles the status bar between on and off 5 5 8 Displaying the Project window Selecting the View menu gt Project Window toggles the Project window between on and off 5 5 9 Displaying the OutPut window Selecting the View menu gt Output Window toggles the OutPut window between on and off 5 5 10 Displaying an object as contents or icon Selecting the View menu gt Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon toggles the display format of an embedded object between contents and icon When an object displayed as contents is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Icon Selecting this menu item causes the object to be displayed as an icon When an object displayed as an icon is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Content Selecting this menu item causes the object to be displayed as contents 5 5 11 Displaying all objects as contents selecting the V
407. st Mest c ae Command Mf Filenames 2 Hel 2 eveexe update MPa Ne lp This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Update Explanation of each area 1 File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file 2 Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the drop down list 238 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the OutPut window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable
408. stored default Follow Layer Rule When a new source file is read the layer rule is applied to the file c Layer Indent No Replace When a new source file is saved the indent of layer is not replaced default Replace Tab The layer indent is replaced by a Tab and the source file is saved User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 305 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace Space The layer indent is replaced by a one byte space and the source file is saved Not Replace Layer A layer indent is not used for a layer higher than the one specified d Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File If this check box is selected Tab characters and two byte spaces are replaced by one byte spaces when the source file is saved 6 Window tab This tab is used to make settings related to windows Figure 6 117 PM Settings Dialog Box Window Tab Window Window Size Memorize of Windows Position C Maximize i Main Window 2 Default of PM ee C Default of Windows v Fe a b C Previous Size Mw Replace Window mw Function Window C lways Maximize PM a Window Size This area is used to select the size of the Edit window Maximize Opens the Edit window in its maximum size Default of PM Opens the Edit window in the size of the PM screen which is not its maximum size Default of Windows Opens the Edit window in cascade to show each caption default However the Edit window opens in the default si
409. t User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 385 APPENDIX C SHORTCUT KEYS Table C 9 lists the shortcut keys in the default condition of the PM Table C 9 List of Shortcut Keys Default Condition Fie New C C C C e a Pe ft Re i fom o ea e o C a Pete ft Decemewos fenm a e eeens fem Note 1 Note 1 e A C e Tote Topofline Rome fToteEndofline fe O S Tote TopofFie femto oo Tomeer femea S FTotheindextine ieman FTomematcing Brace feo eww OT fTomeTagrie ema S C a Note 1 Brasem fes o 386 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C SHORTCUT KEYS fare Proms C Demos E Input on the numeric keypad Show Index 1 Ctrl 1 Show Index 2 Ctrl 2 Show Index 3 Ctrl 3 Note 1 pamo FL comple CRT ee oo a oo ewww e o a E a a emae eee Eemnes ee Note 1 This menu item is not displayed by default To display this menu item on the toolbar change the setting by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Note 2 The settings of the above shortcut keys except for some keys can be changed on the Keyboard tab in the Customize dialog box which is opened by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize The shortcut keys can also be checked in the Shortcut List dialog box This dialog box lists modified shortcut key settings and newly set shortcut keys User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 387 APPENDIX D QUANTITATIVE LIMIT LIST Table D 10 lists the quantitative limit list of
410. t Step 5 9 dialog box 151 Build Functions 68 Add New Project Step 6 9 dialog box 153 Build menu 93 Add New Project Step 7 9 dialog box 155 Build Mode dialog box 280 Add New Project Step 8 9 dialog box 157 Build Settings 71 93 Add New Project Step 9 9 dialog box 159 Build Settings dialog box 282 Add Other Files dialog box 255 Add Other Files 92 Add Project Related Files 92 Add Project Related Files dialog box 253 Add Source Files 92 Add Source Files dialog box 251 Add the Macro file dialog box 338 Change Source File Names dialog box 179 Adding a project related file 66 Change the Macro file dialog box 340 Character input 113 Clean 70 93 Close 37 87 C Cascade 76 95 Change Selected Source File Name dialog box 181 Change Selected Source File Names dialog box 183 Change Source FileName 39 88 Adding a source file 66 Adding other files 66 Apply Layer Rule 61 91 Close All 39 88 B Close Workspace 38 87 Back Jump 50 90 Collapse 59 91 Batch Build 69 93 Collapse All 59 91 Build Collapse the Specific Layer 60 91 Batch Build Settings 93 Collapse This Layer 61 91 Batch Build Settings 71 93 Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box 225 Batch Rebuild 70 93 Commands corresponding to key operations 74 Build 69 93 Compile
411. t condition This specification will be reflected in the Build menu gt Select Build Mode Debug Build Creates the object file with the debug information Release Build Creates the object file without the debug information E a User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 97 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Option bar The option bar consists of the buttons that are related to the option settings The order of display of the buttons depends on the loaded tool 78K Microcontrollers st eal Lk foc ke Ecl Table 6 4 Option Bar 78K Microcontrollers Opens the Structured Assembler Options dialog box El except 78KOR Microcontrollers Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Linker Options dialog box Opens the Object Converter Options dialog box x Opens the List Converter Options dialog box sf Opens the Compiler Options dialog box V850 Microcontrollers a E E E E E E ea s co Roei Hx eed Table 6 5 Option Bar V850 Microcontrollers Button Function a eee E pe 4 External tool bar E lea Ep EE E E The external tool bar consists of the icons that are registered with the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool The order of display of the icons depends on the order registered with Register Ex tool menu item 98 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window display area This area is displayed various windows For details
412. t exist it is automatically created when PM is started up for example C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data NEC Electronics PM in the case of Windows XP 2 Tool Versions Combinations of tools to be used and their versions are displayed in this area When a tool set name is selected on the Tool Set drop down list the tools included in the tool set and their ver sions are displayed The tools included in the default tool set selected on the Tool Set drop down list and their versions are displayed by default The Tool Version Detail Setting dialog box is opened by clicking the Detail Setting button Tools to be used and their versions can be selected in this dialog box a Tool All the installed tools and tools included in the selected tool set are displayed in this area tools that have not been installed are displayed in gray b Version The tool versions specified in the selected tool set are displayed in this area However Unused is displayed for a tool whose version is not specified in the tool set c Select only Installed Tools If this check box is selected tools that have not been installed are excluded from the Tool Versions list box which corresponds to the tool set selected in the Tool Set default Selected01 is appended to the top of the name of the tool set with which this check box is selected if the tool set name actually exists SelectedOn is appended This check box
413. t of the IDL file from an old version Ver 3 xx of idea L is illegal or the IDL file is damaged Action by User Check if the specified file is damaged or not Message s Failed to save this project file Make sure that disk space or this file has broken or this file using with other application FO112 F0113 Cause The disk space is full the file is damaged or the file may be being used by another applica tion s indicates the file name Action by User Check the disk capacity verify that the file is not damaged and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again Message s Cannot be found this file Please check the NEC Electronics tool is installed correctly Cause The tool including the tool DLL displayed in the message could not be found s indicates the file name Action by User Check if the tool is installed If not reinstall it Message Failed to create temporary file Make sure that work folder exist or the disk is full Cause When creating a temporary file the disk capacity is smaller than the volume of the file to be F0114 F0115 written or the operating folder specified in the PM Settings dialog box does not exist Action by User Check the disk capacity or the operating folder and execute again Message Failed to open the temporary file Cause The temporary file could not be found or the file is damaged F0116 Action
414. t operation Redo Cancels the effect of an Undo operation Refer to 5 2 2 Canceling an Undo operation Cut Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them Copy Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Cut for Append Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them This command does not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the cut potion to the end of the contents of the clipboard Note Copy for Append Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard This command does not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the cut potion to the end of the contents of the clipboard Note Image Copy Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard exactly as they are displayed on the screen Refer to 5 2 7 Copying character strings as a screen image Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the caret position Refer to 5 2 8 Inserting the contents of clipboard Paste Special Inserts the contents of the clipboard by the specified format at the caret position User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Deletes the character string or the lines selected with the range selection Delete the Word Deletes a single word at the caret positio
415. tatus in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 158 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 9 9 Confirmation dialog box The contents of the setting are confirmed and the wizard for creating a new project is terminated Figure 6 32 Add New Project Step 9 9 Confirmation Dialog Box Add New Project Step 9 9 Confirmation Create the workspace and the project as follows Project Group Name ButtonSys Project File Name Buttorsy s or Project Folder GA YODO Series Device Name uPOOS003 Tool Set Name Selected017V850 Microcontrollers Software Package 4 004 Tool Versions A850 3 00 LO W101 SMSO 13 00 h for W850 12 00 Real Time 05 Mot used startup File GAF testheorths lt 1 Confirmation area 2 3 1 Project Information 2 Select Tools 3 Select Real Time 05 4 Startup File 5 Register Mode ti 6 Link Directive File T setup Source Files o Select Debugger 20 Confirmation E VS50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 The information set by this wizard for creating a new project is displayed here If there are no errors in settings click the Finish button to terminate this wizard The workspace and the project file belonging to that workspace will then be created in accordance with the displayed information Also generates a make file project fil
416. te key cannot be changed However keys other keys than the Delete key can also be assigned If the Edit menu Object command is allocated to a shortcut key the shortcut key allocated to the Object menu item is not displayed 2 Menu tab This tab sets the options for menus Figure 6 128 Customize Dialog Box Menu Tab Menu Menu a Reset Menu List Wiew Menu Ah Oper Inzert file 3 Add gt gt Close New Workspace b Open Workspace Remove save Workspace Close Workspace a Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to be added from the drop down list b Menu List This area lists menu items that can be included in the menu selected in Menu Select a menu item to be set c View Menu This area displays the menu items currently specified for the menu selected in Menu Returns the configuration of the selected menu to the default state Moves the menu item selected in View Menu up Moves the menu item selected in View Menu down 322 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Toolbar tab This tab sets the options for the toolbar Figure 6 129 Customize Dialog Box Toolbar Tab Toolbar Menu Toolbar a StandardBar a Reset c Menu List Buttons fe Recent File h LU New ta Open d mj DAVE np Down Separators Menu This area is used
417. tem in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings for the Window menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 10 Help menu Tool Help Displays the help file for each tool The menu item names differ for each tool When a project is opened its menu items are added PM Help Starts the PM help Starts the PM help to display the topic of the Main window Current Window Starts the PM help to display the topic of the currently active window Shortcut List Lists the shortcut keys specified for the PM menu items Opens the Shortcut List dialog box NEC Electronics Microcontrollers Web Accesses the NEC microcontrollers web site http www necel com micro index_e html External HELP 1 Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 1 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Settings External HELP 2 Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 2 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Settings External HELP 3 Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 3 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Settings About PM Displays the version information about PM User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 95 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool bar The tool bar is a collection of buttons and combo boxes that can execute often used commands with a single actio
418. ter string with the syntax error Action by User Correct the character string syntax and try again 362 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM Number E1617 E1618 E1700 E1701 E1702 E1703 E1704 E1705 E1706 E1707 E1708 E1709 Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User Message Cause Action by User CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Description Invalid option d s Invalid options were set for a macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Specify valid options and try again Invalid command d s There was an invalid instruction when executing a macro file d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the invalid instruction Set the correct macro instruction and try again s Failed to start up the ex tool Make sure that the correct path and file name given The external tool could not be started up s indicates the full path name for the external tool Check the set path and verify that the external tool exists The Ex Editor was not entered An external editor is not set Set an extern
419. tes a function defined in the IDL file being edited as a prototype declaration This IDL file must be that which has a source file and divides the source file in units of first layers The header file name to be created can be directly input in Header file Name or can be specified in the Select Include File dialog box displayed by selecting the button The default include file extension is h Insert the include sentence to the each source file This option is enabled if Make header file of Function Prototypes is selected When a header file is newly created the include statement set header file name is added to the top of each first layer source file Function buttons Generates the prototype declaration of a function in the specified way Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions In the following cases a prototype declaration may not be created correctly If a created prototype declaration is copied and pasted the pasted prototype declaration is not updated If the prototype declaration created in the first layer is brought to a lower layer the prototype declaration created initially becomes a different declaration When a prototype declaration is created undo buffer is cleared Therefore the original state cannot be restored A function name cannot be recognized with the control instructions indicated below When the funct
420. the Play back the Macro File dialog box in which a key operation is read from the specified file imc and played back 5 8 18 Registering macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files opens the Entry Macro Files dialog box in which the specified file imc can be registered to a key 5 8 19 Executing registered macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back the Register Macro plays back the macro registered with Register the Macro Files User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 15 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 9 Window Management Operations related to windows in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Window menu in the Main window Arranging windows so they overlap Arranging windows horizontally Arranging windows vertically Splitting a window Moving the caret to the other split window Activating the next window Activating the previous window Displaying a list of windows 5 9 1 Arranging windows so they overlap Selecting the Window menu gt Cascade overlaps all currently displayed windows with one another in such a way that their titles are visible cascading 5 9 2 Arranging windows horizontally Selecting the Window menu gt Tile Horizontally tiles all currently displayed windows horizontally 5 9 3 Arranging windows vertically Selecting the Window menu gt Tile Vertically tiles all currently displayed
421. the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Checking this check box downloads the debug target files of the projects belonging to the same project group as the currently active project following the files specified by Debug Target File This is a function corresponding to the multiple load module files download function of the debugger Caution This check box becomes valid only when a project that uses a V850 Microcontrollers device is active b Debug Target File List Select the debug target files to be downloaded in the same group If the Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group check box is selected the files selected here are downloaded when the debugger starts up following the files specified by Debug Target File When the files specified here are downloaded the symbol and CPU resets are not executed The debug target files set in each project are displayed on the list Therefore to change the debug target files in each project make the project that generates the corresponding debug target files active and open this dialog box Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 292 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to register add change and delete external tools to be used Up to 10 tools can be registered The
422. the IDL file were not set in the first line in the source file The source file name has not been set in the Change Source File Names dialog box E1011 E1012 E1013 Action by User Using Change Source File Name set the same mark for the comment in the source file with the build error as the comment line being used in the source file Message This file was not the source file by IDL file corresponding to the specific IDL file Cause When the IDL file that included the specified source file could not be found during tag jump an IDL file that was not corresponding to the source file was specified in the Select IDL File E1014 dialog box Action by User Specify an IDL file that is corresponding to the source file Message The selected IDL file cannot be found Cause When the IDL file that created the specified source file could not be found during tag jump the IDL file could not be found in the Select IDL File dialog box Action by User Select an existing IDL file Message The IDL file corresponding to the source file was not be found Choose the IDL file Alterna tively select Source button to use the source file itself Cause During tag jump the IDL file that was registered in the specified source file could not be found Action by User Select the original IDL file or open the source file Message The Specific drive for the IDL source files cannot be found Do you wish to save the IDL source files t
423. the line s is copied with either of the following marks displayed gt Copies a single line only a Copies multiple lines Dragging the mark of a line with a lower layer causes the line and the lower layer to be copied Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button The operation performed by double clicking the mouse button can be specified as either of the following with the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab Expands a collapsed layer or collapses an expanded layer Selects a word range Operations performed with the right mouse button When you click the right mouse button in the Edit window the following menu items are displayed These menu items can be changed with the Tool menu gt Customize 114 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Scrolling The operation of scrolling can be specified with the Tool menu gt PM Settings Scroll tab Also the scroll bars can be toggled between on and off by specifying with the Tool menu gt PM Settings View tab Smart lookup function The smart look up function helps users input data by displaying a list of function names after just a part of the code is written during coding To use the smart lookup function select the Smart Look up Function Use check box on the Tool menu gt PM Set tings Edit tab Note When using a real time OS the system call name also is regarded a
424. the source files described in the list file are added to the project A list file is a text file with a file name described on each line Ist or a CSV file csv User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 251 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Add Files from Folder Opens the Brows for Folder dialog box from which the source files to be added are spec ified in the folder unit All of the source files in the selected folder are added to the project 252 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Project Related Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add project related files to a project Figure 6 80 Add Project Related Files Dialog Box Add Project Related Files main Look in E PM test rk Ez E Files test 3 Macro yother_products E crth o IE ortho Files of type Object fiesto Cancel Hep Open As Object files This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Add Project Related Files Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Project Related Files with the Project Related Files folder selected in the Project window Explanation of each area 1 Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the project related files to be added from the drop down list 2 File name and Files of type Specify the name of the pro
425. these drop down lists are invalid 4 Function buttons This button is always disabled Next gt Opens the next wizard Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box 162 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings Step 2 3 Select Tools dialog box Specify the tool to be used in this dialog box Figure 6 35 Project Settings Step 2 3 Select Tools Dialog Box Project Settings Step 2 3 Select Tools Tool Set SelectedO1VG50 Microcontrollers Software Package V4 00 Enelish Versions nd Save Tool Versions Version The following tools have been excluded from selection because they are not ANI WM Installed W300 STK850 IDS50 IDS50N Wy TwiS5O abt for Wool w200 Iw Select only Installed Tools Detail Setting Back Cancel Help 1 Tool Set The combination of tools to be used and their versions is regarded as a tool set and the tool set name can be selected from the drop down list The existing tool set and recommended tool set 78Kx Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the 78K Microcontrollers and V850 Microcontrollers Software Package Vx xx in the case of the V850 Microcontrollers are listed on the drop down list If the tool set has been changed in the Tool Version
426. ting file the 65th and subsequent keywords are ignored Opens the Save Keyword File dialog box and saves the keywords to the keyword file kwd Sets the user keywords Does not enable the specified items and closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 327 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords for highlighting of reserved words in C language The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set Figure 6 133 Edit C Language s reserve words Dialog Box Edit G Laneuaee s reserve words Keywords o Page 1 2 gt pe pe pa static fetruct fewitch typedef Cancel hitialize This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Click the Reserve Words button on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab Explanation of each area 1 Keywords Specify keywords directly Up to 64 keywords with 32 or fewer one byte characters can be set Function Displays the previous page Displays the next page 328 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Initialize Erases all specified keywords and displays default reserved words only Reserved words by default __asm auto break case char const continue default do double else enum extern
427. tion 2 Select Tools 1 gt gt Select Real Time OS 4 Startup Filet 5 Register Mode tt 6 Link Directive File T Setup Source Files 6 Select Debugger J Gontir mation GH VS50 Microcontrollers Only 4 62 Please select the Real Time OS RTOS from NEG Electronics to be used Only the installed RTOS from NEG Electronics can be selected Back Cancel Help 1 RTOS When using the NEC Electronics real time OS select the name of real time OS when not using that select Not use from the drop down list Not use and all the names of the real time OSs for the NEC Electronics V850 Microcontrollers that have been specified in the Add New Project Step 2 9 Select Tools dialog box are displayed on the drop down list If the name of the real time OS to be used is selected the RTOS Settings button becomes valid and clicking this button opens the dialog box for setting the selected real time OS in detail Refer to the user s manual of the real time OS for details on the setting 2 Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area 3 Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 147 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4
428. tion and the top line the range up to the line immediately before the line with that higher layer is re selected 5 3 13 Moving the caret to the end of file Selecting the Find menu gt To the End of File moves the caret to the end of the last line of a file When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the end of the last line When this check box is not selected if range selection has been performed the range from the position where range selection started to the last line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the last line the range immediately before that higher layer line is re selected User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 49 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 14 Moving the caret to the index line Selecting the Find menu gt To the Index Line moves the caret to the top of the index line at the current caret position line with a layer higher by one When Release Range Selected Before Jump is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed in the Edit window the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top of the index line When this check box is not selected if range selection has been perf
429. tion of all the target source files has finished Prompt Message Box as Build Finished When build is finished a message box is displayed default If this box is not selected end of build is indicated only by a sound User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 283 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Pre Build Process tab 284 If there is any processing required prior to build conversion processing or backing up of source files this process ing is set here The set items are always executed when build is executed The order of execution is from the top of the list Commands can be specified in the Add Command dialog box by clicking the Add button Figure 6 100 Build Settings Dialog Box Pre Build Process Tab Pre Build Process Command copy citesti libitest lb c ltest Edit Remove ith BIE Add Opens the Add Command dialog box The specified command is inserted to the currently selected position in the command list box Edit Opens the Add Command dialog box Changes the command contents selected in the Command list box to the edited contents Deletes the command selected in the command list box Moves the selected command up within the command list Moves the selected command down within the command list User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 After Build Process tab If there is any processing required after build copying of output files to another folder etc
430. tion of each area 1 Find What This area specifies a search key A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the char acter string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored If there are over ten search keys the oldest one will be deleted The search keys can be saved into an IDL file by checking Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab The setting of the search key s can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What check box on the same tab 200 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Direction Specify a search direction a b Up Starts an upward search toward the top of the file from the second character to the rightmost one of the character string in the range selection or from the end of the lines in the range selection Down Starts a downward search toward the end of the file from the second character to the leftmost one of the charac ter string in the range selection or from the beginning of the lines in the range selection default 3 Search options area a Find from Top End of Line The search does not start from the caret position If Up is selected the search starts from the last line If Down is se
431. tion prototypes Inserting a new object Setting links for objects Object User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 41 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 1 Canceling an edit operation Selecting the Edit menu gt Undo cancels the effect of an edit operation and restores the previous state Up to 1024 edit operations can be undone Undo is effective for the following edit operations Entry of characters into the Edit window The key input is canceled for each one character including the Tab Delete BackSpace and Enter keys File gt Insert file Edit gt Cut Edit gt Paste Edit gt Paste Special Edit gt Delete Edit gt Delete the Line Edit gt Insert New Object Replacement of a character string using Find gt Replace except Replace All Copying of lines by dragging of mouse Movement of lines by dragging of mouse Insertion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Deletion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Layer gt Promote Layer gt Demote 5 2 2 Canceling an Undo operation Selecting the Edit menu gt Redo cancels the effect of an Undo operation and restores the previous state Up to 1024 edit operations can be redone Redo is effective for the following edit operations Entry of characters into the Edit window The key input is canceled for each one character including
432. to a workspace file prw and refers to it Project A project is a unit managed by PM It indicates an application system developed under PM and its environment PM saves the information such as the source files target device name tool options for creating a load module and editor or debugger to be used for the application system into each project file prj as project information and refers to it Build or debug is performed in project units Therefore the project to be built or debugged have to be set as active project by selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project 22 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Project group Multiple registered projects can be arranged with related projects in a group Note that each project to be registered in a project group must target a common device i e only one device file can be assigned to a project group IDL file An IDL file is a file used to save the layer information for PM idea L information file 1 3 Functions and Features The major functions and features of PM are as follows Managing multiple projects PM can manage multiple project files collectively by using concepts such as workspace and project group Starting a builder PM can be used to start tools required for generating application systems a compiler structured assembler only 78KO or 78KOS Microcontrollers assembler linker ROM ization processor necessary for storing p
433. to be noted In addition the screen image of the window or dialog box is illustrated Item of related operation are also explained Opening Explains how to open the window wizard or dialog box If two of more methods of opening are listed the window or dialog box can be opened by any of them Explanation of each area Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box Function buttons Explains the operation of each button in the window or dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 85 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Main window is the first window to be opened after PM is started To use PM start operation from this window Title bar ni PM sample pre OutPut Eti File Edit Find Laver Wiew Project Figure 6 2 Main Window Menu bar Tool bar Window display area TBR S 2 ae bel SlQ E main ButtonSys Debue Build 5 ProjectWindow Files Memo Ek CAPM test testtc les ButtonSys 2 Project s main ES Source Files GL E testl c l E test2 c H E test c o o BE crits H E Include Files E Test2h LE Testi h E E Project Related Files E p E crtN2 s g m zample dir 9 Other Files H E Library Source Files H E Include Files Project Related Files i crtho i E Other Files g ServoSys 2 Projectie For Help press F Status bar
434. together with the corresponding microcontrollers name When a debugger is selected from this list the file name of the debugger is displayed in the File Name text box and the selected debugger will start up automatically when a debug operation is executed If you wish to change the debugger to be used after exiting the wizard select the Tool menu gt Debugger Set ting File name The file name of the debugger to be used for debugging is displayed When the debugger is selected by the Debugger drop down list that file name is displayed with the path automatically This text box cannot be edited Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger If this specification is omitted no option is specified for starting up the debugger Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 157 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous s
435. tomatically saved in the folder specified by the environmental variable Temp while it is being edited Don t Save Auto backup is not executed default Save The File A temporary file is created each set time The time can be set in 1 minute units from 1 to 120 If PM is exited incorrectly due to an unexpected event at startup this temporary file is opened when PM is started up next time The temporary file is automatically deleted when PM is exited correctly User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 303 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Recent tab This tab is used to make settings related to files Figure 6 115 PM Settings Dialog Box Recent Tab Recert a gt i Recent File f Recent Workspace ESEE e EE Humber of Fixed Recent List Recent List Col PM test test ic CPM test Library pr CAFM test Buttonsys dir 2p Down ddi Delete a History type selection area Specifies the type of history to be edited Recent File A list of the file names displayed to File menu gt File History is displayed in the Recent List default Recent Workspace In the Recent List display a list of workspace file names displayed in File menu gt File History b Recent List Specifies the history to be edited display a list of workspace file names displayed in File menu gt File History in the default condition Multiple histories can be added Up Moves the selected h
436. ual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save Source Files Options dialog box This dialog box is used to set options when a source file is saved The settings made in this dialog box have the same meaning as the settings made on the Source File by idl file tab in the PM Settings dialog box The default settings correspond to the settings in the PM Settings dialog box The set tings here are also reflected in the PM Settings dialog box Figure 6 41 Save Source Files Options Dialog Box Saye Source Files Options Layer Indent 1 f Replace Tab C Replace space 2 Gonvert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Save As and click the Source File Name Option button Explanation of each area 1 Layer Indent This area specifies whether an indent for a layer is replaced with a specified character when a source file is saved a b No Replace The indent of layers is not replaced Replace Tab The indent of one layer is replaced with one Tab code Replace Space The indent of one layer is replaced with the number of space codes specified with Indent Tab Characters on the View tab in the PM Settings dialog box Not Replace Layer The indents to the specified layer are not replaced with Tab or space codes If 2 is specif
437. uasi directive indicat ing the register mode in the startup file may indicate a different mode from the register mode of the other source files Therefore execute the relevant processing measure from those shown below Modify the quasi directive that indicates the register mode in the startup file as follows In 22 register mode register mode option reg _ mode 55 In 26 register mode register mode option reg _ mode 77 In 32 register mode Deletes option reg mode line Ignore the following warning displayed at linking Id850 W4608 input file have different register modes use rc option for more information 152 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File dialog box Specify a link directive file The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Microcontrollers has been specified as the microcontrollers name in the Add New Project Step 1 9 Project Information dialog box Figure 6 29 Add New Project Step 6 9 LinkDirective File Dialog Box Add New Project Step 6 9 Link Directive File Please specify the Link Directive File 1 Project Information Memory Usage 2 Select Tools Use Internal memory only Use External memory 3 Select Real Time 5 Te 4 Startup File G C Use the Existing file E 5 Register Modet COC Copy and Use the
438. ude file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file 2 Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the drop down list 242 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the OutPut window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 243 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Status dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS status command for the selected file and display the file s status in the Out Put window Figure 6 74 CVS Status Dialog Box CWS Status File 1 GAF M test test1 c i Cancel Command i Xf Filenames E Hel 2 cvs exe status Wi TEF
439. ult Keep object when execute paste command If this check box is selected an object is pasted as an object even if it can be pasted as text To paste it as text use the Paste Special menu item Smart Look up Function Use If this check box is selected the smart lookup function can be used Function List display If this check box is selected the candidate function names with the corresponding number of the characters are displayed Display the List at more than xxx character s Sets the number of the characters at which the candidate functions are displayed 1 to 30 can be selected The default number is 5 User Setup List display If this check box is selected character strings other than function names can be added to the candidate list by setting an arbitrary keyword The keyword can be set by clicking the User Setting button User Setting button Opens the User Setting dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 309 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 9 View tab This tab is used to make settings related to window display Figure 6 120 PM Settings Dialog Box View Tab View show Color Under Line with Caret Line Backeround met Color a sv CR and EOF Character a et Color a a Tab Characters Wind Underline net Color Indowy b i Horizontal Scroll Bar CR and EOF met Color iw Vertical Scroll Bar ReadOnly Source File 9 met Color Ind
440. umping to a desired line tag jump Returning from a tag jump Continuing a tag jump downward Continuing a tag jump upward Moving the caret one word to the right Moving the caret one word to the left Moving the caret up by one line Moving the caret down by one line Moving the caret one character to the right Moving the caret one character to the left Making the search character string specification combo box active 5 3 1 Searching for a character string Selecting the Find menu gt Find opens Find String dialog box to search for a character string User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 47 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 2 Searching for a character string upward Selecting the Find menu gt Find Upward searches for a specified character string in the upward direction toward the beginning of the text If you have not specified a character string to search for the Find String dialog box will be opened If Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line is selected on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab a message confirming whether to continue the search is output once the search to the top line is completed If this check box is not selected it terminates after searching to the top line Note that Find Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab
441. unction buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings Explanation of each area 1 Select Debugger a Debugger The debugger to be used is selected here The name of the debugger specified for use and its version are displayed on the drop down list If a debugger is newly selected the debugger type set in the project opened previously is displayed by default User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 291 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File Name The path for the selected debugger is displayed here A path for another debugger can also be entered directly In this case if this dialog box is opened after being closed by the OK button User selected debugger is displayed on the Debugger combo box c Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger Nothing will be displayed in the default condition 2 Debugger Target a Debug Target File The file to be downloaded to debugger is selected here The load module file names and HEX file names output from the language product are displayed on the drop down list b Execute Symbol Reset after Download Checking this check box executes a symbol reset when a file is downloaded Caution This check box becomes valid only when a project that uses a V850 Microcontrollers device is active c Execute CPU Reset after Download Checking this box executes a CPU reset via the debugger when a file is downloaded 3 Debug Options a Download
442. ure 6 112 PM Settings Dialog Box Workspace Tab Workspace oO xr Gp a i T qu at S at z T i mi H ra gu m gm at m Fom Wi T qu E at Restore window position at each workspace a Open last workspace at startup If this check box is selected the workspace file project file when PM finished previously is opened when PM starts up default b Investigate the files exist at open workspace If this check box is selected when a workspace project is opened it is selected whether there are any files reg istered in the project default c Restore window position at each workspace If this box is selected a workspace project is opened at the same window location as the previous time for every workspace 300 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 External Editor tab This tab is used to set an external editor Figure 6 113 PM Settings Dialog Box External Editor Tab External Editor Editor a Browse Format of tag jump bF filename L line number S a Use external editor If this check box is selected the external editor path setting and the tag jump format can be entered By setting the path and tag jump here an external editor can be started up from PM Editor Specify the external editor Clicking the Browse button opens a reference dialog box in which the editor can be se
443. ure Member to Member of Caret Position when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With If this check box is selected when a character string to be searched or replaced is displayed a words at which the caret is placed is considered to be a C language structure and that structure becomes the target character string from the start of the structure The structures are recognized by gt or Examples are shown below 314 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE pcWork gt dwil paa The character string to be searched is set pcWork gt dwlnfo ia ea The character string to be searched is set pcWork dwinfo Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding If this check box is selected character strings searched directly are added to the candidate character strings in the Find String dialog box default If it is not selected character strings searched directly are not added to the candidate character strings b Warning for Find Replace This area sets the operation mode when a character string cannot be found Beep Sound If this check box is selected a beep sound is output when the search finishes This can be set when the Beep Warning Sound check box on the Edit tab is selected Display Messages If this check box is selected a message is displayed when the search finishes Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings
444. used and specifies the files to be down loaded Opens the Debugger Settings dialog box Register Ex tool Registers the external tool which is started from PM Opens the Register External Tool dialog box Start up Ex tool Starts the registered external tool The name of this menu item is dis played as the designation at the time of registering the external tool File Compare Compares the selected files Opens the File Compare dialog box Device File Installer Starts the device file installer DFINST Refer to 5 8 8 Inserting device file PM Settings Sets up the operating environment for PM Opens the PM Settings dialog box Font Specifies the type and size of the font used in the Edit window Opens the Font dialog box Customize Customizes the menu bar tool bar and so on Opens the Customize dialog box Record the Key Operations Starts and stops recording of the key operations Stop Recording the Key Operations Play Back Plays back the currently recorded key operations Save the Key Operations Saves the recorded key operations to a macro file Opens the Save the Key Operation dialog box Refer to 5 8 15 Commands corresponding to key operations Load the Macro File Loads the macro file to which the key operations have been saved and enables a use of Play Back menu item Opens the Load the Macro File dialog box Play Back the Macro File Loads the macro file to which the key o
445. vely the file name to be specified can also be input in this edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Message area The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area Current position area The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area gt gt mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray Function buttons Returns to the previous wizard step Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection Refer to Figure 6 12 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If after selecting Do Not specify now for the startup file and registering the source file in the New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box and then returning to this dialog box and specifying the source file registered in the New WorkSpace Step 7 9 Setup Source Files dialog box as the startup file and ending the wizard as is the following linker option setting message is displayed and the startup file is registered to both the source file and project related files Startup fi
446. ven if the same opera tion is performed while PM is running 366 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Number Description Q2103 Do you wish to clear the undo buffer Do nothing if you select No This is to verify whether the undo buffer is cleared when creating a prototype declaration Action by User Yes Clears undo buffer and create prototype declaration No Returns to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed even if the same opera tion is performed while PM is running Q2104 Message The read only source file s was found Do you wish to make prototypes for the source file but the read only file s Cause A read only source file was discovered while creating a prototype declaration Action by User Yes Creates a prototype declaration for a source file that is not read only No Returns to the active Edit window without doing anything Q2200 Message PM has finished searching this file Do you wish to continue it from the top of file Continue it from the top of file if you select Ys Cause Searching finished at the last line s indicates the key assigned to Down Action by User Yes Searches from the first line No Stops searching Q2201 Message PM has finished searching this file Do you wish to continue it from the end of file Con tinue it from the
447. w WorkSpace wizard 122 Next Tag Jump 54 90 Next Tag Jump Upward 54 90 O Object 89 One Character Left 56 90 One Character Right 56 90 One Line Down 55 90 One Line Up 55 90 One Word Left 55 90 One Word Right 55 90 Open 36 87 Open dialog box 167 Open window information 95 Open Workspace 37 87 Open Workspace dialog box 173 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 393 Operating environments 25 Related development tools 25 DLL 25 Host machine 25 Option bar 62 92 98 OutPut window 120 Drag and drop function 121 Opening 120 Operations performed with the right mouse button 121 Tag Jump function 120 Output Window 63 92 Overview 22 P Paste 44 88 Paste Special 44 88 Play Back 74 94 Play Back the Macro File 75 94 Play back the Macro File dialog box 334 Play Back the Register Macro 75 94 PM plus 37 PM 22 PM Help 78 95 PM Settings 73 94 PM Settings dialog box 299 Print 40 88 Print dialog box 186 Print Direct 40 88 Print Preview 40 88 Project 22 64 92 Add New Project 92 Add Other Files 92 Add Project Related Files 92 Add Source Files 92 Adding a project related file 66 Adding a source file 66 Adding other files 66 CVS Commit 65 92 CVS Diff 66 92 CVS Log 65 92 CVS Status
448. was dropped If the file is dropped at 1 the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are projects affiliated with the project group at the drop location If the file is dropped at 2 the file is added as a source file treating that project as the addition target project since there is one project affiliated with the project group at the drop location If the file is dropped at 3 the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are all projects registered to the workspace Multiple files can be dropped 110 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box When dropping a workspace file and a file other than the workspace file together Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Opens other files that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the OutPut window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened When dropping a project file and a file other than the project file together The operation differs depending on where the file was dropped If the file is dropped at 1 or 2 a pr
449. wizard Returns to the previous wizard step a T the next wizard Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box 164 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings Step 3 3 Setup Source Files dialog box Specifies the source file information on the project Figure 6 36 Project Settings Step 3 3 Setup Source Files Dialog Box Project Settines Step 3 3 Setup Source Files source Files Add Remove Remove 4 Down Cancel Help 1 Source Files The names of the source files specified by the project file are displayed in the order the build processing with the relative path on the basis of the project folder Up to 2048 source files can be registered Opens Add Source Files dialog box to add the source file to the project Removes the selected source file from the list Remove All Removes all the source files from the list Moves the selected source file up within the list Moves the selected source file down within the list Cautions If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible Make is assembled compiled in accordance with the program type in the order the files are displayed in the list of source files The path of project folder
450. workspace in opened state The function name candidates are displayed based on the information of the source file affiliated with the work space If multiple projects exist the function name candidates are displayed based on the function information of all the projects When editing source file not affiliated with workspace with workspace in opened state The function name candidates are displayed based on the function information in that Edit window The function name candidates of the source file affiliated with the workspace are not displayed When workspace is in closed state The function name candidates are displayed based on the function information in that Edit window Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the Edit window When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping
451. x 5 Collapses the sixth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fifth layers Note Collapse This Layer Collapses the layer of the line to which the current caret is positioned Apply Layer Rule Applies a layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings Show Index 4 Collapses the fifth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fourth layers Note for the Layer menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 91 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 View menu Eunction List Lists the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window Opens the Function List dialog box Opens the Layer List dialog box Toggles the display of the OutPut window between on and off Display Content Icon Toggles the display format of an object between contents or icon When an object displayed as icon is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Content When an object displayed as contents is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Icon Display All Object as Content Displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as contents Display All Object as Icon Displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as icons 6 Project menu Select Activ
452. x is used to register a macro file to a key Add the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to add a macro file for macro registra tion Change the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to change the stored contents of a macro file Window List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the widows that are currently open Shortcut List dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of the shortcut keys set in PM About PM dialog box This dialog box is used to display the version information about PM User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 83 84 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6 1 shows a screen image when displaying the various windows Figure 6 1 Window Composition of PM ve PM sample pre OutPut File Edit Find Laver Wiew Project Build Tool Window Help SB Oe0 4R 28 efe es A i main ButtonSys Buttondys ame Build ProjectWindow LE ac WRCAPMtestMestlc C MPM test Meh ta ax A Ea main B 1 Source Files H E testi c Funci3 3 aft H E test c E E test3c m letop NULL a Ne for nOnt 0 nnt lt 10 nEnt h s ag a Include Files S tchar inked H E Test2 h Func limi H E Testth a Project Related Files crtN2s sample dir fa Other Files Library Test CAPM test testl_c UntitledI2 H E Source Files E 9 Include Files ki o Project Related Files
453. y If this box is selected only the source file to which the caret is currently positioned is searched 202 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Find Next Searches for a match for the search key If Display Mini Dialog is selected the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Cautions When the Esc key is pressed the search is aborted The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed at the next search If a search cannot find any match for the search key the operator is notified by the issue of a message or beep depending on the setting of Warning for Find Replace on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 203 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace String dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string Figure 6 53 Replace String Dialog Box Replace String Find What main Replace With Jaub Replace Match Whole Word Only Replace All trom Top of Line BEE EE W Match Gaze This Source File Only Cancel Pegar Spree Help W Display Mini Dialog This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Cautions Opening Select the Find menu gt Replace Select the Replace button on th
454. y opened workspace files or project files 5 1 24 Exiting PM To exit the PM select the File menu gt Exit PM or the Close button For any window that has been edited a mes sage for confirming whether to save the changes is displayed then the PM is exited Note that PM cannot be terminated during build execution 40 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 Edit Functions Operations related to editing files in PM are shown below The operations described in this section are performed using the Edit menu in the Main window Canceling an edit operation Canceling an Undo operation Cutting off character strings Copying character strings Cutting off character strings Cut for Append Copying character strings Copy for Append Copying character strings as a screen image Inserting the contents of clipboard Inserting the contents of clipboard with specified format Deleting character strings Deleting a word Deleting characters to the end of a word Deleting a line Deleting character strings to the top of line Deleting character strings to the end of line Selecting a word at the caret Selecting a word to the left of the caret Selecting a word to the right of the caret Selecting a range to the top of line Selecting a range to the end of line Selecting entire contents Grouping by keyword Restoring color of grouping line Creating func
455. yed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project Specified the folder other than the network path Two or more workspace files or project files cannot be dropped Multiple workspace files and project files were dropped in a main frame or the Edit window If dropping a workspace or project in a main frame or the Edit window specify only one such item A workspace is not opened during user program execution Please open a workspace after stopping a program An attempt was made to drop and open a workspace during user program execution Stop the user program via the debugger and open a workspace again The addition of a project cannot be performed during user program execution An attempt was made to drop and add a project file during user program execution Stop the user program via the debugger and add a project file again This object cannot edit An attempt was made to edit a non editable object Edit an editable object Cannot specify the extension IDL and the other extensions When setting Of Type during global replacement IDL and another extension were set at the same time When an IDL file the target of replacement specify only IDL files s The file extension was wrong Please change the file extension When setting Of Type during global replacement an extension other than the global replacement target extensions was set s indicates the specified extension Specify a target extension and execut
456. you select a range using Shift click if you cannot select the range up to the click position the range up to the last line where range selection is possible is selected and the screen is scrolled so that line is visible Range selection is canceled at the point when an operation that causes the caret to move is performed Then the caret moves to a new location If however range selection is canceled by pressing an arrow key the new caret position will be as follows Right arrow key or Down arrow key Right end of the selected character string range end of the last line toward the end of text of the selected line range Left arrow key or Up arrow key Left end of the selected character string range beginning of the first line toward the beginning of text of the selected line range While you are selecting a range pressing the Esc key causes the range selection to be canceled User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 113 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Moving lines layers When you drag the mark at the beginning of line the line s is moved with either of the following marks displayed foves a single line only Moves multiple lines Dragging the mark of a line with a lower layer causes the line and the lower layer to be moved Dragging the mark of a line to the right or left causes the layer level to be changed Copying lines layers When you drag the mark at the beginning of line while holding down the Ctrl key
457. ypes automatically Opens the Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box Insert New Object Inserts new embedded objects Opens the Insert Object dialog box Link Edits the linked object and changes the link information Opens the Links dialog box Object Starts an application and converts a file type for a selected object Note This menu item in the above table is not displayed by default To display this menu item customize the settings for the Edit menu by selecting the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 3 Find menu Find Searches for the specified character string Opens the Find String dialog box Find Upward Searches for the specified character string toward the beginning of the file Note Find Downward Searches for the specified character string toward the end of the file Note Find the Word Upward Searches for the word at the caret position toward the beginning of the file Note Find the Word Downward Searches for the word at the caret position toward the end of the file Note Replace Replaces the specified character string with the replacement character string Opens the Replace String dialog box To a Specific Line Moves the caret position to the specified line Opens the Jump to Specified Line dialog box User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM 89 90 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE To the Specific Line in the Source File Moves the caret position to the specified li
458. ze selected when the Project window or OutPut window is displayed Previous Size Only files recorded in the file history information are opened in the size they were when closed previously Files not saved in the file history information are opened in the default size of PM b Memorize of Windows Position This area is used to select whether the window position is saved during editing If the relevant check box is selected the window position is saved when the window is closed If it is not selected the window position is not saved By default all check boxes are selected c Always Maximize PM If this check box is selected the previous information is ignored and PM starts up in the maximum size 306 User s Manual U18416EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Path tab This tab is used to make settings related to paths Figure 6 118 PM Settings Dialog Box Path Tab Path External HELF 1 Shift F1 E a Ctr F1 El D Shift Ctr F1 e El Make Backup File in Specified Folder b GAProeram Files NEO Electronics Tools PM WEIN el Opern Save in Specified Folder Cc C Proeram Files NEO Electronics Tools PMY WSA birh SS d4 Folder for Macro File CAFM testi Macro Bi a External HELP This area specifies the paths for the external help files to be referenced during editing 1 Shift F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing t
459. zero or more times Same as X X appears one or more times Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will ap

PM+ Ver. 6.30 Project Manager UM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents